JMA-9100 Instruction Manual
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual
JMA-9122-6XA/9XA/6XAH
JMA-9123-7XA/9XA
JMA-9133-SA JMA-9132-SA
JMA-9133-SA
JMA-9132-SA
JMA-9123-7XA/9XA
JMA-9122-6XA/9XA/6XAH
JMA-9110-6XA/6XAH
INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
For further information,contact:
URL http://www.jrc.co.jp
Marine Service Department
Telephone : +81-3-3492-1305
Facsimile : +81-3-3779-1420
e-mail : [email protected]
AMSTERDAM Branch
Telephone : +31-20-658-0750
Facsimile : +31-20-658-0755
e-mail : [email protected]
SEATTLE Branch
Telephone : +1-206-654-5644
Facsimile : +1-206-654-7030
e-mail : [email protected]
CODE No.7ZPRD0685 01ETM ISO 9001, ISO 14001 Certified
MAR. 2008 Edition 1 JRC Printed in Japan
PRECAUTIONS BEFORE OPERATION
If it is impossible to turn off the circuit, move the victim away promptly using
insulators such as dry wood plate and cloth without touching the victim directly.
In case of electric shock, breathing may stop suddenly if current flows to the
respiration center in the brain. If the shock is not so strong, artificial respiration
may recover breathing. When shocked by electricity, the victim will come to look
very bad with weak pulse or without beating, resulting in unconsciousness and
rigidity. In this case, it is necessary to perform an emergency measure
immediately.
i
FIRST-AID TREATMENTS
First-aid treatments
As far as the victim of electric shock is not in dangerous condition, do not move
him and practice artificial respiration on him immediately. Once started, it should
be continued rhythmically.
(1) Do not touch the victim confusedly as a result of the accident, but the
rescuer may also get an electric shock.
(2) Turn off the power source calmly and move the victim away quietly from
the electric line.
(4) Lay the victim on this back and loosen his necktie, clothes, belt, etc.
(5)
c. Examine his breathing bringing the back of your hand or your face
close to his face.
(6) Open the victim's mouth and take out artificial teeth, cigarette or chewing
gum if any. Keep his mouth open, stretch his tongue and insert a towel or
the like in his mouth to prevent the tongue from suffocating. (If it is hard to
open his mouth due to set teeth, open it with a screwdriver and insert a towel
in this mouth.)
(7) Then, wipe his mouth so that foaming mucus does not accumulate inside.
ii
When pulse is beating but breathing has stopped
(Mouth-to-mouth respiration) Fig 1.
(1) Tilt the victim's head back as far as this face looks back. (A pillow may be
inserted his neck.)
(2) Push his jaw upward to open his throat wide (to spread his airway).
(3) Pinch the victim's nostrils and take a deep breath, block his mouth
completely with yours and blow into his mouth strongly. Take a deep breath
again and blow into his mouth. Continue this 10 to 15 times a minutes
(blocking his nostrils).
(4) Carefully watch that he has recovered his natural breathing and atop
practicing artificial respiration.
(5) If it is difficult to open the victim's mouth, insert a rubber or vinyl tube into
one of his nostrils and blow into it blocking the other nostril and his mouth
completely.
(6) When the victim recovers consciousness, he may try to stand up suddenly,
but let him lie calmly and serve him with a cup of hot coffee or tea and keep
him warm and quiet. (Never give him alcoholic drinks.)
iii
When both pulse and breathing have stopped
Perform the (Cardiac massage) Fig 2. and (Mouth-to-mouth respiration) Fig 1.
When no pulse has come not to be felt, his pupils are open and no heartbeat is
heard, cardiac arrest is supposed to have occurred and artificial respiration must
be performed.
(1) Place your both hands, one hand on the other, on the lower one third area of
his breastbone and compress his breast with your elbows applying your
weight on his breast so that it is dented about 2cm (Repeat compressing his
breast 50 times or so a minutes). (Cardiac massage)
Repeat cardiac massages about 15 times and blow into his mouth 2 times
quickly, and repeat this combination.
One person repeats cardiac massages 15 times while the other person blow
into his mouth twice, and they shall repeat this combination. (Perform the
cardiac massage and mouth-to-mouth respiration)
(3) Examine his pupils and his pulse sometimes. When the both have returned
to normal, stop the artificial respiration, serve him with a cup of hot coffee
or tea and keep him warm and calm while watching him carefully. Commit
the victim to a medical specialist depending on his condition. (Never give
him alcoholic drinks.) To let him recover from the mental shock, it is
necessary for persons concerned to understand his situations and the
necessary treatment.
iv
PREFACE
Thank you very much for purchasing the JRC marine radar equipment, JMA-9100
series.
v
Before Operation
Pictorial Indication
Various pictorial indications are included in this manual and are shown on these
equipment so that you can operate them safety and correctly and prevent any
danger to you and/or to other persons and any damage to your property during
operation. Such indications and their meanings are as follows.
Electric Shock
Disassembling Prohibited
Prohibited
Warning Label
vi
PRECAUTIONS
vii
Make sure to turn off the scanner safety switch. Failure to
! comply may result in injuries caused by physical contact
with the rotating scanner.
viii
Microwave radiation level:
Keep away from a scanner when it is transmitting.
The high level of microwave is radiated from the front
face of the scanner specified below. The microwave
exposure at close range could result in injuries
(especially of the eyes).
ix
When cleaning the display screen, do not wipe it too
strongly with a dry cloth. Also, do not use gasoline or
thinner to clean the screen. Failure to comply will result
in damage to the screen surface.
Do not change MBS Level/Area unless absolutely
! necessary.
Incorrect adjustment will result in deletion of nearby
target images and thus collisions may occur resulting in
death or serious injuries.
When disposing of used lithium batteries, be sure to
! insulate the batteries by attaching a piece of adhesive
tape on the + and - terminals. Failure to comply may
cause heat generation, explosion, or fire when the
batteries get shorted out.
x
Use Target Tracking (TT) function only as a navigation
! aid. The final navigation decision must always be made
by the operator him/herself. Making the final navigation
decision based only on tracking target information may
cause accidents.
Tracking target information such as vector, target
numerical data, and alarms may contain some errors.
Also, targets that are not detected by the radar cannot be
acquired or tracked.
Making the final navigation decision based only on the
radar display may cause accidents such as collisions or
running aground.
A malfunction may occur if the power in the ship is
! instantaneously interrupted during operation of the radar.
In this case, the power should be turned on again.
xi
When setting a guard zone, make sure to properly adjust
! gain, sea-surface reflection suppression level, and rain/
snow reflection suppression level so that the optimal
target images are always on the radar screen. The guard
zone alarm will not be activated for targets undetected by
the radar, and it may result in accidents such as
collisions.
The simulation function is used exclusively for deciding
! whether or not target tracking is properly operating.
Therefore, never use this function unless you wish to
check target tracking operations.
Note especially that, if this function is used during actual
navigation, simulated targets are displayed and may
become confused with other actual targets. Therefore,
never use this function during actual navigation.
Optimal values have been set for VD LEVEL and
CONSTANT; therefore, never change their values unless
absolutely necessary. Failure to comply may result in
accidents that would lower target tracking performance.
Make sure to shut off the main power before replacing
parts. Failure to comply may result in electrocution or
equipment failure.
xii
Make sure to take off your watch when your hand must
! get close to the magnetron.
Failure to comply may result in damage to the watch
since the magnetron is a strong magnet.
Make sure that two or more staff member work together
! when replacing the LCD. If only one person attempts to
replace the LCD, he/she may drop it and become injured.
xiii
Do not change the quantization level settings unless
absolutely necessary. If set at an inappropriate value, the
target acquisition or target tracking function deteriorates,
and this may lead to accidents.
xiv
The Mounting Point of the Warning Label
Warning Label
Warning Label
xv
Warning Label
Warning Label
xvi
Warning
Label
Warning
Label
xvii
Warning Label
Warning Label
xviii
Warning Label
Warning Label
xix
EQUIPMENT APPEARANCE
xx
Scanner Unit Type NKE-1129-7 (7 feet)
xxi
Scanner Unit Type NKE-1125-6 (6 feet)
xxii
Scanner Unit Type NKE-2103-6 (6 feet)
xxiii
Display Unit Type NCD-4990 (Stand alone type)
xxiv
Monitor Unit Type NWZ-170 (Desktop type)
xxv
GLOSSARY
This section describes the main terms used for this equipment and general related
maritime terms.
A
AZ Acquisition/Activation zone
A zone set up by the operator in which the system should
automatically acquire radar targets and activate reported AIS targets
when entering the zone.
Activated target A target representing the automatic or manual activation of a
sleeping target for the display of additional information.
AIS Automatic Identification System
A system which enables ships and shore stations to obtain
identifying and navigation information about other ships at sea,
using an automated transponder.
Anti-clutter rain Rain/snow clutter suppression.
Anti-clutter sea Sea clutter suppression.
Associated target A target simultaneously representing a tracked target and a reported
AIS target having similar parameters (position, course, speed)
which comply with an association algorithm.
AZI AZImuth stabilization mode
B
BCR/BCT Bow Crossing Range/Bow Crossing Time
C
C up Course up
Own ship's course is pointed to the top center of the radar display.
CCRP Consistent Common Reference Point
A location on own ship, to which all horizontal measurements such
as target range, bearing, relative course, relative speed, CPA or
TCPA are referenced, typically the conning position of the bridge.
Clutter Unwanted reflections on a radar screen, from sea surface, rain or
snow.
COG Course Over Ground
The direction of the ship's movement relative to the earth, measured
on board the ship, expressed in angular units from true north
CORREL CORRELation
xxvi
CPA/TCPA The distance to the Closest Point of Approach/Time to the Closest
Point of Approach.
Limits are set by the operator and are related to own ship.
CTW Course Through Water
The direction of the ship's movement through the water
D
DRIFT The current velocity for manual correction or the current speed on
the horizontal axis of the 2-axis log is displayed.
E
EBL Electronic Bearing Line
An electronic bearing line originated from own ship's position.
ETA Estimated Time of Arrival
G
Ground A display mode in which speed and course information are referred
stabilization to the ground, using ground track input data.
H
HDG Heading
The horizontal direction that the bow of a ship is pointing at any
instant, expressed in angular units from a reference direction.
HL Heading line
A graphic line on a radar presentation drawn from the consistent
common reference point to the bearing scale to indicate the heading
of the ship .
HSC High Speed Craft
Vessels which comply with the definition in SOLAS for high speed
craft
H up Head up
Own ship's heading line is always pointed to the top center of the
radar display.
I
IMO International Maritime Organisation
IR RADAR Interference Rejector
ISW A device to switch over two or more radar display units and two or
more scanners.
L
xxvii
Lost AIS target A target symbol representing the last valid position of an AIS target
before the reception of its data was lost, or its last dead-reckoned
position.
Lost tracked One for which target information is no longer available due to poor,
target lost or obscured signals.
LP Long Pulse
M
MMSI Maritime Mobile Service Identity
MOB Man OverBoard
MON Performance monitor
MP Medium Pulse
N
NM 1nm=1852m
N up North up
P
PI Parallel Index line
Past positions Equally time-spaced past position marks of a tracked or AIS target
and own ship.
POSN POSitioN
PRF Pulse Repetition Frequency
The number of radar pulses transmitted each second.
PROC PROCess
Radar signal processing function
R
Radar beacon A navigation aid which responds to the radar transmission by
generating a radar signal to identify its position and identity
Radar cross- Radar cross-section of a target determines the power density
section returned to the radar for a particular power density incident on the
target
Range Rings A set of concentric circles labeled by distance from CCRP.
Reference target A symbol indicating that the associated tracked stationary target is
used as a speed reference for the ground stabilisation
Relative speed The speed of a target relative to own ship's speed data
Relative vector A predicted movement of a target relative to own ship's motion
xxviii
RM Relative Motion
A display on which the position of own ship remains fixed, and all
targets move relative to own ship.
RM(R) Relative Motion. Relative Trails.
RM(T) Relative Motion. True Trails.
ROT Rate Of Turn
Change of heading per time unit.
Route A set of waypoints.
RR Range Rings
S
SART Search And Rescue Transponder
Radar transponder capable of operating in the 9GHz band
Sea stabilization A display mode in which speed and course information are referred
to the sea.
Sea state Status of the sea condition due to the weather environment,
expressed as a sea state 0 for flat conditions with minimal wind, to
sea state 8 for very rough sea conditions.
SET The current direction for manual correction or the current speed on
the horizontal axis of the 2-axis log is displayed.
Sleeping AIS A target indicating the presence and orientation of a vessel
target equipped with AIS in a certain location.
xxix
Trial manoeuvre A graphical simulation facility used to assist the operator to
perform a proposed maneuver for navigation and collision
avoidance purposes.
True course The direction of motion relative to ground or to sea, of a target
expressed as an angular displacement from north
True speed The speed of a target relative to ground, or to sea
True vector A vector representing the predicted true motion of a target, showing
course and speed with reference to the ground or sea
TT Target Tracking.
A computer process of observing the sequential changes in the
position of a radar target in order to establish its motion. Such a
target is a Tracked Target.
TTG Time To Go.
Time to next waypoint.
TXRX Transmitter Receiver Unit
U
UTC Universal Time Coordinated.
The international standard of time, kept by atomic clocks around
the world.
V
VRM Variable Range Marker
An adjustable range ring used to measure the distance to a target.
W
Waypoint A geographical location on a route indicating a event.
xxx
Index
SECTION 1
GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION
1.1 FUNCTIONS ...........................................................................................1-1
1.1.1 Function of This System .................................................................1-1
1.2 FEATURES .............................................................................................1-2
1.3 CONFIGURATION ..................................................................................1-4
1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS .........................................................................1-6
1.5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS ........................................................1-25
SECTION 2
NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF CONTROL PANEL KEYS AND FUNCTIONS OF
SOFTWARE BUTTONS
2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY .............................................................................2-1
2.2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF CONTROL PANEL KEYS ..................2-11
2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS ...........................................2-16
SECTION 3
BASIC OPERATION
3.1 OPERATION FLOW ...............................................................................3-1
3.1.1 Power ON and Start the System ....................................................3-2
3.1.2 Observe and Adjust Video ..............................................................3-4
3.1.3 Acquire and Measure Data .............................................................3-4
3.1.4 Display and Measure with Reference to CCRP ............................3-4
3.1.5 End the Operation and Stop the System .......................................3-5
3.2 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO ..........................................................3-6
3.2.1 Adjust Monitor Brilliance [BRILL] ..................................................3-6
3.2.2 Change Observation Range [RANGE+/-] ......................................3-6
3.2.3 Tune ..................................................................................................3-7
3.2.4 Adjust Gain [GAIN] .........................................................................3-8
3.2.5 Suppress Sea Clutter [SEA] ..........................................................3-9
3.2.6 Suppress Rain/Snow Clutter [RAIN] ...........................................3-11
3.2.7 Reset Alarm Buzzer [ALARM ACK] .............................................3-12
3.2.8 To get the appropriate image that targets can be easily observed ...3-13
3.3 OPERATION PROCEDURES ..............................................................3-14
3.3.1 Move Cross Cursor Mark by Trackball ........................................3-14
3.3.2 Operate Software Buttons ...........................................................3-15
3.3.3 Basic Menu Operation ..................................................................3-16
3.3.4 Operation on Numeric Value, Latitude / Longitude and Character
Input menu .....................................................................................3-17
3.3.5 Overview of Menu Structure .........................................................3-22
3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION ........................................................3-23
3.4.1 Interference Rejection (IR) ............................................................3-23
3.4.2 Switch Transmitter Pulse Length [GAIN] ....................................3-24
3.4.3 Target Enhance (ENH) ..................................................................3-25
3.4.4 Use Video Processing (PROC) .....................................................3-26
3.4.5 Switch Azimuth Display Mode (AZI MODE) ................................3-27
3.4.6 Switch True/Relative Motion Display Mode (TM/RM) .................3-28
3.4.7 Move Own Ships Display Position (Off Center) .........................3-29
3.4.8 Display Radar Trails (Trails) .........................................................3-30
3.4.9 Zoom (x2) .......................................................................................3-33
3.4.10 Hide/Display Range Rings [HL OFF] ...........................................3-34
3.4.11 Hide Graphics Information on Radar Display [DATA OFF] .......3-34
3.4.12 Switch Day/Night Mode [DAY/NIGHT] .........................................3-35
3.4.13 Adjust Operation Panel Brilliance [PANEL] ................................3-35
3.4.14 Set True Bearing ............................................................................3-36
3.4.15 Set Own Ship Speed .....................................................................3-36
3.4.16 Magnet Compass Correction (MAG Compass Setting) .............3-37
3.5 USE OWN SHIP'S TRACK ...................................................................3-39
3.5.1 Display Own Ship's Track (Display Own Track) .........................3-39
3.5.2 Set Display Color of Own Ship's Track (Display Own Track Color) .3-40
3.5.3 Save Own Ship's Track (Own Track Memory) ............................3-41
3.5.4 Cancel Saving of Own Ship's Track (Own Track Memory) ........3-41
3.5.5 Clear Own Ship's Track (Clear Own Track) ................................3-42
3.5.6 Use Expanded Own Ship's Track (Own Track Type) .................3-42
3.5.7 Use Water Depth Track (Water Depth Track) ..............................3-44
3.5.8 Use Water Temperature Track (Water TEMP Track) ..................3-45
3.5.9 Use Tidal Current Track (Current Vector Track) .........................3-46
3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP ...........................................................................3-47
3.6.1 Create User Map (Mark/Line) ........................................................3-47
3.6.2 Set User Map Display (Mark Display Setting) .............................3-50
3.6.3 Edit User Map (Edit User Map) .....................................................3-52
3.6.4 Correct Position on User Map (Shift User Map) .........................3-60
3.6.5 Save User Map ...............................................................................3-61
3.6.6 Set and Display Geodetic System (Geodetic) .............................3-65
3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION ......................................................................3-67
3.7.1 Display Route/Destination Mark (Select Route) .........................3-67
3.7.2 Edit Route (Set Route Sequence) ................................................3-68
3.7.3 Edit Route Make with Latitude and Longitude (Waypoint Input) .3-75
3.7.4 Use Route Monitoring Function (Waypoint/Route Alarm) .........3-79
3.7.5 Method of Using Route .................................................................3-81
3.7.6 Detailed Route Settings ................................................................3-82
3.7.7 Clear Waypoint/Route Data (Clear WPT/Route Data) .................3-86
3.7.8 Operate Route Data File ................................................................3-87
3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS ......................................................................3-91
3.8.1 Set Radar Signal Processing (Process Setting) .........................3-91
3.8.2 Set Radar Trails (RADAR Trails Setting) .....................................3-95
3.8.3 Set Scanner Unit (TXRX Setting) .................................................3-97
3.8.4 Set Cursor (Cursor Setting) ..........................................................3-98
3.8.5 Set Radar Display (Display Setting) ............................................3-99
3.8.6 Adjust Sound Volume (Buzzer Volume) ....................................3-102
3.8.7 Set User Option Keys [OPTION 1/2] ..........................................3-103
3.8.8 Set Navigation Data Display (Multi Window Setting) ...............3-105
3.8.9 AUTO Backup ..............................................................................3-110
3.9 USE FUNCTION KEY [USER] ...........................................................3-111
3.9.1 Operation Procedures .................................................................3-111
3.9.2 Function Setting Menu Items .....................................................3-112
3.9.3 Overview of Function Operations (User Function Setting) .....3-113
3.9.4 Overview of saved Function Setting Data .................................3-117
3.10 USE USER SETTING .........................................................................3-118
3.10.1 Save Operating State (Save User Setting) ................................3-118
3.10.2 Load Operating State (Load User Setting) ................................3-119
3.10.3 Delete Operating State (Delete User Setting) ...........................3-119
3.11 USING CARD .....................................................................................3-120
3.11.1 Operate File on the Card (File Manager) ...................................3-120
3.12 RECEIVE PORT SETTING .................................................................3-127
3.12.1 Receive Port Setting (RX Port) ...................................................3-127
SECTION 4
MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING
4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS ..............................................................4-1
4.1.1 Using Cursor (Cursor) ....................................................................4-2
4.1.2 Using Range Rings (Range Rings) ................................................4-2
4.1.3 Using Electronic Bearing Line (EBL1/EBL2) ................................4-3
4.1.4 Using Parallel Index Lines (PI Menu) .............................................4-8
4.1.5 Operating EBL Maneuver Function (EBL Maneuver Setting) ....4-14
4.1.6 Operating EBL, VRM, and PI with Cursor ...................................4-16
4.2 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING ....................................4-19
4.2.1 Measurement with Cursor Position (Cursor) ..............................4-20
4.2.2 Measurement with Electronic Bearing Line and Variable Range
Marker [EBL] [VRM] .....................................................................4-20
4.2.3 Measurement with Two Arbitrary Points .....................................4-21
SECTION 5
OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS
5.1 PREPARATION ......................................................................................5-1
5.1.1 Collision Avoidance ........................................................................5-2
5.1.2 Definitions of Symbols ...................................................................5-5
5.1.3 Radar Display ..................................................................................5-9
5.1.4 Cursor Modes (Cursor) .................................................................5-11
5.1.5 Setting Collision Decision Criteria ..............................................5-13
5.1.6 Setting Vectors (Vector Time) ......................................................5-14
5.1.7 Setting the GPS antenna location ................................................5-14
5.2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION .....................................................5-15
5.2.1 Acquiring Target [ACQ] ................................................................5-15
5.2.2 Canceling Unwanted Tracked Targets [ACQ CANCEL] .............5-17
5.2.3 Tracked Target Data Display [TGT DATA] ..................................5-18
5.2.4 Displaying Target ID No.(Target Number Display) .....................5-19
5.2.5 Adding Tracked Target ID Name (Name) .....................................5-20
5.2.6 Reference Target (Reference) ......................................................5-21
5.2.7 Operation Test (TT Test Menu) ...................................................5-22
5.3 AIS OPERATION ..................................................................................5-27
5.3.1 Restrictions ....................................................................................5-27
5.3.2 Setting AIS Display Function (AIS Function) ..............................5-27
5.3.3 Activate AIS Targets (Activate AIS) .............................................5-28
5.3.4 Deactivate AIS Targets (Deactivate AIS) .....................................5-28
5.3.5 Displaying AIS Information [TGT DATA] .....................................5-29
5.3.6 Displaying Target ID No. (Target Number Display) ....................5-32
5.3.7 Setting AIS Filter (AIS Filter Setting) ...........................................5-33
5.3.8 Conditions for Deciding AIS Target to be Lost ..........................5-36
5.3.9 Setting Conditions for AIS Alarm (AIS Alarm Setting) ...............5-37
5.4 DECISION OF TARGETS AS IDENTICAL (Association) ...................5-38
5.4.1 Setting of Function to Decide Targets as Identical (Association) 5-38
5.4.2 Setting of Conditions for Deciding AIS and Tracked Targets as
Identical (Association Setting) .....................................................5-38
5.4.3 Types of Decision Conditions to be Set ......................................5-39
5.5 ALARM DISPLAY .................................................................................5-40
5.5.1 CPA / TCPA Alarm .........................................................................5-41
5.5.2 Alarm for New Target Acquired in Automatic Acquisition Zone
(New Target) ...................................................................................5-42
5.5.3 Lost Target Alarm (Lost) ...............................................................5-42
5.5.4 Gyro Set Alarm ..............................................................................5-43
5.6 TRACK FUNCTION ..............................................................................5-44
5.6.1 Past Position (Past POSN) ...........................................................5-44
5.6.2 Target Ship's Tracks (Target Track) ............................................5-45
5.7 TRIAL MANEUVERING (Trial Maneuver) ..........................5-54
5.7.1 Trial Maneuvering in the True Vector Mode ................................5-55
5.7.2 Trial Maneuvering in the Relative Vector Mode ..........................5-56
5.7.3 Operation of Trial Maneuvering Function ...................................5-57
SECTION 6
TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY
6.1 RADAR WAVE WITH THE HORIZON ...................................................6-1
6.2 STRENGTH OF REFLECTION FROM THE TARGET ...........................6-3
6.3 SEA CLUTTER AND RAIN AND SNOW CLUTTER ..............................6-5
6.4 FALSE ECHOES ....................................................................................6-9
6.5 DISPLAY OF RADAR TRANSPONDER (SART) ................................6-12
6.6 DISPLAY OF AIS-SART .......................................................................6-14
6.6.1 Display ...........................................................................................6-14
6.6.2 Numeric Display ............................................................................6-15
SECTION 7
SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION
7.1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION .............................................................7-1
7.1.1 How to Open the Serviceman MenuService Man Menu.........7-1
7.1.2 GYRO I/F Setting .............................................................................7-2
7.1.3 Tuning .............................................................................................7-5
7.1.4 Bearing Adjustment ........................................................................7-7
7.1.5 Range Adjustment ...........................................................................7-7
7.1.6 Navigator Setting (Device) .............................................................7-8
7.1.7 Setting of True Bearing Value ........................................................7-9
7.1.8 Antenna Height Setting (Antenna Height) .....................................7-9
7.1.9 Setting of CCRP (CCRP Setting) ..................................................7-10
7.2 SETTINGS ............................................................................................7-12
7.2.1 Communication Port Setting (COM Port Setting) .......................7-12
7.2.2 Sector Blank Setting (Sector Blank) ............................................7-16
7.2.3 TNI Blank Setting (TNI Blank) ......................................................7-17
7.2.4 Setting of Bearing Pulses from Scanner Unit (Output Pulse) ...7-18
7.2.5 Slave Mode Setting (Master/Slave) ..............................................7-19
7.2.6 Language Setting (Language) ......................................................7-20
7.2.7 Date Time Setting ..........................................................................7-20
7.2.8 Input Installation Information .......................................................7-21
7.2.9 Setting the Alarm System .............................................................7-22
7.2.10 Network Setting (Network) ...........................................................7-26
7.2.11 LAN Port Setting) ..........................................................................7-29
7.3 ADJUSTMENT ......................................................................................7-32
7.3.1 Noise Level Adjustment (Noise Level) ........................................7-32
7.3.2 Adjustment of Target Tracking Function (TT) ............................7-33
7.3.3 Main Bang Suppression Level Adjustment (MBS) .....................7-35
7.3.4 Adjustment of Performance Monitor ...........................................7-37
7.4 MAINTENANCE MENU ........................................................................7-39
7.4.1 Antenna Safety Switch (Safety Switch) .......................................7-39
7.4.2 Initialization of Memory Area(Area Initial) ...................................7-40
7.4.3 Save of Internal Memory Data (Card1/2) .....................................7-41
7.4.4 Restoration of Scanner Unit Operation Time (TXRX Time) ......7-42
7.4.5 Update of Character String Data (String Data Update) .............7-44
SECTION 8
COUNTERMEASURES FOR TROUBLE AND ADJUSTMENT
8.1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE ....................................................................8-1
8.2 MAINTENANCE ON EACH UNIT ...........................................................8-2
8.2.1 Scanner Unit NKE-1125/1129/1130/1139/2103/2254 ....................8-2
8.2.2 Flexible wave guide (JMA-9123-7XA/9XA) ....................................8-4
8.2.3 Coaxial Cable (JMA-9133-SA) ........................................................8-4
8.2.4 Transmitter Receiver Unit (NTG-3225/3230) ................................8-5
8.2.5 Display Unit (NCD-4990) ................................................................8-5
8.3 PERFORMANCE CHECK ......................................................................8-6
8.3.1 Check Performance on Test Menu ...............................................8-7
8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS ..................................................8-13
8.4.1 Parts Required for Periodic Replacement ..................................8-14
8.4.2 Replacement of magnetron ..........................................................8-14
8.4.3 Replacement of Motor ...................................................................8-29
8.4.4 Replacement of 23inch LCD CML-799 .........................................8-34
8.4.5 Replacement of Backup Battery ..................................................8-37
SECTION 9
TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES SERVICE
9.1 FAULT FINDING .....................................................................................9-1
9.1.1 List of Alarms and other Indications .............................................9-1
9.1.2 Operation Checking ........................................................................9-6
9.1.3 Fuse Checking .................................................................................9-6
9.2 TROUBLE SHOOTING ...........................................................................9-7
9.2.1 Special Parts ....................................................................................9-7
9.2.2 Circuit Block to be Repaired ..........................................................9-9
9.3 AFTER-SALES SERVICE ....................................................................9-15
9.3.1 Keeping period of maintenance parts .........................................9-15
9.3.2 When you Request for Repair ......................................................9-15
9.3.3 Recommended Maintenance ........................................................9-15
SECTION 10
DISPOSAL
10.1 DISPOSAL OF THE UNIT ....................................................................10-1
10.2 DISPOSAL OF USED BATTERIES .....................................................10-1
10.3 DISPOSAL OF USED MAGNETRON ..................................................10-2
10.4 DISPOSAL OF TR-TUBE .....................................................................10-2
10.5 ABOUT THE CHINA ROHS .................................................................10-3
SECTION 11
SPECIFICATION
11.1 JMA-9133-SA TYPE RADAR ...............................................................11-1
11.2 JMA-9132-SA TYPE RADAR ............................................................... 11-2
11.3 JMA-9123-7XA/9XA TYPE RADAR ....................................................11-3
11.4 JMA-9122-6XA/9XA TYPE RADAR ....................................................11-4
11.5 JMA-9122-6XAH TYPE RADAR .........................................................11-5
11.6 JMA-9110-6XA TYPE RADAR ............................................................11-6
11.7 JMA-9110-6XAH TYPE RADAR .........................................................11-7
11.8 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-1139) ...............................................................11-8
11.9 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-1130) ...............................................................11-9
11.10 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-1129-7/9) ......................................................11-10
11.11 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-1125-6/9) .......................................................11-11
11.12 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-2254-6HS) .....................................................11-12
11.13 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-2103-6) ..........................................................11-13
11.14 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-2103-6HS) .....................................................11-14
11.15 TRANSMITTER RECEIVER UNIT (NTG-3230) .................................11-15
11.16 TRANSMITTER RECEIVER UNIT (NTG-3225) .................................11-16
11.17 DISPLAY UNIT (NCD-4990) ...............................................................11-17
11.18 Target Tracking Function .................................................................11-20
11.19 AIS FUNCTION ...................................................................................11-21
11.20 PERFORMANCE MONITOR (NJU-84) ..............................................11-22
11.21 PERFORMANCE MONITOR (NJU-85) ..............................................11-22
11.22 AC/DC CONVERTER (NBA-5135) .....................................................11-22
Appendix A
NQE-3141 Interswitch Unit
A.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................ A-1
A.1.1 Overview ......................................................................................... A-1
A.1.2 Interswitch Setup ........................................................................... A-1
A.2 INTERSWITCH OPERATION ................................................................ A-3
A.2.1 Operation Flow ............................................................................... A-3
A.2.2 Inter Switch Menu ........................................................................... A-4
A.2.3 Change of Connection Pattern (with 2 Display Units) ................ A-6
A.2.4 Change of Connection Pattern (with 3 or More Display Units) .. A-7
A.2.5 Operating Connection Pattern Files (File Operations) ............... A-8
A.2.6 Names of Display Units and Scanner Units ................................. A-9
A.3 REFERENCE ....................................................................................... A-10
A.3.1 Preheat Time after Change of Connection Pattern ................... A-10
A.3.2 Notes on Changing Connection Pattern .................................... A-10
A.3.3 Notes on Connecting Slave Display Unit ................................... A-10
A.3.4 Setting at Installation ................................................................... A-11
Appendix B
DRAWINGS
B.1 Interconnection Diagram of Display Unit ........................................... B-1
B.1.1 NCD-4990 ........................................................................................ B-2
B.1.2 NCD-4990 w/NBA-5135 ................................................................... B-3
B.1.3 NCD-4990T ...................................................................................... B-4
B.1.4 NCD-4990T w/NBA-5135 ................................................................ B-5
B.1.5 NWZ-170-R ...................................................................................... B-6
B.1.6 NWZ-170-RT .................................................................................... B-7
B.1.7 NCE-5163-R ..................................................................................... B-8
B.1.8 NCE-5163-RT ................................................................................... B-9
B.1.9 NBA-5135 ...................................................................................... B-10
B.2 Power System Diagram of Display Unit ........................................... B-11
B.3 Signal Flow Diagram of Display Unit ................................................ B-12
B.4 Primary Power System Diagram ....................................................... B-13
B.5 Block Diagram of Scanner Unit ........................................................ B-14
B.5.1 NKE-2103 ...................................................................................... B-15
B.5.2 NKE-2254 ...................................................................................... B-16
B.5.3 NKE-1125/NKE-1130 ..................................................................... B-17
B.5.4 NKE-1129, NTG-3225 / NKE-1139, NTG-3230 ............................. B-18
B.6 Interconnection Diagram of Scanner Unit ....................................... B-19
B.6.1 NKE-2103 ...................................................................................... B-20
B.6.2 NKE-2254 ...................................................................................... B-21
B.6.3 NKE-1125 (AC110V) ...................................................................... B-22
B.6.4 NKE-1125 (AC220V) ...................................................................... B-23
B.6.5 NKE-1129 (AC110V) ...................................................................... B-24
B.6.6 NKE-1129 (AC220V) ...................................................................... B-25
B.6.7 NTG-3225 ...................................................................................... B-26
B.6.8 NKE-1130 (AC110V) ...................................................................... B-27
B.6.9 NKE-1130 (AC220V) ...................................................................... B-28
B.6.10 NKE-1139 (AC110V) ...................................................................... B-29
B.6.11 NKE-1139 (AC220V) ...................................................................... B-30
B.6.12 NTG-3230 ...................................................................................... B-31
B.7 Terminal Board Connection Diagram ............................................... B-32
B.7.1 JMA-9110-6XA/JMA-9110-6XAH .................................................. B-33
B.7.2 JMA-9110-6XA/JMA-9110-6XAH (desktop) ................................. B-34
B.7.3 JMA-9122-6XAH ............................................................................ B-35
B.7.4 JMA-9122-6XAH (desktop) ........................................................... B-36
B.7.5 JMA-9122-6XA/9XA ...................................................................... B-37
B.7.6 JMA-9123-7XA/9XA ...................................................................... B-38
B.7.7 JMA-9132-SA ................................................................................ B-39
B.7.8 JMA-9133-SA ................................................................................ B-40
B.7.9 NCD-4990T .................................................................................... B-41
B.8 GYRO I/F ............................................................................................. B-42
B.9 Inter Switch Unit ................................................................................. B-44
B.9.1 Terminal Board Connection Diagram ......................................... B-44
B.9.2 Interconnection Diagram ............................................................. B-46
Appendix C
Menu Index
C.1 Main ....................................................................................................... C-1
C.2 PI ............................................................................................................ C-5
C.3 TT ........................................................................................................... C-7
C.4 AIS ......................................................................................................... C-8
C.5 AZ .......................................................................................................... C-9
C.6 Track .................................................................................................... C-10
C.7 Route ................................................................................................... C-11
C.8 U.Map .................................................................................................. C-12
C.9 Serviceman Menu ............................................................................... C-14
Modified August 29, 2011 16:01
1.1 FUNCTIONS
1
This equipment is a high-performance radar equipment consisting of a scanner
unit, a transmitter-receiver unit and a high resolution color LCD display unit.
The JMA-9100 series is a color radar system designed to comply with the
international standards of the IMO.The main functions include:
sensitivity adjustment
sea clutter and rain/snow clutter suppression
interference rejection
bearing and range measurement using a cursor, fixed/variable range markers,
and electronic bearing line
colored own track display(7 colors)
NAV line and marker displays
TM (True Motion) presentation
self-diagnostic facilities
radar performance monitoring (Performance Monitor)
Target Tracking functions (manual/automatic, target acquisition and tracking,
vector and trail displays, Trial maneuver and alarm displays)
8-unit switchover (Interswitch) function (option)
1 1
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.2 FEATURES
1.2 FEATURES
The 23.1-inch color LCD1 with high resolution can display radar images of 320
mm or more in diameter. Even short-range targets can also be displayed as high-
resolution images.
The system employs the latest digital signal processing technology to eliminate
undesired clutter from the radar video signals that are obtained from the receiver
with a wide dynamic range, thus improving the target detection.
The target acquisition and tracking performance is enhanced by the use of the
fastest DSP and tracking algorithm. So stable operation in target tracking under
clutter is ensured.
As well as operator-created NAV lines and own ship's tracks/ARPA tracks, which
is stored on the memory card can be superimpose-displayed with radar images and
radar trails in all display modes including the head-up mode.
All the radar functions can be easily controlled by simply using the trackball and
two switches to operate the buttons shown on the radar display.
1 2
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.2 FEATURES
Since an LCD has been implemented as the display device, the weight of the
display is greatly reduced and the power consumption is lowered in comparison
with the conventional radar equipment.
The Self-diagnostic program always monitors all the functions of the system. If
any function deteriorates, an alarm message will appear on the radar display and
an alarm sounds at the same time. Even when the system is operating, the
functionality test can be carried out. (except on some functions)
Performance Monitor
The radar performance (transmitted output power and receiving sensitivity) can
appear on the radar display.
Various Functions
1 3
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.3 CONFIGURATION
1.3 CONFIGURATION
1 4
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.3 CONFIGURATION
Notes:
1 5
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS
Fig 1-12: Outline Drawing of Monitor Unit, Type NWZ-170 (Desktop type option)
Fig 1-13: NDOutline Drawing of Radar Process Unit, Type NDC-1399-9 (Desktop type option)
Fig 1-14: Outline Drawing of Operation Unit, Type NCE-5163 (Desktop type option)
Fig 1-15: Outline Drawing of AC/DC Converter, Type NBA-5135 (Desktop type option)
Fig 1-18: Outline Drawing of Power Control Unit, Type NQE-3167 (Option)
1 6
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS
1 7
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS
1 8
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS
1 9
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS
1 10
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS
1 11
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS
1 12
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS
1 13
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS
1 14
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS
1 15
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS
1 16
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS
1 17
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS
Fig 1-12: Outline Drawing of Monitor Unit, Type NWZ-170 (Desktop type option)
1 18
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS
Fig 1-13: NDOutline Drawing of Radar Process Unit, Type NDC-1399-9 (Desktop type option)
1 19
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS
Fig 1-14: Outline Drawing of Operation Unit, Type NCE-5163 (Desktop type option)
1 20
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS
Fig 1-15: Outline Drawing of AC/DC Converter, Type NBA-5135 (Desktop type option)
1 21
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS
1 22
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS
1 23
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS
Fig 1-18: Outline Drawing of Power Control Unit, Type NQE-3167 (Option)
1 24
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS
1 25
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS
NKE-1139
SCANNER UNIT
NJU-84
PERFORMANCE
CIRCUIT BREAKER MONITOR
(SHIP YARD SUPPLY)
O P TIO N
AC100V,60Hz (5A)
1,200W
( W I T H P M U N I T)
0. 6 /1 k V - D P Y C Y S- 1 . 5
CO A X IA L CA B L E
NBL-175 H F - 2 0 D ( J R C S U P P L Y)
SHIPS MAIN
for HEATER
STEPDOWN
AC220V,50/60Hz,1 NTG-3230
TRANSFORMER
1600VA
TRANSMITTER RECEIVER UNIT
1 4 CO RE S CO MP O S ITE CA B L E
H -2 6 9 5 1 1 0 0 5 6
M A X 2 3 ( J R C S U P P L Y)
1 4 CO RE S CO MP O S ITE CA B L E
H- 2 6 9 5 1 1 0 0 5 6
M A X 2 3 ( J R C S U P P L Y)
NCD-4990
DISPLAY UNIT
GYRO
250 V -MPYCYS - 7 0. 6/1 k V- DPYCY - 6 SHIPS MAIN
250 V -T T YCS - 1 AC220V,60Hz,1,800VA
LOG (NMEA 0183)
250 V -T T YCS - 1 0. 6/1 k V- DPYCYS - 1 .5 SHIPS MAIN
DGPS for POWER FAIL ALARM
3 C-2 V x 5 ( MAX 30 m) DC24V(BATTERY),1W
VDR
1 8 CO RE S CO MP O S ITE CA B L E
H- 2 6 9 5 1 1 1 1 5 3
M A X 1 8 .0 ( J R C S U P P L Y)
RADAR(INTER SWITCH)
250 V -T T YCS - 4
H- 2695110006 ( J RC SUPPLY )
ECDIS (JAN -901M)
H - 7 Z C N A 0 4 8 3 ( J R C S U P P L Y)
1 26
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS
NKE-1130
SCANNER UNIT
1
NJU-84
PERFORMANCE
CIRCUIT BREAKER MONITOR
(SHIP YARD SUPPLY)
OP TIO N
AC100 V,60Hz (5A)
1,200 W
( W I T H P M U N I T)
0. 6 /1 k V - D P Y C Y S- 1 .5
NBL-175
SHIPS MAIN
for HEATER
STEPDOWN AC220V,50/60Hz, 1
TRANSFORMER
1600VA
1 4 CO RE S CO MP O S ITE CA B L E
H -2 6 9 5 1 1 0 0 5 6
M A X 2 3 ( J R C S U P P L Y)
NCD-4990
DISPLAY UNIT
1 27
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS
NKE-1129-7
SCANNER UNIT
NJU-85
PERFORMANCE
CIRCUIT BREAKER
(SHIP YARD SUPPLY)
MONITOR
O P TIO N
AC100V,60Hz (5A)
1100W
( W I T H P M U N I T)
0 . 6 /1 k V - D P Y C Y S- 1 .5
F L EX IB L E W A V E GUID E
NBL-175 F R- 9 ( J R C S U P P L Y)
SHIPS MAIN
STEPDOWN for HEATER
AC220V,50/60Hz,1 NTG-3225
TRANSFORMER
1600 VA TRANSMITTER RECEIVER UNIT
1 4 CO RE S CO MP O S ITE CA B L E
H -2 6 9 5 1 1 0 0 5 6
M A X 2 3 ( J R C S U P P L Y)
NCD-4990
DISPLAY UNIT
GYRO
250 V- MPYCYS - 7 0. 6/1k V -DPYCY - 6 SHIPS MAIN
250 V- T T YCS - 1 AC220V,60Hz,1,800 VA
LOG (NMEA 0183)
250 V- T T YCS - 1 0. 6/1k V -DPYCYS - 1. 5 SHIPS MAIN
DGPS for POWER FAIL ALARM
3C- 2 V x 5 (MAX 30m ) DC24V(BATTERY),1W
VDR
1 8 CO RE S CO MP O S ITE CA B L E
H- 26 9 5 11 1 1 5 3
M A X 1 8 . 0 ( J R C S U P P L Y)
RADAR(INTER SWITCH)
250 V- T T YCS - 4
H- 2695110006 ( J RC SUPPLY )
ECDIS (JAN- 901M)
H - 7 Z C N A 0 4 8 3 ( J R C S U P P L Y)
1 28
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS
NKE-1129-9
SCANNER UNIT
1
NJU-85
PERFORMANCE
CIRCUIT BREAKER
(SHIP YARD SUPPLY)
MONITOR
O P TIO N
AC100V,60Hz (5A)
1,100W
( W I T H P M U N I T)
0 . 6 /1 k V - D P Y C Y S- 1 .5
F L E X IB L E W A V E G U ID E
NBL-175 F R- 9 ( J R C S U P P L Y)
SHIPS MAIN
for HEATER
STEPDOWN
AC220V,50/60Hz,1 NTG-3225
TRANSFORMER
1600 VA
TRANSMITTER RECEIVER UNIT
1 4 CO RE S CO MP O S ITE CA B L E
H -2 6 9 5 1 1 0 0 5 6
M A X 2 3 (J R C S U P P L Y)
1 4 CO RE S CO MP O S ITE CA B L E
H- 2 6 9 5 1 1 0 0 5 6
M A X 2 3 (J R C S U P P L Y)
NCD-4990
DISPLAY UNIT
GYRO
250 V- MPYCYS - 7 0. 6/1k V -DPYCY - 6 SHIPS MAIN
250 V- T T YCS - 1 AC220V,60Hz,1,800VA
LOG (NMEA 0183)
250 V- T T YCS - 1 0. 6/1k V -DPYCYS - 1. 5 SHIPS MAIN
DGPS for POWER FAIL ALARM
3C- 2 V x 5 (MAX 30m ) DC24V(BATTERY),1W
VDR
1 8 CO RE S CO MP O S ITE CA B L E
H- 2 6 9 5 1 1 1 1 5 3
M A X 1 8. 0 ( J R C S U P P L Y)
RADAR(INTER SWITCH)
250 V- T T YCS - 4
H- 2695110006 ( J RC SUPPLY )
ECDIS (JAN-901M)
H - 7Z C N A 0 4 8 3 (J R C S U P P L Y)
1 29
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS
NKE-1125-6
SCANNER UNIT
NJU-85
PERFORMANCE
CIRCUIT BREAKER MONITOR
(SHIP YARD SUPPLY)
O P TIO N
AC100V,60Hz (5A)
1,100W
( W I T H P M U N I T)
0 . 6 /1 k V - D P Y C Y S- 1 .5
NBL-175
SHIPS MAIN
STEPDOWN for HEATER
AC220V,50/60Hz,1
TRANSFORMER
1600VA
1 4 CO RE S CO MP O S ITE CA B L E
H -2 6 9 5 1 1 0 0 5 6
M A X 2 3 ( J R C S U P P L Y)
NCD-4990
DISPLAY UNIT
GYRO
250 V -MPYC YS - 7 0. 6/1 k V- DPYCY - 6 SHIPS MAIN
250 V -T T YCS - 1 AC220V,60Hz,1,800 VA
LOG (NMEA 0183)
250 V -T T YCS - 1 0. 6/1 k V- DPYCYS - 1 .5 SHIPS MAIN
DGPS for POWER FAIL ALARM
3 C-2 V x 5 ( MAX 30 m) DC24V(BATTERY),1W
VDR
1 8 CO RE S CO MP O S ITE CA B L E
H- 2 6 95 1 1 1 15 3
M A X 1 8 .0 ( J R C S U P P L Y)
RADAR(INTER SWITCH)
250 V -T T YCS - 4
H- 2695110006 ( J R C SUPPLY )
ECDIS (JAN -901M)
H - 7 Z C N A 0 4 8 3 ( J R C S U P P L Y)
1 30
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS
NKE-1125-9
SCANNER UNIT
1
NJU-85
PERFORMANCE
CIRCUIT BREAKER MONITOR
(SHIP YARD SUPPLY)
O P TIO N
AC100V,60Hz (5A)
1,100W
( W I T H P M U N I T)
0 . 6 /1 k V - D P Y C Y S- 1 .5
NBL-175
SHIPS MAIN
for HEATER
STEPDOWN AC220V,50/60Hz,1
TRANSFORMER
1600 VA
1 4 CO RE S CO MP O S ITE CA B L E
H-2 6 9 51 1 0 05 6
M A X 2 3 ( J R C S U P P L Y)
NCD-4990
DISPLAY UNIT
GYRO
250 V- MPYCYS - 7 0. 6/1k V -DPYCY - 6 SHIPS MAIN
250 V- T T YCS - 1 AC220V,60Hz,1,800VA
LOG (NMEA 0183)
250 V- T T YCS - 1 0. 6/1k V -DPYCYS - 1. 5 SHIPS MAIN
DGPS for POWER FAIL ALARM
3C- 2 V x 5 (MAX 30m ) DC24V(BATTERY),1W
VDR
1 8 CO RE S CO MP O S ITE CA B L E
H-2 6 9 51 1 1 15 3
M A X 1 8 . 0 ( J R C S U P P L Y)
RADAR(INTER SWITCH)
250 V- T T YCS - 4
H- 2695110006 ( J RC SUPPLY )
ECDIS (JAN-901M)
H - 7 Z C N A 0 4 8 3 ( J R C S U P P L Y)
1 31
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS
NKE-2254-6HS
SCANNER UNIT
NJU-85
CIRCUIT BREAKER PERFORMANCE
(SHIP YARD SUPPLY) MONITOR
O P TIO N
AC100V,60Hz (5A)
1,100W
( W I T H P M U N I T)
0 . 6 / 1 k V - D P Y C Y S- 1 . 5
NBL-175
SHIPS MAIN
STEPDOWN for HEATER
AC220V,50/60Hz,1
TRANSFORMER
1600 VA
1 9 CO RE S CO MP O S ITE CA B L E
C F Q -6 9 1 2-* * 65m MAX
M A X 1 4 .5 ( J R C S U P P L Y)
NCD-4990
DISPLAY UNIT
1 32
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS
NKE-2103-6
SCANNER UNIT
1
NJU-85
PERFORMANCE
MONITOR
1 9 CO RE S CO MP O S ITE CA B L E
C F Q - 6 9 1 2- * * 65 m MA X
M A X 1 4 . 5 ( J R C S U P P L Y)
NCD-4990
DISPLAY UNIT
GYRO
250 V- MPYCYS - 7 0. 6/1k V- DPYC Y - 6 SHIPS MAIN
AC220 V,60Hz,1,800VA
250 V- T T YC S - 1
LOG(NMEA 0183)
250 V- T T YC S - 1 0. 6/1k V- DPYC YS - 1. 5 SHIPS MAIN
DGPS for POWER FAIL ALARM
3C- 2 V x 5 (MAX 30m ) DC24V(BATTERY),1W
VDR
1 8 CO RE S CO MP O S ITE CA B L E
H- 2 6 9 51 1 11 5 3
M A X 1 8 . 0 ( J R C S U P P L Y)
RADAR(INTER SWITCH)
250 V- T T YC S - 4
H - 2695110006 ( J R C SUPPLY )
ECDIS (JAN-901M)
H - 7 Z C N A 0 4 8 3 ( J R C S U P P L Y)
1 33
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS
NKE-2103-6HS
SCANNER UNIT
NJU-85
PERFORMANCE
MONITOR
1 9 CO RE S CO MP O S ITE CA B LE
C F Q - 6 9 1 2- * * 65m MAX
M A X 1 4 . 5 ( J R C S U P P L Y)
NCD-4990
DISPLAY UNIT
GYRO
250 V- MPYCYS - 7 0. 6/1k V- D PYCY - 6 SHIPS MAIN
AC220V,60Hz,1, 800VA
250 V- T T YC S - 1
LOG(NMEA 0183)
250 V- T T YC S - 1 0. 6/1k V- D PYCYS - 1. 5 SHIPS MAIN
DGPS for POWER FAIL ALARM
3C- 2 V x 5 (MAX 30m ) DC24V(BATTERY),1W
VDR
1 8 CO RE S CO MP O S ITE CA B L E
H- 2 6 95 1 11 1 5 3
M A X 1 8 . 0 ( J R C S U P P L Y)
RADAR(INTER SWITCH)
250 V- T T YC S - 4
H - 2695110006 ( J R C SUPPLY )
ECDIS (JAN-901M)
H - 7 Z C N A 0 4 8 3 ( J R C S U P P L Y)
1 34
SECTION 2
NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF CONTROL
PANEL KEYS AND FUNCTIONS OF
SOFTWARE BUTTONS
NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF CONTROL PANEL KEYS AND FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS
2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY .............................................................................2-1
2.2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF CONTROL PANEL KEYS ..................2-11
2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS ...........................................2-16
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY
2
Example of screen display
In this example, the screen is divided into a number of areas and the names in
each area are indicated.
Own ship's
information
Target
tracking (TT) /
AIS information
Digital information
Menu
Brilliance /
Display information
Alarm
Lower left Lower right
of the display of the display
2 1
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY
PPI
Automatic acquisition /
activation zone Association target Own ship's symbol
Ship's heading
marker
Past position
Ship's
heading line
AIS target number
Cursor mark
Tracked target
AIS target vector
number
Radar trails
Tracked target
symbol
Parallel index lines
VRM2
2 2
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY
X / S band
2 3
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY
EBL2
EBL1 bearing
starting point mode
Mark color
Speed sensor
Own ship's
course over ground
Time display mode
Own ship's
speed over ground
Positioning system
(example: GPS, DGPS )
Date and time
2 4
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY
2
Past position display
TCPA limit
interval
CPA limit
Past position display
interval unit
Past position true / relative
Ship's name
Unread message
Call sign
MMSI
Course
CPA
Speed
TCPA
Rate of turn
Range
Latitude
2 5
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY
Bearing
True speed
CPA
BCR
TCPA
BCT
No information is displayed
if digital information value is
not displayed
Cursor range
Cursor latitude
Cursor longitude
2 6
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY
EBL bearing
EBL bearing numeric value indication
true / relative
VRM range
2
Numeric information: Navigation information
Depth
Depth
Depth range
Depth graph
Time range
2 7
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY
Water temperature
Time range
Wind speed
2 8
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY
Arrival time 2
Menu
Main menu
Automatic acquisition /
Target Tracking (TT) menu
activation zone (AZ) menu
Brilliance
Main menu
Automatic acquisition /
Target Tracking (TT) menu
activation zone (AZ) menu
Display information
2 9
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY
Alarm
Alarm indication
(The system alarm indicated in red .
Other information indicated in blue or yellow.)
2 10
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF
CONTROL PANEL KEYS
30
28
29
RANGE
VRM2
14
9
15
VRM1
13
GAIN
8
23
CANCEL
OPTION
DATA
27
ACQ
OFF
19
2
SEA
7
22
MANUAL
OPTION
ACQ
18
26
OFF
HL
1
RAIN
AIS/AR
USER
DATA
6
TGT
25
17
PA
21
TUNE
PANEL
NIGHT
VECT
DAY
5
16
24
T/R
20
ALARM
PWR FAIL
ACK
4
PWR
ACK
2
EBL2
11
12
POWER
STBY
EBL1
10
TX
1
The name of each button is described from the following page. See below.
2 11
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2.2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF
CONTROL PANEL KEYS
2 12
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF
CONTROL PANEL KEYS
2
gain 3.2.4 on page 3-8
pulse width 3.4.2 on page 3-24
2 13
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2.2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF
CONTROL PANEL KEYS
2 14
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF
CONTROL PANEL KEYS
2 15
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE
BUTTONS
In this radar, the frequently used functions can be directly set from the screen
without opening the menu by using the software buttons on the screen for quick
handling. The screen is divided into a number of areas and each area is named.
Own ship's
information
Target
tracking (TT) /
AIS information
Digital information
Menu
Brilliance /
Display information
Alarm
Lower left Lower right
of the display of the display
The name of each button is described from the next page. The function can be
used by left-clicking while setting the arrow cursor on the button position.
2 16
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE
BUTTONS
Transmission / Standby
switching Azimuth display mode
switching
Interswitch connection
change
Standby :Indicates a standby state. If this button is clicked in this state, the
equipment is set to a transmission state.
2 17
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE
BUTTONS
2 18
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE
BUTTONS
If the button is clicked for 2 seconds, the function registration menu (User Function
Setting) is opened.
10 , 11 and 12 Sea clutter suppression (Sea) mode, Rain and snow clutter
suppression (Rain) mode, and Tune mode switching
Use these functions to switch to the manual or automatic mode of sea clutter
suppression, rain and snow clutter suppression, and tune. The bar on the left side
indicates the position of the dial.
The mode is switched to MAN (manual) / AUTO (automatic) whenever the
button is clicked. If rain and snow clutter suppression is switched to an automatic mode,
sea clutter suppression is switched to an automatic mode also.
2 19
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE
BUTTONS
VRM2 adjustment
EBL2 numeric value indication Parallel index line
true / relative switching starting point mode
switching
2 20
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE
BUTTONS
2 21
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE
BUTTONS
Map display
On / Off
CPA ring display
On / Off
Graphic display Off
2 22
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE
BUTTONS
When the selected speed device is not connected to the equipment, an alarm is issued.
2 23
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE
BUTTONS
2 24
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE
BUTTONS
11 Association On / Off
The tracked target / AIS target association is switched to On / Off whenever the button is
clicked.
2 25
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE
BUTTONS
Detail / simple
display switching
Unread message
display
2 26
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE
BUTTONS
Tracked target
numeric value indication
scroll
2 27
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE
BUTTONS
Menu
Main menu
Automatic acquisition /
Target Tracking (TT) menu
activation zone (AZ) menu
4 Main menu
If this button is clicked, the Main Menu is opened.
2 28
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE
BUTTONS
5 AIS menu
If the button is clicked, the AIS Menu is opened.
6 Route menu
7
If this button is clicked, the Route Menu is opened.
Brilliance
Display item switching
Display information
2 29
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE
BUTTONS
2 Panel lighting brilliance switching
This function enables the setting of the brilliance of the lighting of the control panel.
The brilliance changes whenever this button is clicked. Five levels of settings are
available.
2 30
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE
BUTTONS
Alarm
Alarm acknowridgement
1 Alarm acknowledgment
2
If this button is clicked, the buzzer sound of the alarm that is currently issued is stopped
and the alarm lamp stops blinking. If multiple alarms are issued, the next alarm to be
acknowledged is displayed.
If the button is clicked, the alarm displayed on the top is acknowledged.
The alarms that are currently issued are displayed at the bottom one by one.
2 31
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE
BUTTONS
2 32
SECTION 3
BASIC OPERATION
BASIC OPERATION
3.1 OPERATION FLOW ...............................................................................3-1
3.1.1 Power ON and Start the System ....................................................3-2
3.1.2 Observe and Adjust Video ..............................................................3-4
3.1.3 Acquire and Measure Data .............................................................3-4
3.1.4 Display and Measure with Reference to CCRP ............................3-4
3.1.5 End the Operation and Stop the System .......................................3-5
3.2 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO ..........................................................3-6
3.2.1 Adjust Monitor Brilliance [BRILL] ..................................................3-6
3.2.2 Change Observation Range [RANGE+/-] ......................................3-6
3.2.3 Tune ..................................................................................................3-7
3.2.4 Adjust Gain [GAIN] .........................................................................3-8
3.2.5 Suppress Sea Clutter [SEA] ..........................................................3-9
3.2.6 Suppress Rain/Snow Clutter [RAIN] ...........................................3-11
3.2.7 Reset Alarm Buzzer [ALARM ACK] .............................................3-12
3.2.8 To get the appropriate image that targets can be easily observed ...3-13
3.3 OPERATION PROCEDURES ..............................................................3-14
3.3.1 Move Cross Cursor Mark by Trackball ........................................3-14
3.3.2 Operate Software Buttons ...........................................................3-15
3.3.3 Basic Menu Operation ..................................................................3-16
3.3.4 Operation on Numeric Value, Latitude / Longitude and Character Input menu .......3-17
3.3.5 Overview of Menu Structure .........................................................3-22
3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION ........................................................3-23
3.4.1 Interference Rejection (IR) ............................................................3-23
3.4.2 Switch Transmitter Pulse Length [GAIN] ....................................3-24
3.4.3 Target Enhance (ENH) ..................................................................3-25
3.4.4 Use Video Processing (PROC) .....................................................3-26
3.4.5 Switch Azimuth Display Mode (AZI MODE) ................................3-27
3.4.6 Switch True/Relative Motion Display Mode (TM/RM) .................3-28
3.4.7 Move Own Ships Display Position (Off Center) .........................3-29
3.4.8 Display Radar Trails (Trails) .........................................................3-30
3.4.9 Zoom (x2) .......................................................................................3-33
3.4.10 Hide/Display Range Rings [HL OFF] ...........................................3-34
3.4.11 Hide Graphics Information on Radar Display [DATA OFF] .......3-34
3.4.12 Switch Day/Night Mode [DAY/NIGHT] .........................................3-35
3.4.13 Adjust Operation Panel Brilliance [PANEL] ................................3-35
3.4.14 Set True Bearing ............................................................................3-36
3.4.15 Set Own Ship Speed .....................................................................3-36
3.4.16 Magnet Compass Correction (MAG Compass Setting) .............3-37
3.5 USE OWN SHIP'S TRACK ...................................................................3-39
3.5.1 Display Own Ship's Track (Display Own Track) .........................3-39
3.5.2 Set Display Color of Own Ship's Track (Display Own Track Color) ..3-40
3.5.3 Save Own Ship's Track (Own Track Memory) ............................3-41
3.5.4 Cancel Saving of Own Ship's Track (Own Track Memory) ........3-41
3.5.5 Clear Own Ship's Track (Clear Own Track) ................................3-42
3.5.6 Use Expanded Own Ship's Track (Own Track Type) .................3-42
3.5.7 Use Water Depth Track (Water Depth Track) ..............................3-44
3.5.8 Use Water Temperature Track (Water TEMP Track) ..................3-45
3.5.9 Use Tidal Current Track (Current Vector Track) .........................3-46
3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP ...........................................................................3-47
3.6.1 Create User Map (Mark/Line) ........................................................3-47
3.6.2 Set User Map Display (Mark Display Setting) .............................3-50
3.6.3 Edit User Map (Edit User Map) .....................................................3-52
3.6.4 Correct Position on User Map (Shift User Map) .........................3-60
3.6.5 Save User Map ...............................................................................3-61
3.6.6 Set and Display Geodetic System (Geodetic) .............................3-65
3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION ......................................................................3-67
3.7.1 Display Route/Destination Mark (Select Route) .........................3-67
3.7.2 Edit Route (Set Route Sequence) ................................................3-68
3.7.3 Edit Route Make with Latitude and Longitude (Waypoint Input) .......3-75
3.7.4 Use Route Monitoring Function (Waypoint/Route Alarm) .........3-79
3.7.5 Method of Using Route .................................................................3-81
3.7.6 Detailed Route Settings ................................................................3-82
3.7.7 Clear Waypoint/Route Data (Clear WPT/Route Data) .................3-86
3.7.8 Operate Route Data File ................................................................3-87
3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS ......................................................................3-91
3.8.1 Set Radar Signal Processing (Process Setting) .........................3-91
3.8.2 Set Radar Trails (RADAR Trails Setting) .....................................3-95
3.8.3 Set Scanner Unit (TXRX Setting) .................................................3-97
3.8.4 Set Cursor (Cursor Setting) ..........................................................3-98
3.8.5 Set Radar Display (Display Setting) ............................................3-99
3.8.6 Adjust Sound Volume (Buzzer Volume) ....................................3-102
3.8.7 Set User Option Keys [OPTION 1/2] ..........................................3-103
3.8.8 Set Navigation Data Display (Multi Window Setting) ...............3-105
3.8.9 AUTO Backup ..............................................................................3-110
3.9 USE FUNCTION KEY [USER] ...........................................................3-111
3.9.1 Operation Procedures .................................................................3-111
3.9.2 Function Setting Menu Items .....................................................3-112
3.9.3 Overview of Function Operations (User Function Setting) .....3-113
3.9.4 Overview of saved Function Setting Data .................................3-117
3.10 USE USER SETTING .........................................................................3-118
3.10.1 Save Operating State (Save User Setting) ................................3-118
3.10.2 Load Operating State (Load User Setting) ................................3-119
3.10.3 Delete Operating State (Delete User Setting) ...........................3-119
3.11 USING CARD .....................................................................................3-120
3.11.1 Operate File on the Card (File Manager) ...................................3-120
3.12 RECEIVE PORT SETTING .................................................................3-127
3.12.1 Receive Port Setting (RX Port) ...................................................3-127
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.1 OPERATION FLOW
Attention
POWER ON AND
START THE SYSTEM
OBSERVE AND
ADJUST VIDEO
ACQUIRE AND
MEASURE DATA
3 1
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.1 OPERATION FLOW
Attention
3 2
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.1 OPERATION FLOW
Procedures
1) Check that the ships mains are turned on.
3 3
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.1 OPERATION FLOW
Procedures
1) Press [RANGE+] key or [RANGE-] key to set the range to the
scale required for target observation.
Refer to
For how to adjust video, see Section 3.2 "OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO"
For details on how to acquire data and measure, see the SECTION
4"MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING".
If some kind of functions (for example off center, true motion mode, etc.) set
scanner position to 75% outside of the PPI range, these data except Target
Tracking and AIS data are displayed with reference to scanner position.
For how to setting CCRP, see the Section 7.1.9 "Setting of CCRP (CCRP
Setting)".
3 4
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.1 OPERATION FLOW
3 5
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.2 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO
Procedures
1) Obtain the best-to-see display with optimum brilliance by turning
the [BRILL] dial at the lower right of the monitor unit.
Turning the [BRILL] dial clockwise increases the brilliance of the entire display.
Conversely, turning the [BRILL] dial counterclockwise decreases the brilliance of the entire
display.
In consideration of the ambient brightness, adjust display brilliance that is high enough to
easily observe the radar display but does not glare.
Procedures
1) Pressing the [RANGE+] key will increase the observation range,
enabling the wider area to be observed.
Increasing the observation range will enable a wider range to be observed.
However, a video image is small and the ability to detect targets near own ship decreases.
Therefore, when observing the vicinity of own ship, use the smaller observation range.
3 6
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.2 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO
3.2.3 Tune
The currently used tune mode is displayed in the area at the lower left of the
display.
Procedures
1) Press the [TUNE] dial to set the automatic tune mode.
Tune adjustment is automatically conducted in the automatic tune mode. Tune is adjusted at
the start of transmission, at the change of the range or pulse width. Tune adjustment is
completed within several seconds.
Procedures
1) Press the [TUNE] dial to set the manual tune mode.
2) Turn the [TUNE] dial to make adjustments so that the tuning bar
is maximized. The tuning bar is displayed in the area at the upper
left of the display.
3 7
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.2 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO
See also the Section 3.2.8 "To get the appropriate image that targets can be easily
observed".
Procedures
1) Adjust noise on the radar display by turning the [GAIN] dial until
targets can be easily observed.
Turning [GAIN] dial clockwise increases gain.
Turning the [GAIN] dial clockwise will increase the receiving gain, and the
range to observe radar video is widened. However, if the gain is too high,
unnecessary signals including receiver noise and false images increase
resulting in reduction of targets' visibility.
3 8
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.2 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO
See also the Section 3.2.8 "To get the appropriate image that targets can be easily
observed".
Procedures
1) Adjust the sea clutter returns on the radar display by turning the
[SEA] dial until targets can be easily observed.
Turning [SEA] dial clockwise suppresses sea clutter returns.
Turning the [SEA] dial clockwise heightens the effect of sea clutter
suppression. However, be careful that excessive suppression causes
low signal-strength targets such as buoys and boats to disappear from
the radar display.
3 9
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.2 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO
Procedures
1) Press the [SEA] dial. Alternatively, Left-click the Sea MAN
button located at the lower left of the display.
The automatic sea clutter suppression mode is selected, and Sea AUTO is displayed in the
lower left of the radar display.
Cancel
1) ress the [SEA] dial. Alternatively, Left-click the Sea AUTO
button located at the lower left of the display.
The automatic sea clutter suppression mode is cancelled, and Sea MAN is displayed in the
lower left of the radar display.
3 10
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.2 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO
See also the Section 3.2.8 "To get the appropriate image that targets can be easily
observed".
Procedures
1) Adjust the rain / snow clutter returns of the display by turning the
[AUTO-RAIN] dial until targets can be easily observed.
Turning [RAIN] dial clockwise suppresses rain / snow clutter returns.
When the [RAIN] dial is turned clockwise, the rain / snow clutter
suppression function suppresses rain / snow clutter returns and gets
targets hidden by rain / snow clutter returns to appear of the display.
However, be careful that excessive suppression may cause small
targets to be overlooked. Since the rain / snow clutter suppression
function also has the effect of suppressing sea clutter, the suppression
efficiency improves when the [RAIN] dial is used with the [SEA] dial. In
general, turn the [RAIN] dial fully to the left.
3 11
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.2 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO
Procedures
1) Press the [RAIN] dial. Alternatively, Left-click the Rain MAN
button located at the lower left of the display.
The automatic rain / snow clutter suppression mode is selected, and Sea AUTO, Rain
AUTO is displayed in the lower left of the radar display.
2) Make adjustments by turning the [RAIN] dial and the [SEA] dial.
Even when the automatic rain / snow clutter suppression mode is selected, turning the
[RAIN] dial and the [SEA] dial can make fine adjustments manually.
Cancel
1) Press the [RAIN] dial. Alternatively, Left-click the Rain AUTO
button located at the lower left of the display.
The automatic rain / snow clutter suppression mode is cancelled, and Sea AUTO, Rain
AUTO is changed to Sea MAN ,Rain MAN in the lower left of the radar display.
Procedures
1) Press [ALARM ACK] key. Alternatively, Left-click the Alarm
Acknowridge button located at the lower right of the display.
The alarm will stop buzzing.
3 12
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.2 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO
The sets of signal processing parameters for the general using condition are stored
in FUNC as factory default settings. In most cases, to select the FUNC mode
which fit in the current sea state is lead to get the appropriate image easily and
quickly. So It is recommended to enable the FUNC mode. 3
Procedures
1) Press [USER] key / Press
FUNC mode switch button
and select the mode which fit
Function
in the current sea state. (FUNC) mode
2) Make adjustments by turning the [GAIN] dial, the [SEA] dial and
the [RAIN] dial when it is necessary.
In most cases, it may be get the appropriate image.
3 13
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.3 OPERATION PROCEDURES
The cross cursor mark + is used for position designation and other purposes in
various operating procedures. The cross cursor mark + moves in coupling with
the trackball. If the trackball is rotated up and down or right and left, the cross
cursor mark follows the move of the trackball.
Operators must be familiar with trackball operation before running the system.
As shown at right, the cursor mark changes into the cursor outside the radar
video PPI.
3 14
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.3 OPERATION PROCEDURES
Software buttons are provided on the radar display so as to easily switch functions
without operating menu items.
For software buttons that can be operated and their locations, see Section 2.3
"FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS".
Procedures
3
1) Put the pointer on the software button on the radar display.
The software button indicated by the cursor will be shown in reverse video, which indicates
that the button is specified.
On/Off settings
Each time the left button is pressed, the operating state switches as follows:
On Off On Off
Multiple settings
For example, each time the left button is pressed, the operating state switches as
follows:
3 15
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.3 OPERATION PROCEDURES
Alternatively, left-click 0.Exit located at the bottom of the menu until the
menu will close.
Alternatively, Click items corresponding to the desired menu item number, and the
> mark will appear at the right end of a menu item having a lower level.
If you do not change the setting, right-click the button. The selected item will
close without changing the setting.
3 16
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.3 OPERATION PROCEDURES
Item
Selected item
Press numeric keys
corresponding to the desired
item number to display the
Present state
selected item.
When a numeric value must be entered while operating this radar system, the
numeric value input screen will appear. In that case, enter a numeric value
according to the following operation method.
3 17
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.3 OPERATION PROCEDURES
Entered value
Numeric button
- button + button
2) Make sure that the entered value is correct, and left-click the
ENT button.
3 18
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.3 OPERATION PROCEDURES
Procedures
1) On the numeric value input screen, sequentially left-click the
software button or located on the radar screen, and
enter a desired numeric value.
For example, when adjusting 123.0 to 123.4 for a bearing value, sequentially left-click the
3
software number keys as shown below.
2) Make sure that the entered value is correct, and left-click the
ENT button.
Entered latitude /
longitude
Numeric button
3 19
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.3 OPERATION PROCEDURES
Procedures
1) On the latitude/longitude input screen, sequentially click numeric
buttons to enter latitude (XXXXXXX').
For example, to enter 1234.567', sequentially click numeric buttons as follows.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
7) To cancel input, put the cursor on CLR and then left-click the
button.
The latitude/longitude input screen will close without reflecting the set value to the operating
state.
3 20
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.3 OPERATION PROCEDURES
3
Enter button
Delete button
Procedures
1) On the character input screen, use trackball to select alphabet
from A to Z, numbers from 0 to 9, or symbols (only comments for
mark/line), and then left-click the ENT button to enter one
character of the name to be inputted.
For example, JRC for a name, click button as follows:
J R C
3 21
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.3 OPERATION PROCEDURES
The menu structure of this radar system consists of eight frequently used function
menus, one main menu, and one service man menu used for the installation
settings.
Software buttons for opening those menus are displayed in the menu area located
at the bottom ten of the display.
For each menu item and structure, see the menu list in the appendix.
To prevent incorrect use, enter the special code to open the service man menu. For
operating the service man menu, see Section 7.1.1 "How to Open the Serviceman
MenuService Man Menu"
Main menu
Main Used for operating and setting the functions.
Serviceman menu
This menu is used for operation and settings when a system is
installed.
3 22
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION
Attention
3
When viewing a radar beacon or SART signal, select
IR Off (Interference Rejector OFF) because IR
processing suppresses the video.
Procedures
1) Left-click the IR button located at the lower left of the radar
display.
The interference rejection modes are switched.
3 23
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION
Procedures
1) Press [GAIN] dial
Values of the transmitter pulse width are switched.
Usable transmitter pulse width differs according to the type of antenna being used
and the observation range being used. For usable pulse width, see Section 11.8
"SCANNER UNIT (NKE-1139)" Section 11.14 "SCANNER UNIT (NKE-
2103-6HS)".
3 24
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION
Procedures
1) Left-click the ENH button located at the lower left of the radar
3
display.
The target enlargement levels are switched.
ENH Off ENH Level1 ENH Level2 ENH Level3 ENH Off
ENH Level1 :Expansion small Select this mode in general. Radar echoes
are expanded by 1 scale in all directions.
ENH Level2 :Expansion medium Select this mode to easily view the radar
video. Radar echoes are expanded by 2
scales in all directions on the display.
ENH Level3 Expansion large Select this mode to detect small targets
such as buoys. The expansion near a
screen center is added to ENH Level2.
3 25
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION
Attention
Procedures
1) Left-click the PROC button located at the lower left of the
display.
The video processing modes are switched.
3Scan CORREL : Select this mode when many rain/snow clutter returns are detected.
4Scan CORREL : Select this mode to highlight targets while suppressing sea clutter
returns.
5Scan CORREL : Select this mode to detect small targets hidden by sea clutter
returns.
Remain : Select this mode when own ship yaws wildly.
Peak Hold : Select this mode to detect small targets of which detection
probability is low.
3 26
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION
Procedures
1) Left-click the AZI Mode button located at the lower left of the
display.
3
The bearing display modes are switched.
H Up N Up C Up
The video is displayed so that the zenith of the PPI (0 on range rings) points to the due
north. Fixed targets do not flicker and are easily identified on the chart, and the true bearing
of a target can easily be read out.
The video is displayed so that the ships heading line points to the zenith of the PPI (0 on
range rings). Since targets are displayed in their directions relative to the ships heading
line, the operator can view the video in the same field of view as in operating the ship at sea.
This mode is suitable for watching over other ships.
By setting the course-up mode, own ship's course is fixed so that it is located on the zenith of
the radar display (0 on range rings). In the same way as in the North-up mode, fixed targets
do not flicker, and are stabilized even if the ship is yawing. The bearing of the heading line
varies by the same shift of own ships course. To change the course, press the [AZI
MODE] key several times again to select the course-up mode so as to set a new course.
North HL HL
North
HL
3 27
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION
3.4.6.1 Switching Relative Motion (RM) Mode to True Motion (TM) Mode
Procedures
1) Left-click the motion mode button located at the upper left of the
radar display.
RM(T) TM
The true motion mode will be selected. In the true motion mode, the own ships position on
the radar display moves depending upon its speed and course and the influence of the
current. Land and other fixed targets are fixed on the radar display and only actually moving
targets move on the radar display. When the true motion mode is selected, the own ships
position is set to about 60% of the display radius in the opposite direction to its course
allowing for the influence of the current. Own ship starts moving depending upon its speed
and course and the influence of the current. Subsequently, when own ship arrives at the
position of about 66% of the display radius, it is automatically reset to its initial position at
about 60% of the display radius in the opposite direction to its course allowing for the
influence of the current.
HL
Fixed on the radar display
Moving depending on
own ships speed
3.4.6.2 Resetting Own Ship to its Initial Position in True Motion (TM) Mode
Procedures
1) Left-click the motion mode button for 2 seconds.
Own ship will be reset to its initial position as established when the relative motion mode is
changed to the true motion mode. The ship starts moving from that position.
3.4.6.3 Switching True Motion (TM) Mode to Relative Motion (RM) Mode
Procedures
1) Left-click the motion mode button.
RM(T) TM
The relative motion mode will be selected. Own ship returns to the center of the radar
display.
3 28
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION
If Off Center functions set to scanner position is outside of the PPI range, when
function switching display with reference to scanner position.
This function is not available on the 96 NM range.
i
Procedures
3
1) Left-click the Off Center button located at the upper left of the
display.
The cross cursor mark will appear at the own ships position on the radar display.
While the cross cursor mark is moving, the own ships display position moves following
the cross cursor mark.
When it moves to a position outside 66% of the display radius, the center position is limited
to a position within 66% of the display radius.
3 29
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION
Saved trails cannot be erased even when the trail lengths are changed by using Trails button.
Even after the trails display is turned off, the past trails can be displayed traced back by
setting a desired time.
The system is plotting trails even while the trails display is off.
If the transmit time is short, the indicated trails duration may not have achieved the specified
time. The radar trails remaining time is indicated at the right of the trails length setting.
3 30
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION
Relative motion The system plots the trails of a target at a position relative to
trails: the own ship. The operator can easily judge whether the target
is approaching the own ship. While the own ship is moving, the
system also plots the trails of land and other fixed targets.
True motion The system plots the absolute motion trails of a target,
trails: irrespective of the own ships position. The operator can easily
judge the course and speed of the target. The system does not
3
plot the trails of land and other fixed targets.
HL Trails HL
Land
Trails
Trails modes provided with this system vary depending on the motion mode.
With true motion (TM) Only the true motion trails mode is available.
mode:
With relative motion The relative motion trails mode or true motion trails
(RM) mode: mode isselectable.
RM(R) is indicated while the relative motion
trails mode is active.
RM(T)is indicated while the true motion trails
mode is active.
While the true motion trails mode is active, this system enables the continuous use of true
motion trails even if any of the following operations is performed:
Motion display mode change (TM/RM)
TM reset
Bearing display mode change
Center move (Off Center)
MAP display on/off (Map)
3 31
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION
Procedures
1) Click the Trails Mode located at the upper right of the radar
display.
T R
3 32
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION
This function doubles the size of radar video near a specified position.
3
Procedures
1) Left-click the x2 button located at the lower left of the display.
The zoom mode is selected.
Using the cross cursor mark as reference, the zoom function doubles the size of a radar video
with the midpoint between the cursor mark and own ships position being set to the center
of radar display.
HL
HL
Cursor mark
Cancel
1) Left-click the x2 button located at the lower left of the
display.
The zoom mode is cancelled.
3 33
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION
Procedures
HL
1) Press the [HL OFF] key. Alternatively, Left-click the Off
button located at the lower right of the display.
The ship's heading line (HL) is hidden while the [HL OFF] key is held down.
The ship's heading line that indicates the course of own ship is always shown on the radar
display. The heading line is hidden while the [HL OFF] key is held down, so the targets on
the heading line can be easily observed.
Various graphics information such as target tracking TT/AIS symbols, NAV lines,
and MAP information is shown on the radar display of this radar system, and may
make it difficult to view the radar video. In that case, use this function to
temporarily hide unnecessary graphics information.
Procedures
Data
1) Press the [DATA OFF] key. Alternatively, Left-click the Off
button located at the lower right of the display.
While the key is pressed, graphics data other than VRM, EBL, HL, cross cursor mark, and
range rings on the radar display is temporarily hidden.
3 34
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION
Several combinations of the display color and brilliance according to the ambient
lighting conditions are provided. The display color setting is easily changed.
Procedures
3
1) Press the [DAY/NIGHT] key. Alternatively, left-click the Day/Night
button located at the lower right of the radar display.
The DAY/NIGHT modes are switched.
The current mode is displayed at the lower right of the radar display.
For how to set the display color and brilliance for each mode, see Section 3.8.5 "Set Radar
Display (Display Setting)"
Procedures Panel
1) Press the [PANEL] key. Alternatively, left-click the
button located at the lower right of the radar display.
In consideration of the ambient brightness, adjust panel brilliance that is high enough to read
the characters on the operation panel but does not glare.
3 35
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION
When the GYRO I/F is used to enter a gyro signal, there is a rare case in which a
true bearing value indicated by the master gyro does not match the true bearing
value indicated by this radar system.
In that case, adjust the true bearing value of this system so that it matches the
value indicated by the master gyro.
Procedures
1) Open the numeric value input screen to enter a true bearing
value by performing the menu operation below.
Main
1. Gyro Setting
For how to input numeric data on the numeric value input screen, see Section
3.3.4 "Operation on Numeric Value, Latitude / Longitude and Character Input
menu".
MAN (Manual) LOG (Single-axis water log) 2AXW (Dual-axis water log)
3 36
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION
NOTE: If the single axis water log display can present the speed of
the ship in other than the forward direction, the direction of
movement should be indicated unambiguously. Therefore
single axis water logs cannot detect the effect of leeway.
If you selected the 2AXW, the value of forward-backward
direction is indicated.
If ships in shallow water, when the accuracy of the dual-axis
log may be decreased. If ships in deep sea area, when the
accuracy of the dual-axis log error may be occurred.
3
The accuracy of GPS's COG is 3 when own ships speed
no fewer than 1kn, no more than 17kn. The accuracy of
GPS's COG is 1 when own ships speed over 17kn.
Procedures
1) Left-click the own ship speed device button in the Own Ship
Information area located at the upper right of the display, and
select the manual mode MAN .
3) Enter the value for the own ship speed on the numeric value
input screen.
For how to input numeric data on the numeric value input screen, see Section 3.3.4
"Operation on Numeric Value, Latitude / Longitude and Character Input menu".
Procedures
1) Open the MAG Compass Setting menu by performing the
following menu operation.
Main
3 37
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION
Off On
For how to input numeric data on the numeric value input screen, see Section 3.3.4
"Operation on Numeric Value, Latitude / Longitude and Character Input menu".
This function can be used only when MAN or LOG is selected for ship-speed
data.
Procedures
1) Open the Set/Drift Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Main
3. Set/Drift Setting
Off On
For how to input numeric data on the numeric value input screen, see Section 3.3.4
"Operation on Numeric Value, Latitude / Longitude and Character Input menu".
3 38
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.5 USE OWN SHIP'S TRACK
The own ship's track function saves and displays own ship's track.
If the own ship track display is turned off when own ship
track is in storage, own ship's tracks are not shown on the
radar display, but own ship's track is still saved.
Procedures
1) Left-click the Own Track Color Track button located at the
lower right of the display.
Own Track Interval
Own Track Interval Unit
Map On/Off
3 39
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.5 USE OWN SHIP'S TRACK
3.5.2 Set Display Color of Own Ship's Track (Display Own Track
Color)
Own ship's track can be saved in seven different colors.
Procedures
1) Open the Display Own Track Setting menu by performing the
menu operation
Track
When 1. All is set to Off All of own ship's tracks are not displayed.
When 1. All is set to Individual Settings are made by color by performing the
operation below.
2) Left-click the color button for the desired display setting which is
to be changed.
Display of each item is switched between On and Off
3 40
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.5 USE OWN SHIP'S TRACK
To save own ship's track, storage at a specified time interval and at a specified
range interval can be selected.
The track storage interval can be selected from 10 preset time intervals and 8
preset range intervals.
3
Storage intervals that can be selected
Time: 3 sec, 5 sec, 10 sec, 30 sec, 1 min, 3 min, 5 min, 10 min, 30 min, and 60 min
Range: 0.1 NM, 0.2 NM, 0.3 NM, 0.5 NM, 1 NM, 3 NM, 5 NM, and 10 NM
Procedures
1) Left-click the Own Track Interval unit button located at the lower
right of the display.
Every time the button is clicked, the units of measure for the storage are switched.
Map On/Off
2) Left-click the Own Track Interval button located at the lower right
of the display.
Every time the button is clicked, storage intervals are switched.
Cancel
1) Left-click the Own Track Interval button located at the lower right
of the display.
Every time the button is clicked, interval for track storage are switched.
3 41
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.5 USE OWN SHIP'S TRACK
Procedures
1) Open the Clear Own Track Color menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Track
After the item has been selected, Clear Own Track Confirmation Window will appear.
The following expanded track functions can be used for this radar system.
Water depth track : The water depth value at the latitude/longitude is recorded.
Tidal current track : The tidal current vector at the latitude/longitude is recorded.
Only one type of expanded own ship's track can be used at a time. Multiple types
of expanded tracks cannot be used at the same time.
Specify the type of the expanded own ship's tracks to be used by performing the
operation below.
3 42
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.5 USE OWN SHIP'S TRACK
Procedures
1) Left-click the Track button located at the lower right of the
display.
Track menu
3
The Own Track Menu will appear.
Numeric value or vector of navigation data can be added to own ship's track.
NOTE: To use the expanded own ship's track function, the track
must be entered from the special navigation equipment
into this radar system.
3 43
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.5 USE OWN SHIP'S TRACK
Set the corresponding conditions for the water depth value and the color of own
ship's track by performing the operation below.
Procedures
1) Open the Water Depth Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Track
Enter a value of the boundary water depth for each item according to the table below to set
up the corresponding conditions for the water depth value and the color of own ship's track.
White
1. xxxx m Min
Gray
2. xxxx m
Blue
3. xxxx m
Green
4. xxxx m
Yellow
5. xxxx m
Pink
6. xxxx m Max
Red
For example, if 10m is entered for 1. , 30m is entered for 2. , and 50m is entered for 3. , the
area with a water depth of less than 10 meters is indicated by white tracks, the area with a
water depth of 10 to 30 meters is indicated by gray tracks, and the area with a water depth of
30 to 50 meters is indicated by blue tracks.
3 44
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.5 USE OWN SHIP'S TRACK
Set the corresponding conditions for the water temperature value and the color of
own ship's track by performing the operation below.
Procedures
3
1) Open the Water TEMP. Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below
Track
Enter a value of the boundary water temperature for each item according to the table below
to set up the corresponding conditions for the water temperature value and the color of own
ship's track.
White
1. xx.x Min
Gray
2. xx.x
Blue
3. xx.x
Green
4. xx.x
Yellow
5. xx.x
Pink
6. xx.x Max
Red
For example, if 10.0 is entered for 1. , 13.0 is entered for 2. , and 15.0 is entered for
3. , the area with a water temperature of less than 10.0 is indicated by white tracks, the
area with a water depth of 10.0 to 13.0 is indicated by gray tracks, and the area with a
water depth of 13.0 to 15.0 is indicated by blue tracks.
3 45
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.5 USE OWN SHIP'S TRACK
Set the conditions for adding tidal current vectors to own ship's track by
performing the operation below.
Procedures
1) Open the Current Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Track
8. Current Setting
3 46
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP
Up to 20,000 items of NAV lines, coastlines, depth contours, and NAV marks can
be created, displayed, loaded, and saved. (This function is available only when
navigation equipment is connected to this radar system.)
3
Marks that can be used : 29 types
Lines that can be used : 3 types (solid, broken, and dashed-dotted line)
NOTE: The user map function is available between latitudes of 85N and 85S.
The user map can be created and edited by performing the following operation.
The mark font to be used is displayed to the right of the Cursor button.
3 47
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP
3 48
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP
3
6)
previous point.
Line plotting will be terminated. To plot another line, repeat procedures 3.
Procedures
1) Open the Edit User Map menu by performing the following menu
operation.
U.Map
3 49
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP
The window will not be open when the system is in the transmission state.
Setting by type: Setting can be made by mark font and line pattern.
3 50
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP
3
On : Setting by type is activated.
2) Specify whether to turn on or off the display for each color type
of mark and line.
When 1. All is selected, the setting will reflect to all color types of marks and
lines.
3 51
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP
Procedures
1) Open the Comment Font Size menu by performing the menu
operation below.
U.Map
3.6.3.1 Manually entering the own ship position (Own Ship Position)
Use this function when editing navigation data for a location different from the own ship
position.
Procedures
1) Open the Own Ship Position menu by performing the menu
operation below.
U.Map
The number key screen for entering the latitude/longitude of the Own Ship Position will
appear.
3 52
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP
Procedures
1) Open the Edit User Map menu by performing the following menu
operation.
U.Map
3 53
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP
Move Map is displayed in the cursor mode located at the upper right of the display.
(Example)
3 54
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP
Procedures
1) Open the Edit User Map menu by performing the following menu
operation.
U.Map
Delete is displayed in the cursor mode located at the upper right of the display.
3 55
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP
Procedures
1) Open the Edit User Map menu by performing the following menu
operation.
U.Map
3) Put the cursor to a side line into which a vertex will be inserted,
and left-click.
A vertex is inserted into the selected line, and the cursor mark will be displayed.
4) Move the cursor mark to the newly inserted vertex, and left-
click.
To insert another vertex, repeat procedures 3 and 4.
The cursor mode changes to the normal operation mode, terminating the user map insertion/
correction mode.
3 56
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP
(Example)
The side line into which
a vertex is inserted
Inserted vertex
3
3.6.3.5 Correcting the mark or vertex of a line (Insert/Move Vertex)
With regard to the created user map, a mark or line is corrected.
Procedures
1) Open the Edit User Map menu by performing the following menu
operation.
U.Map
3 57
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP
The cursor mode changes to the normal operation mode, terminating the user map
insertion/correction mode.
(Example)
Original vertex
New vertex
Procedures
1) Open the Edit User Map menu by performing the following menu
operation.
U.Map
3 58
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP
The cursor mode changes to the normal operation mode, terminating the user map delete
mode.
(Example)
Procedures
1) Open the Edit User Map menu by performing the following menu
operation.
U.Map
After the items have been selected, Confirmation Window will appear.
3 59
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP
NOTE: If data is not copied on the flash memory card (option), the data
is not be reloaded.
Procedures
1) Open the [Shift] menu by performing the menu operation below.
U.Map
3. Shift
Shift is displayed for the Cursor mode, indicating that the user map shift mode is
selected.
At this time, Map Shift is displayed in the map position correction (lower right of the
display), indicating that the position is being corrected.
3 60
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP
3.6.4.2 Restoring the corrected user map to its original state (Shift Clear)
Procedures
1) Open the Mark Operations menu by performing the following
menu operation.
U.Map
4. Shift Clear
Only the most recently corrected data (for a single input) will be cleared, and the data will be
displayed at its original position.
3
At this time, Map Shift is not displayed in the map position correction (lower right of the
display).
7. File Operation
3) Left-click the item button of 1. Select Card Slot and select the
card slot.
Slot1 and Slot2 of the Select Card Slot items are switched.
When [Add] is selected, new data is added to the savedd data. When [Overwrite] is selected,
the saved data is overwritten.
3 61
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP
Procedures
1) Open the File Operations menu by performing the following
menu operation.
U.Map
7. File Operation
Procedures
1) Insert a flash memory card into the card slot.
Flash memory card (option) is necessary.
3 62
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP
7. File Operation
3) Left-click the item button of 1. Select Card Slot and select the
card slot.
3
Slot1 and Slot2 of the Select Card Slot items are switched.
After the data has been entered, Confirmation Window will appear.
7. File Operation
3) Left-click the item button of 1. Select Card Slot and select the
card slot.
Slot1 and Slot2 of the Select Card Slot items are switched.
3 63
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP
Procedures
1) Insert a flash memory card into the card slot.
Flash memory card (option) is necessary.
7. File Operation
3) Left-click the item button of 1. Select Card Slot and select the
card slot.
Slot1 and Slot2 of the Select Card Slot items are switched.
3 64
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP
[1] Setting the geodetic system for navigation data to be saved (Geodetic)
3
Procedures
1) Open the Geodetic menu by performing the following menu
operation.
U.Map
6. Geodetic
For how to input numeric datas on the numeric value input screen, see Section 3.3.4
"Operation on Numeric Value, Latitude / Longitude and Character Input menu".
[2] Displaying the geodetic system of the navigation data being displayed (Geodetic)
Procedures
1) Load navigation data by referring to Section 3.6.5.1 "Loading
navigation data (Load User Map)".
3 65
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP
3 66
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION
Route : Route created in the radar system, ECDIS and GPS are displayed.
Destination mark : Destination marks sent from outside navigation equipment are
displayed.
Procedures
1) Left-click the Route button located at the lower right of the
radar display.
The Route Menu will appear.
ECDIS /GPS : Route created in the ECDIS and GPS are displayed.ii
3 67
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION
To Waypoint
Waypoint alarm circle : The circle that shows the distance to judge arrival in Waypoint.
Route alarm line : The line that shows the distance width to judge route alarm.
Waypoint bearing vector : A vector line that shows next destination from own ship's CCRP.
In this radar system, it is possible to easily create and correct route by performing
operation on the radar display.
3 68
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION
Procedures
1) Open the Set Route Sequence menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Route
2. WPT/Route Setting
Procedures
1) Open the Set Route Sequence menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Route
2. WPT/Route Setting
The rubber band from the last Waypoint to the cursor position will be displayed on the radar
display.
When a Waypoint is added, the value of the Planned Speed in the section up to the menu is
used for the Planned Speed value up to the added Waypoint.
3 69
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION
(Example)
023
062T
12.0kn
Rubber band
024
Last Waypoint
Procedures
1) Open the Set Route Sequence menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Route
2. WPT/Route Setting
The cursor display becomes a cursor mark, and a rubber band is displayed.
3 70
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION
(Example)
025 025
108T 108T
064T 064T
8.00kn 8.00kn
12.0kn 026 12.0kn 026
024 024 Rubber band
3
Waypoint that is to have its
position corrected
Cross cursor mark
Procedures
1) Open the Set Route Sequence menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Route
2. WPT/Route Setting
3 71
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION
(Example)
Planned speed: 10.00kn
Procedures
1) Open the Set Route Sequence menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Route
2. WPT/Route Setting
3 72
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION
(Example)
Waypoint to be deleted
000 003
113T 064T
113T
8.00kn 11.0kn
090T 12.0kn
001 002 004
10.0kn
Procedures
1) Open the Set Route Sequence menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Route
2. WPT/Route Setting
3 73
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION
3) On the radar display, put the cursor on the section line into
which a Waypoint is to be inserted, and left-click.
The section is specified, the cursor becomes a cross cursor mark, and the cross cursor mark is
connected to the previous and following Waypoints by a rubber band.
button.
The Waypoint inserting mode will be cancelled.
(Example)
Rubber band
090T 090T
001 001
10.0kn 10.0kn
Waypoint is inserted into this section. Waypoint is inserted into this section.
3 74
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION
2. WPT/Route Setting
6. Waypoint Input
3 75
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION
Procedures
1) Open the Waipoint Input menu.
For the input method on the latitude / longitude and numeric value input screen, see Section
3.3.4.5 "Entering latitude/longitude" and Section 3.3.4.7 "Entering a character".
Procedures
1) Open the Waipoint Input menu.
4) Enter a comment.
A comment will be added.
For the input method on the character input screen, see Section 3.3.4.7 "Entering a
character".
3 76
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION
Procedures
1) Open the Waipoint Input menu.
For the input method on the latitude / longitude input screen, see Section 3.3.4.5 "Entering
latitude/longitude".
Procedures
1) Open the Waipoint Input menu.
For the input method on the numeric value input screen, see Section 3.3.4 "Operation on
Numeric Value, Latitude / Longitude and Character Input menu".
3 77
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION
Procedures
1) Open the Waipoint Input menu.
Procedures
1) Open the Waipoint Input menu.
For the input method on the latitude / longitude and numeric value input screen, see Section
3.3.4 "Operation on Numeric Value, Latitude / Longitude and Character Input menu".
3 78
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION
This radar system can monitor the movement of own ship with regard to its route
and activate a variety of alarms.
Destination alarm When own ship arrives at next Waypoint, an alarm will
(Waypoint Alarm): be activated.
Route alarm: When own ship deviates from the specified route, an
3
alarm will be activated.
To Waypoint
Arrival: An alarm is activated when own ship has entered the circle from outside.
Break Off: An alarm is activated when own ship has left the circle to the outside.
Procedures
1) Open the WPT/Route Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Route
2. WPT/Route Setting
3 79
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION
The route alarm lines are displayed with a specified width provided.
Route alarm line
Approach An alarm is activated when own ship enters the route range from
outside.
XTE(Cross An alarm is activated when own ship leaves the route range.
Track Error)
Procedures
1) Open the WPT/Route Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Route
2. WPT/Route Setting
3 80
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION
Displaying the route The internal route is displayed according to the procedures in
(Route Alarm Color): Section 3.7.1 "Display Route/Destination Mark (Select Route)".
3
(Route Sequence):
Skipping of route The Waypoint which is after next Waypoint is set as the next
(Waypoint Skip): Waypoint.
Skipping back of the route The previous Waypoint is set as the next Waypoint.
(Waypoint Back Skip):
000
005
003
001
002 004
Procedures
1) Open the WPT/Route Operations menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Route
3. WPT/Route Operations
Left-click the set value of the 1. Route Sequence item, and select an
operation mode.
3 81
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION
006
: Forward
000 Backward
ki p W ay
ac k S poin
oint B t Ski
p
Wayp 005
003
001
002 k ip
Wayp
o in t Ba c
004
nt S k S kip
y poi
Wa
Skipping of route The Waypoint which is after the next Waypoint is set as the
(Waypoint Skip): next Waypoint.
Skipping back the route The previous Waypoint is set as the next Waypoint.
(Waypoint Back Skip):
Procedures
1) Open the WPT/Route Operations menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Route
3. WPT/Route Operations
button.
The Waypoint which is after the next Waypoint is set as the next Waypoint.
Color for the route alarm line Set the display color for the route alarm line.
(SEL NUM/Comment Size)
3 82
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION
Display character size :Specify the size of the numeric value and character displayed on
(SEL NUM/Comment Size) the radar display.
Waypoint bearing vector :Set the method to display line between next Waypoint and own
(Waypoint Vector) ship.
Display of bearing distance to the :Select the start point to be used for the bearing/distance display in
destination(Status of Origin/DEST) the Waypoint data display area.
ON/OFF of Waypoint number display :Set whether or not to display Waypoint number next to the
(WPT Number Display) Waypoint mark.
Waypoint update :Set how to update Waypoint number when one Waypoint has been
(Waypoint Switch Mode) reached. 3
3.7.6.1 Color for the route alarm line (Off-Track Limit Line)
Route alarm lines are displayed on both sides of the center line of the route.
For this item, set which color is used to display each line.
Route alarm line Route alarm line
Procedures
1) Open the WPT/Route Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Route
2. WPT/Route Setting
2) Left-click the set value of the 8. Off-Track Limit Line item, and
select an operation mode.
IALA-A : Area A
IALA-B : Area B
3 83
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION
Procedures
1) Open the Next menu by performing the menu operation below.
Route
2. WPT/Route Setting
9. Next
2) Left-click the set value of the 1. SEL NUM/Comment Size item, and
select an operation mode.
Procedures
1) Open the Next menu by performing the menu operation below.
Route
2. WPT/Route Setting
9. Next
2) Left-click the set value of the 2. Waypoint Vector item, and select
an operation mode.
From Origin : A line is displayed from the previous Waypoint to next Waypoint.
Waypoint bearing vector
To Waypoint
To Waypoint
3 84
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION
Procedures
1) Open the Next menu by performing the menu operation below.
Route
3
2. WPT/Route Setting
9. Next
From CURR POSN :The bearing distance from the own ship position
to next Waypoint is displayed.
Procedures
1) Open the Next menu by performing the menu operation below.
Route
2. WPT/Route Setting
9. Next
2) Left-click the set value of the 4. WPT Number Display item, and
select an operation mode.
3 85
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION
Procedures
1) Open the WPT/Route Operations menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Route
3. WPT/Route Operations
2) Left-click the set value of the 2. Waypoint Switch Mode item, and
select an operation mode.
Manual : When next Waypoint has been reached, user updates the
following Waypoint.
Procedures
1) Open the WPT/Route Operations menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Route
3. WPT/Route Operations
3 86
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION
Route data saved in the radar system can be saved onto a flash memory card, and
data can be loaded from a flash memory card into the radar system.
With regard to this item, only route data can be saved and loaded. To save or load
own ship's track, target track data, and mark/line data, see Section 3.11 "USING
CARD".
Selecting a card slot Specify the card slot to be used for operating a
(Select Card Slot): route data file.
Saving route data (Save): Route data saved in the radar system is saved
3
onto a flash memory card.
Loading route data (Load): Route data saved on a flash memory card is
loaded into the radar system.
Erasing route data file A route data file saved in a flash memory card
(Erase): is erased.
Procedures
1) Insert a flash memory card into the card slot.
4. File Operation
3) Left-click the set value of the 1. Select Card Slot item, and
select a card slot.
Slot1 and Slot2 of the Select Card Slot items are switched.
3 87
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION
Procedures
1) Insert a flash memory card into the card slot.
4. File Operation
For the input method on the character input screen, see Section 3.3.4.7 "Entering a
character".
Once route data has been loaded into the radar system from a
NOTE: flash memory card, the route data that has been saved in the
radar system is overwritten and erased. Route data that has
been erased cannot be resaved. Note that important route data
should be saved in a flash memory card.
3 88
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION
Procedures
1) Insert a flash memory card into the card slot.
4. File Operation
3
3) Left-click the 2. Load button.
Contents of the specified memory card (file list) will be displayed.
Procedures
1) Insert a flash memory card into the card slot.
4. File Operation
3 89
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION
3 90
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS
Procedures
3
1) Open the Process Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Main
3. RADAR Menu
1. Process Setting
Detail information about radar signal processing can be set by changing the settings of the
menu items.
3 91
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS
Off Turns off the noise rejection function, and displays all
signals. Targets are popped up from noise and displayed
like analog signals.
3 92
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS
Range Fix Sets a boundary at a constant range from the center. Set
the boundary range in Section 3.8.1.6 "Process Switch
Range". The specific area turns out to be a circle with the
own ships position as the center.
3Scan CORREL : Select this mode when many rain/snow clutter returns are detected.
4Scan CORREL : Select this mode to highlight targets while suppressing sea clutter returns.
5Scan CORREL : Select this mode to detect small targets hidden by sea clutter returns.
Peak Hold : Select this mode to detect small targets of which detection probability is low.
3 93
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS
3 94
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS
This function enables the setting of detail information about radar trails
processing.
Procedures
3
1) Open the RADAR Trails Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Main
3. RADAR Menu
Detail data about radar trails processing can be set by changing the settings of each menu
item.
3 95
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS
Short : Sets 15 minutes as the maximum time for radar trails display.
Middle : Sets 30 minutes as the maximum time for radar trails display.
Long : Sets 60 minutes as the maximum time for radar trails display.
3 96
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS
Procedures
1) Open the TXRX Setting menu by performing the menu operation
below.
3
Main
3. RADAR Menu
3. TXRX Setting
Detail information about antenna operation can be set by changing the settings of the menu
items.
3.8.3.3 PRF
Select the operation mode the transmitting repetition frequency of the
transmitter.
3 97
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS
Off :The ice class standby mode is not used. When transmission is
in the standby state, the antenna also stops rotating.
This function enables the setting of detail information about cursor operation and
display.
Procedures
1) Open the Cursor Setting menu by performing the menu operation
below.
Main
7. Sub Menu
9. EBL/Cursor Setting
3. Cursor Setting
Detail information about cursor operation and display can be set by changing the settings of
the menu items.
3 98
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS
: Type 1 is selected for the cross cursor mark 1 displayed in the radar display.
3
: Type 2 is selected for the cross cursor mark 2 displayed in the radar display.
: Type 3 is selected for the cross cursor mark 3 displayed in the radar display.
: Type 4 is selected for the cross cursor mark 4 displayed in the radar display.
This system can save combinations of display color and brilliance in accordance
with ambient lighting conditions and the radar display can be easily switched.
Follow the procedures below to set display color and brilliance to be saved before
hand.
Procedures
1) Open the Color Setting menu by performing the menu operation
below.
Main
7. Sub Menu
3 99
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS
3.8.5.2 Day/Night
Specify the mode to be changed.
The following modes are available:
Outer PPI : The color of the background outside radar video PPI is
selected.
Inner PPI : The color of the background inside radar video PPI is
selected.
Character : The color of the character and bearing scale is selected.
RADAR Video : The color of the radar video is selected.
RADAR Trails(Time) : The color of the time radar trails is selected.
RADAR Trails(All) : The color of the time radar trails is selected.
Target Symbol : The color of the target symbol is selected.
Cursor : The color of the cursor is selected.
Range Rings : The color of the range rings is selected.
EBL/VRM/PI : The color of the EBL / VRM / PI is selected.
Own Symbol /HL/Vector : The color of the own ship symbol, heading line, own
ship vector is selected.
3 100
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS
Procedures
1) Open the Brilliance Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Main
7. Sub Menu
2. Brilliance Setting
3
Display Brilliance Setting menu will appear.
Procedures VID
1) Left-click the button located at the lower right of the
radar display, and adjust the brilliance of the radar video so as to
get the best view of the video display.
The brilliance of the radar video can be adjusted on four stages without opening the
Brilliance Setting menu.
3 101
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS
Procedures TT
1) Left-click the button located at the lower right of the
radar display, and adjust the brilliance of the target symbol so as
to get the best view of the video display.
The brilliance of the target symbol can be adjusted on four stages without opening the
Brilliance Setting menu.
Procedures
1) Open the Buzzer Volume menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Main
7. Sub Menu
2. Brilliance Setting
The volume of the alarm sound can be specified for each cause for alarm.
Level4 indicates maximum volume and Off indicates minimum volume.
3 102
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS
Users can freely make settings with [OPTION 1] key and [OPTION 2] key.
By using the keys, users can open a frequently used menu by only single
operation, or assign special functions, to the user key switches.
7. Sub Menu
This system provides two user keys: [OPTION 1] and [OPTION 2]. Different functions can
be allocated to each key.
3 103
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS
Procedures
1) Perform the general menu open procedure to open the menu that
is to be directly displayed with Option Key.
The menu set for the pressed option key will open.
i Subsequently, general menu operation can be performed.
Procedures
1) Press either [OPTION 1] key or [OPTION 2] key for which
Zoom has been set.
The zoom mode is activated.
Cancel
1) Press either [OPTION 1] key or [OPTION 2] key for which
Zoom has been set.
The zoom mode is cancelled and a normal display will appear.
3 104
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS
3
Procedures
1) Open the Multi Window Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Main
Detailed settings of the display are possible by changing the settings of each item.
3 105
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS
Area1 : Displays the numeric values of navigation information in digital information area 1.
Area2 : Displays the numeric values of navigation information in digital information area 2.
3 106
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS
3
[4] Depth Unit
Area1 : Displays the wind direction / speed graph in digital information area 1.
Area2 : Displays the wind direction / speed graph in digital information area 2.
Set the unit of wind velocity for the wind direction / speed graph.
m/s : Meters per second are used as the unit of wind speed.
km/h : Kirometers per hour are used as the unit of wind speed.
3 107
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS
Determine whether to display the graph of the water-temperature data that has
been received on the radar display.
One of two digital information areas is used to display data.
When the water-temperature graph is displayed, the sizes of the target tracking
(TT)/AIS numeric data display areas are exclusively decreased.
Left-click the Target button located at thelower righit of the display. The
water-temperature graph display function is switched between On and Off.
When Color is selected for the display color for the water-temperature graph,
set the temperature range of each color.
3 108
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS
Determine whether to display the bar graph for the course data that has been
received on the radar display.
One of two digital information areas is used to display data.
When the course-bar graph is displayed, the sizes of the target tracking (TT)/
AIS numeric data display areas are exclusively decreased.
Left-click the Target button located at the lower righit of the display. The
3
course bar display function is switched between On and Off.
Determine which field of the APB sentence that has been received is used to
display AP course.
3 109
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS
Data can be automatically backed up when the power supply is turned on.
Procedures
1) Insert a flash memory card into the card slot.
Flash memory card (option) is necessary.
8. Plot Setting
Data that can be backed up includes own ship's track (Own Track), other ships' trails data
(Target Track), mark/line data (Mark/Line), destination data (WPT), and route data (Route).
The file name to be saved is either 9998 or 9999. Every time the power supply is turned on,
those numbers are alternately displayed.
3 110
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.9 USE FUNCTION KEY [USER]
"Radar Function Setting" is provided for easily obtaining the best radar video by
storing complex radar signal processing settings in the optimum status by use, and
calling the setting in accordance with the conditions for using the function.
3
Functions are factory-set for general use, and the settings can be fine adjusted by
operating the menu.
Four function modes are available, and they are factory-set as follows:
Function 4: Rain Use this mode when sea clutter is not strong but
rain / snow clutter is strong.
Since this method does not change the memory contents, the new setting is discarded as soon
as another function is called.
When the previous function is called again, operation is performed according to the memory
contents.
3 111
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.9 USE FUNCTION KEY [USER]
For how to operate the function setting menu, see Section 3.9.3 "Overview of Function
Operations (User Function Setting)".
page 2 Option
1. Pulse Length 0.75NM Standard pulse length for 0.75nm range SP1/MP1
2. Pulse Length 1.5NM Standard pulse length for 1.5nm range SP1/MP1/MP2/MP3
3. Pulse Length 3/4NM Standard pulse length for 3nm range MP1/MP2/MP3/LP1
4. Pulse Length 6/8NM Standard pulse length for 6nm range MP1/MP2/MP3/LP1/LP2
5. Pulse Length 12NM Standard pulse length for 12nm range MP1/MP2/MP3/LP1/LP2
6. Pulse Length 16NM Standard pulse length for 16nm range MP1/MP2/MP3/LP1/LP2
page 3 Option
1. Video Latitude Dynamic range of radar video Narrow/ Normal /Wide/Super Wide
2. Video Noise Rejection Radar video noise rejection Off/Level1/Level2
3. AUTO Dynamic Range Automatic dynamic range control Off/On
4. Process Switch Radar video process switching Off/Range FIX/AUTO
5. 2nd Process Mode 2nd video process mode PROC Off/3Scan CORREL/....
6. Process Switch Range Video process switching range
7. Fast Target Detection Off/On
page 4 Option
1. Trails Interval Radar trails length Off/15sec/....
2. Trails Mode True/Relative
3. Trails Reference Level Radar trails plotting threshold Level1-4
4. Trails Reduction Thinning of radar trails Off/Level1-3
6. Trails Process Superimpose-display of time radar trails and Off/On
continuous radar trails.
7. Max Interval Maximum time for radar trails display Short/Middle/Long
page 5 Option
1. Gain Offset Gain correction
2. PRF Transmitting repetition frequency Normal/Economy/High Power
3. Small Buoy Detection Small target detection mode Off/On
4. Fishnet Detection Fishnet detection mode Off/On
5. Antenna Height Default/-5m/5-10m/10-20m/20m
8. Set Mode Default
9. Initialize
3 112
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.9 USE FUNCTION KEY [USER]
The following outlines the operation of each function selected from the function
setting menu:
Procedures
1) Open the Process Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Main
3
3. RADAR Menu
1. Process Setting
Specify the number for the function for which the settings are to be changed.
The following are the operation overviews of each function setting item.
3 113
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.9 USE FUNCTION KEY [USER]
Even when the strength of sea clutter varies depending on the wind
direction, AUTO Sea performs the most suitable suppression
processing. Land like islands can be displayed naturally.
Since rain clouds outside sea clutter areas are recognized as land,
there is no effect of suppressing rain / snow clutter.
AUTO Sea/Rain : Along with AUTO Sea, AUTO Rain automatically detects the
strength of rain / snow clutter, and performs the most suitable rain /
snow clutter suppression processing.
When rain clouds are scattered about, AUTO Rain performs rain /
snow clutter suppression processing for only the rain-cloud areas.
3 114
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.9 USE FUNCTION KEY [USER]
3 115
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.9 USE FUNCTION KEY [USER]
On :Activates the small buoy detection mode that reduces the loss
of signal processing.
3 116
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.9 USE FUNCTION KEY [USER]
Default data: : Standard data of each function mode that users can change
Data that can be : Saved data that can be called by pressing the [USER] key
called:
Procedures
1) Open the User Function Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
3
Main
3. RADAR Menu
1. Process Setting
3 117
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.10 USE USER SETTING
The operation status of the radar is recorded. If the system is operated by more
than one operator, the operators can register operation status as suitable for them
and call the status. Operation status for up to five operations can be registered, and
a name can be assigned to each status. (Up to 10 alphanumeric characters)
Buzzer Volume
Cursor Length
Procedures
1) Open the Save User Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Main
7. Sub Menu
3. User Setting
After the file name has been entered, the operating conditions will be saved.
3 118
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.10 USE USER SETTING
When the operating state is loaded, the previous operating state data is discarded.
Therefore, if you do not want to discard the operating state data, save the
operating state by performing the operation described in Section 3.10.1 "Save
Operating State (Save User Setting)".
Procedures
1) Open the Load User Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
3
Main
7. Sub Menu
3. User Setting
Procedures
1) Open the Delete User Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Main
7. Sub Menu
3. User Setting
3 119
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.11 USING CARD
This radar has two card slots. Inserting a flash memory card (option) into a card
slot, you can save the following contents, saved in the processor, in the card or can
load data from the card to the processor.
These pieces of information can be saved in a flash memory card as a file. The
internal capacity is as large as only a file. An internally created file can be saved
until the flash memory card is full.
Procedures
1) Insert a flash memory card into the card slot.
Flash memory card (option) is necessary.
2. File Manager
3 120
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.11 USING CARD
Device 1 Device 2
device type device type
Device 1 format
Device 2 file list
Device 1 saved
information
scroll
3
Device 1
Device 1 saved
select and
information
cancel all files
Device 2
Processor saved
select and
information
cancel all files
Exit Device 1 file list Copy file from Message
scroll device 2 to device 1
Own Track : Number of data points for own ship's track (7000 points maximum)
Remain : Number of remaining data points of own ship's track that can be saved
Mark/Line : Number of mark and line points made with user map (up to 20000 items)
Remain : Number of remaining data points of marks and lines that can be saved
The file name and data saved in the selected device will be displayed.
Pressing the arrows located at the upper right and lower right of the file name
list will scroll the list.
3 121
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.11 USING CARD
Procedures
1) While the File Manager window is open, left-click the device 1
selection button.
Selected items for Device1 will be displayed.
After the data has been entered, Confirmation Window will appear.
Up to the maximum number of items, described on the previous page, can be saved in the
device. With regard to the capacity for saving data, data can be saved on a flash memory card
as a file, and those files can be saved until the flash memory card is full.
3 122
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.11 USING CARD
3.11.1.2 Load Information from Card to Internal Portion (Copy Card ->
Internal)
Procedures
1) While the File Manager window is open, left-click the device 1
selection button.
Selected items for Device1 will be displayed.
2) Left-click the
Internal is selected.
1. Internal button among the selection items.
3
3) Left-click the device 2 selection button.
Selected items for Device2 will be displayed.
When adding data saved on the card to the data saved in the system, data can be copied from
multiple files. However, when the maximum number of units of data is reached, additional
data cannot be loaded. Even in the ADD mode, WPT data and Route data are overwritten.
3 123
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.11 USING CARD
After the data has been entered, Confirmation Window will appear.
3 124
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.11 USING CARD
3 125
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.11 USING CARD
Exit
1) Left-click the 1. Exit button.
The File Manager menu will close.
3 126
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.12 RECEIVE PORT SETTING
NOTE: If the connection is not suggested from JRC office, don't connect PC or other
maker's system to JRC-LAN.
Connecting PC or other maker's system may cause a lower radar system performance.
Connecting PC or other maker's system may cause a lower that performance.
3
3.12.1 Receive Port Setting (RX Port)
Select ports for receiving signals from sensors.
There are two methods for receiving signals: specifying a port for each sensor, or using
the automatic recognition function without specifying ports.
Procedures
1) Open the RX Port Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Main
6. RX Port
2) Set a port for each sensor.
Selectable ports
When the automatic recognition AUTO
function is used:
When ports are specified: Own LAN LAN (GPS) LAN (Ships Clock)
Own : The system use data from sensor connected to the system directly.
LAN (GPS) : The system uses GPS data from GPS (JRC-LAN connected).
LAN (Ships Clock) : The system uses ship's clock data from ship's clock (JRC-LAN
connected)
Setting of Section 7.2.11.2 "Reception Port Setting (RX Port)" is prior. If you want to set this
i menu, Section 7.2.11.2 "Reception Port Setting (RX Port)" menu set to User Setting .
3 127
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.12 RECEIVE PORT SETTING
3 128
SECTION 4
MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND
BEARING
Cursor: Specifies an arbitrary point, and measures the range and bearing
from the own ship.
Range Rings: Displays concentric circles with own ship's position as the center at
specified intervals, and the rings are used as rough guides for range
measurement.
Electronic Bearing Line Displays a straight line for specifying an arbitrary bearing, and
(EBL1/2): measures the bearing from the own ship.The process unit is
equipped with two electronic bearing lines.
Variable Range Marker Displays a circle for specifying an arbitrary range, and measures the
(VRM1/2): range from the own ship.The process unit is equipped with two
4
variable range markers.
Parallel Index Line (PI): Displays straight lines at even intervals, and the lines are used as
rough guides for complex measurement or ship courses.
EBL Maneuver: Displays the course by steering the own ship, and it is used as a
rough guide for ship maneuvering.
Marker: Stores the latitude and longitude where the own ship was at the
point of storing the markers, and shows an anchor symbol on the
radar display. When the own ship has moved, the system displays
the range and bearing to the position.
EBL/VRM/PI Operation with Operates EBL, VRM, or PI on the radar display by using the cursor.
Cursor (Cursor AUTO):
VRM2 On / Off
Parallel index line
starting point mode
EBL2
numeric value indication Parallel index line Consistent Common
true / relative On / Off Reference Point (CCRP)
4 1
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS
Procedures
1) Move the cursor onto the PPI display by moving the trackball.
When the cursor is moved onto the PPI display, the arrow cursor turns into a cross cursor.
Procedures
1) Left-click the Rings button on upper left area on the display.
Range rings display On / Off Range rings interval
The range ring display switches disappear and appear between display and non-display each
time the Rings button is clicked. The range ring interval is shown in the Rings
button.
The range between the target and own ship can be determined by visually measuring the
target's position that lies between two range rings.
For change of the brilliance of range rings, refer to Section 3.8.5 "Set Radar Display (Display
Setting)".
4 2
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS
The system is equipped with two EBL. The bearing and starting point of an EBL
can be operated separately from the other EBL.
An intersection marker is displayed at the intersection point of the EBL and VRM
of the same number.
: EBL1, VRM1
: EBL2, VRM2
4
EBL2
VRM2
EBL1
VRM1
The bearing value of the current EBL1 or EBL2 on the PPI display is shown in the
upper right of the display.
The currently operable EBL1 or EBL2 is highlighted in the upper right of the display.
The starting point of the currently operating EBL can be switched from the center of the
radar display to any offset position . The offset position of the EBL starting point can be
fixed on the radar display or at the latitude and longitude. (The setting of the navigator is
necessary for fixing the offset position at the latitude and longitude.)
4 3
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS
Procedures
1) Press the [EBL1] or [EBL2] key.
The EBL button (located at the upper right of the display) will be highlighted, and the
selected EBL becomes operable.
Cancel
1) Press the [EBL1] or [EBL2] key again.
The selected EBL display will disappear.
The system provides three types of EBL starting points. Select one of them in
accordance with purpose.
C : The EBL starting point is moved and fixed on the radar display.
D : The EBL starting point is moved and fixed at the latitude and
longitude. (The navigator needs to be connected.)
Procedures
1) Make EBL1 or EBL2 operable.
_ C D _
3) Put the cursor on the EBL starting point is to be moved, and left-
click.
The selected EBL starting point will be determined.
4 4
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS
Procedures
1) Make EBL1 or EBL2 operable.
2) Press the [EBL] dial to set _ for the EBL1 / EBL2 starting point
mode switching located at the upper right of the display.
The selected EBL starting point will be set as the own ship's position.
Determine whether to display EBL in true bearing mode or relative bearing mode.
Procedures
1) Put the cursor on the EBL1/2 numeric value indication true /
relative switching (located at the upper right of the display), and
left-click.
The selected mode is switched as shown below each time the left button is clicked.
T R T
[2] To set a mode for fixing EBL display (EBL Bearing Fix)
When this function is set to Angle , an EBL is fixed to the preset bearing. For
example, if a true bearing of 020 is preset, the EBL is fixed to the true bearing
020 even when the own ship turns.
When the function is set to Screen , the EBL is fixed on the radar display. In this
case, the EBL is always fixed to the same bearing on the display when the own
ship turns.
4 5
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS
Procedures
1) Open the EBL/Cursor Setting menu by performing the following
menu operation.
Main
7. Sub Menu
9. EBL/Cursor Setting
The system is equipped with two VRM. The VRM can be operated separately
from each other.
An intersection marker is displayed at the intersection point of the VRM and EBL
of the same number.
When the starting point of an EBL is offset, the center of the VRM is defined as
the offset EBL starting point.
: EBL1, VRM1
: EBL2, VRM2
4 6
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS
EBL2
VRM2
EBL1
VRM1
VRM Operation
4
The range value of the current VRM1 or VRM2 on the PPI display is shown in the
VRM1/2 range located at the upper right of the display. The currently operable VRM1 or
VRM2 is highlighted in the VRM1 VRM2 button located at the upper right of the
display.
Procedures
1) Press the [VRM1] or [VRM2] key.
The VRM1 and VRM2 buttons (located at the upper right of the display) will be
highlighted, and the selected VRM becomes operable.
Cancel
1) Press the [VRM1] or [VRM2] key again.
The selected EBL display will disappear.
4 7
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS
Procedures
1) Press the [VRM] dial.
Parallel index lines and the PI Menu will appear.
To change the bearing of parallel index lines, turn the [EBL] dial, to change the line interval,
turn the [VRM] dial.
The bearing and interval of parallel index lines are displayed in the PI Menu.
Cancel
1) Press the [VRM] dial again.
The parallel index line display will disappear.
4 8
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS
HL
During the operation of parallel index lines, pressing the [EBL1] or [EBL2] key
disables operation for rotation directions. Pressing the [VRM1] or [VRM2] key
disables operation for parallel index line intervals.
Procedures
1) Left-click the PI button to open the PI menu.
4 9
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS
PI PI
All Individual
PI
PI
Track Equiangular
All :All the parallel lines are operated at the same time.
Individual :The bearing of each line is operated individually.
Track :Equally spaced lateral lines are displayed on both sides.
Equiangular :Two lines intersecting at the center of a circle are displayed.
4 10
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS
[3] Control
Determines whether to operate all the lines at the same time. The setting items are
determined by the setting of Section [2] "Operation Mode".
a. If All is selected
The setting cannot be changed.
b. If Individual is selected
Determine whether to set consecutive lines or individual lines.
Index Line1 to
Sequential
Line8
:Lines are operated sequentially.
[4] Floating
Determines whether to operate parallel index lines following the heading bearing.
4 11
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS
[6] Next
Determines the operation of parallel index line intervals when the range is
changed.
On :The intervals are fixed with the actual range (nm). The
appearance of parallel index line intervals changes
when the range is changed.
Off :The intervals are fixed with the display range. The
parallel index line intervals (nm) change when the
range is changed.
Sets a reference bearing for the numeric data display of parallel index lines. The
setting items are determined by the setting of Section [2] "Operation Mode"
a. If All is selected
b. If Individual is selected
4 12
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS
c. If Track is selected
d. If Equiangular is selected
The setting cannot be changed. 4
[9] Operation Area
If All is selected for Section [2] "Operation Mode", this function sets an area for
displaying parallel index lines.
One Side :Parallel index lines are displayed only on one side.
Both Side :Parallel index lines are displayed on both sides.
Determines whether to turn on / off the parallel index line display of a selected
number.
4 13
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS
Procedures
1) Open the EBL Maneuver Setting menu by performing the
following menu operation.
Main
Reach :Set the range from when the rudder is steered to when
the ship beings to turn.
Turn Mode :Select a turn mode.
For inputs to the value input screen, refer to Section 3.3.4 "Operation on Numeric Value,
Latitude / Longitude and Character Input menu".
4 14
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS
Procedures
1) Left-click the item button of 1. EBL Maneuver while the EBL
Maneuver Setting menu is open.
The EBL maneuver function will be set to on or off.
A auxiliary line for maneuver curve creation, a maneuver curve, and a WOL will appear on
the radar display.
4
2) Put the cursor on the starting point of the auxiliary line, and set
the bearing of the auxiliary line by operating the [EBL] dial.
The bearing of the auxiliary line is the final bearing in which the own ship is to move.
The WOL position varies depending on the bearing of the auxiliary line.
If the WOL is behind the CCRP, the line color of WOL will change.
3) Left-click.
The setting will be determined. However, if the WOL is behind the CCRP position at this
point, left-clicking is rejected, and the setting is not determined.
HL Scheduled route
Auxiliary line
Reach
Radius
4 15
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS
When the cursor mode is set to AUTO (located at the upper right of the
display), EBL, VRM, and PI can be operated simply by using the trackball.
Procedures
1) Put the cursor on EBL1 or EBL2, and left-click.
When the cursor is moved to it, EBL1 or EBL2 is shown at the upper right of the
cursor. The EBL becomes operable when left-clicking.
3) Left-click.
The EBL will be fixed.
Procedures
1) Put the cursor on VRM1 or VRM2, and left-click.
When the cursor is moved to it, VRM1 or VRM2 is shown at the upper right of
the cursor. The VRM becomes operable when left-clicking.
3) Left-click.
The VRM will be fixed.
4 16
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS
Procedures
1) Put the cursor on the intersection marker ( or ), and left-
click.
When the cursor is moved to it, EBL1 VRM1 or EBL2 VRM2 is
shown at the upper right of the cursor. The EBL and VRM become operable when left-
clicking.
Procedures
1) Put the cursor on near the center of line, and left-click.
When the cursor is moved there, it will turn into and PI will be displayed at
the upper right of the cursor. The parallel index lines become operable when left-clicking.
3) Left-click.
The parallel index lines will be fixed.
4 17
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS
Procedures
1) Put the cursor on near the end of line, and left-click.
When the cursor is moved there, it will turn into and PI will be displayed at
the upper right of the cursor. The parallel index lines become operable when left-clicking.
If Individual is selected for Operation Mode, the parallel index lines move.
3) Left-click.
The parallel index lines will be fixed.
If Individual is selected for Operation Mode, the length of parallel index lines can
be changed.
Procedures
1) Put the cursor on the end point of parallel index lines, and left-
click.
When the cursor is moved there, it will turn into and PI will be displayed at
the upper right of the cursor. The parallel index lines become operable when left-clicking.
3) Left-click.
The parallel index lines will be fixed.
4 18
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.2 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING
RADAR antenna transmits pulses of radio waves. The object returns the wave
(radar echo) to the antenna. So on the RADAR screen the leading edge of echo is
the actual target position. The length of echo is dependent on the transmitted pulse
length.
4
Point the cursor to the leading edge of echo to measure the target range or to make
a mark on the target.
RADAR echo
Pulse length
Target range
270 90
4 19
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.2 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING
45.0
Cursor
Target 6.00NM
270 90
180
Procedures
1) Put the cursor on the Cursor bearing numeric value indication
true / relative switching (located at the upper right of the display),
and left-click.
The selected mode is switched as shown below each time left-clicking.
T R T
4 20
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.2 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING
Procedures
1) Press the [EBL1] key.
EBL1 numeric value indication
The EBL1 (located at the upper true / relative switching EBL1 adjustment
right of the display) will be
highlighted, and EBL1 will be
shown with a dotted line on the PPI
display.
4
The EBL1 bearing will be shown in
the EBL1 bearing (located at the
upper right of the display). The EBL1 bearing is the bearing of the target.
45.0
Target
5.00NM
270 90
VRM1
Own ships position
180
4 21
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.2 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING
The EBL2 ( located at the upper right of the display) will be highlighted, and EBL2
will be shown on the PPI display.
2) Press the [EBL] dial to select C for the EBL2 starting point mode
switching located at the upper right of the display.
3) Put the cursor on the point A of the two points between which
measurement is made, and left-click.
Refer to the figure below.
4) Move the EBL2 to the other point B by turning the [EBL] dial.
6.00NM
EBL2
90.0
A B
Cape
270 90
Cape
Own ships position
180
Similarly, EBL1 can also be used for measuring the bearing and range between
two points. In this case, perform the above procedure reading EBL2 as EBL1 and
VRM2 as VRM1.
4 22
SECTION 5
OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING
AND AIS
5.1 PREPARATION
Attention
There are the following limitations on use of the target acquisition and target
tracking functions.
[I] Resolution between adjacent targets and swapping during automatic target
tracking
Depending on the particular distance and echo size, resolution between adjacent
targets during automatic target tracking usually ranges somewhere between 0.03 to
0.05 NM. If multiple targets approach each other, resolution will become about 0.05 NM
and this may cause the system to regard them as one target and thus to swap them or
lose part of them. Such swapping or less of targets may also occur if the picture of the
target being tracked is affected by rain/snow clutter returns or sea clutter returns or
moves very close to land.
[II] Intensity of echoes and the target tracking function 5
The intensity of echoes and the tracking function have a correlationship, and thus the
target will be lost if no echoes are detected during six scans in succession. If a lost
target exists, therefore, radar gain must be increased to support detection of the target.
If, however, radar gain is increased too significantly, sea clutter returns or other noise
may be erroneously detected and tracked as a target, and resultingly, a false alarm
may be issued.
[III]Adverse effects of error sources on automatic tracking
To execute accurate tracking, it becomes necessary first to appropriately
adjust the [GAIN], [SEA] and [RAIN] dials of the radar so that the target
to be acquired and tracked id clearly displayed on the radar display.
Inappropriate settings of these adjustments reduce the reliability/
accuracy of automatic tracking.
This section explains the features of the target tracking and AIS functions, and the
initial setting for using each function.
The target tracking function calculates the course and speed of a target by
automatically tracking the target's move.
The target tracking function enables the automatic acquisition of targets by using
the automatic acquisition zone function.
The target tracking function also enables the simulation of the ship maneuvering
method to avoid collisions by using the trial maneuver function.
5 1
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.1 PREPARATION
If the mode is ground stabilization, SOG/COG used for own ship's information in
target tracking. If the mode is sea stabilization, SPD (speed through the water) /
HDG (heading) used for own ship's information in target tracking.
The AIS function shows the targets information on the radar display, using
other ship's information sent out from the AIS unit.
The navigation pattern of all mobile craft constitutes a system with some closed
loops regardless of the media through which the mobile craft travels, whether air,
water, the boundary between air and water, or space. This pattern consists of two
closed loops in principle, one of which is a collision with another mobile craft and
the other is a loop of finding a right and safe way to reach a predeterminate
destination. Fig. 5-1 shows the conceptual diagram of navigation pattern by MR.
E.W. Anderson. The closed loop of collision avoidance is shown on the left side
and the closed loop of finding a right course on the right side.
Insrument or
Judgement Mancuver
judgement
Control
loop
5 2
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.1 PREPARATION
5
not to occupy the same point at the same time.
TCPATime to CPA
Target vessel
CPA
Collision Triangle
Relative Vector
Own Ship
5 3
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.1 PREPARATION
Both rough CPA and TCPA can be obtained easily from the relative speed vector
of other ship. This method has an advantage that the risks of collision with all
other ships within the radar range can be seen at a glance. On the other hand, the
course and speed of other ship can easily be obtained from its true speed vector,
enabling other ships aspect to be seen at a glance. Thus, the aspects of other
ships (transverse, outsail, parallel run, reverse run, etc. ) as described in the act of
prevention of collision at sea can be readily grasped. If there is a risk of collision
with other ship, the operator can determine which rule to be applied and how to
operate own ship.
N
VR
Relative vector
CPA
A plotter is used to further enhance the radar functionality. The plotter is capable
of plotting other positions of other ships in 3 to 6 minute intervals to monitor their
movement. The plots of other ships represent their tracks relative to own ship, and
it is shown whether there is a risk of collision, namely CPA and TCPA can be
obtained. This method using a plotter is fairly effective, but the number of target
ship, which is manually plotted, is limited and it takes several minutes to measure
those.
5 4
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.1 PREPARATION
Tracked target
12
Numeric
The alarm message (CPA/TCPA) turns red and
blinks.The symbol turns red and enlarges.
5 5
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.1 PREPARATION
AIS12
Numeric displayed When the numeric data is displayed, the target
target symbol is enclosed in a square.
AIS12
NOTE: For details about AIS-SART, refer to Section 6.6 "DISPLAY OF AIS-
SART".
5 6
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.1 PREPARATION
If the number of targets at the same priority level exceeds the allowable
maximum, they are displayed in the following priority order:
1. Association target
2. Activated AIS target
3. Sleeping AIS target 5
The vector of an AIS target is to be displayed with a vector over ground or over
water, depending on the speed sensor setting and current offset setting. The type
of the currently displayed vector can be confirmed by viewing the setting of the
stable mode.
When the vector of an AIS target is displayed with a vector over water, the system
has converted the AIS target's vector over ground to the vector over water
according to the data received from the AIS and the own ship's information.
When the AIS target's symbol is activated but the vector is not
NOTE: displayed, the following are probable causes of the trouble:
5 7
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.1 PREPARATION
Association target
Association target
Procedures
1) Left-click the button in the Target Information located at the
upper right of the display.
The tracking target symbol display will be set to on or off.
Procedures
1) Left-click the button in the Target Information located at the
upper right of the display.
The AIS target symbol display will be set to on or off.
5 8
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.1 PREPARATION
To switch between the true vector mode and relative vector mode, press the [T/R
VECT] key.
In the true vector mode, the direction of a target vector indicates the true course of
the target and its vector length is proportional to its speed.
In this mode, the movements of other ships around own ship can be accurately and
easily monitored. 5
However, CPA Ring cannot appear in this mode.
True vector
The relative vector does not represent the true motion of the target, but its relative
relation with own ship. This means that a target with its relative vector directed to
own ship (passing through the CPA Limit ring) will be a dangerous target. In the
Relative Vector mode, it can be seen at a glance where the CPA Limit of the
dangerous target is.
5 9
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.1 PREPARATION
Therefore, the True / Relative mode shall optionally be used for the purpose of
observation: the True vector mode for grasping the true aspect of a target, and the
Relative vector mode for grasping a targets closest point of approach (CPA).
HL
CPA ring
Relative vector
The diagram below illustrates a vector length of a target for 6 minutes, and the tip
of the vector represents the target's position expected to reach 6 minutes later.
HL
5 10
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.1 PREPARATION
The types of cursor modes are listed in the table below. To use the function of a
cursor mode, move the cursor onto the PPI object and left-click.
Mode Function
TGT Data Displays the numeric data of a tracking target or AIS target.
CNCL TT
DEACT AIS
Cancels a tracking target.
Property Displays the information of tracked targets, AIS targets, and marks.
5 11
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.1 PREPARATION
As shown below, the AUTO mode performs operation in accordance with the
object at the cursor position when left-clicked.
The AUTO mode permits to access that you want by intuitive operation.
5 12
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.1 PREPARATION
Procedures
1) Left-click the CPA Ring button located at the lower right of the
display.
The CPA ring will be displayed.
The CPA ring is not displayed when the true vector mode is
NOTE: selected.
5 13
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.1 PREPARATION
For the setting procedure, refer to Section 7.1.9 "Setting of CCRP (CCRP
Setting)".
Attention
5 14
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION
The target tracking function automatically tracks a target, and displays the target's
course and speed as vectors. The target tracking function calculates CPA and
TCPA, and issues an alarm as needed.
The tracking data is erased from memory when the power is turned off or during
transmission standby.
[1] Turning On / Off the automatic acquisition and AIS activation (AZ Menu)
Procedures
1) Open the AZ menu by following menu operations.
AZ
5 15
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION
[2] Creating the automatic acquisition and AIS activation Zone (Make AZ)
Procedures
1) Open the AZ menu by following menu operations.
AZ
3. Make AZ 1 4. Make AZ 2
2) Left-click the item button of or .
The range setting of the acquisition / activation zone 1 (AZ1) or acquisition / activation zone
2 (AZ2) will be started.
3) Set the starting azimuth and range by turning the [EBL] dial and
[VRM] dial, and left-click.
4) Set the ending azimuth and range by turning the [EBL] dial and
[VRM] dial, and left-click.
The acquisition / activation zone will be determined.
Procedures
1) Move the cursor onto the target to be acquired, and press the
[ACQ MANUAL] key.
The target will be acquired and the initial acquisition symbol will be displayed.
To perform operation only in the manual acquisition mode without automatic acquisition/
activation, turn off the automatic acquisition/activation function.
5 16
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION
Use the manual acquisition mode while the automatic acquisition mode is on.
Manually acquire the target to which particular attention should be paid, and get
the other targets automatically acquired. If a new target appears exceeding the
maximum number of targets, the manually acquired target is displayed even in the
background until it gets out of the display. However, automatically acquired
targets are canceled starting far distance from own ship.
5
The number of vectors on the radar display needs to be reduced for easy
observation.
When targets are to be re-acquired from the beginning, all the current vectors can
also be canceled.
When all the targets have been canceled, the system stops
NOTE: tracking them. Thus, you need to re-acquire targets in manual
or automatic acquisition mode. Do not cancel all the targets
unless otherwise required.
5 17
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION
The target for which its numeric data is displayed is marked with a symbol 12
If a target with the mark 12 is designated, only its true bearing and range will appear until
its vector appears.
5 18
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION
Procedures
1) Open the TT Menu by following menu operation.
TT
If there are many tracking targets and their symbol display is confusing, set Target Number
Display to off to view the radar display easily.
5 19
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION
Procedures
1) Put the cursor on the tracked target, and right-click.
The cursor mode list will appear.
2) Left-click 8. Property
5 20
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION
The system can display the own ship's speed. To do so, it sets a reference target by
tracking a target for which ground fixed.
Attention
Procedures
1) Tracking a target for which ground fixed.
5 21
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION
3) Left-click 8. Property
The speed of own ship calculated from the reference target will be displayed.
The following functions are available for testing the target tracking function:
Gate Display Displays the gate size for acquiring / tracking a target.
5 22
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION
Procedures
1) Open the TT test menu by following menu operation.
TT
9. TT Test Menu
Cancel
1) Left-click the item button of 1. Test Video while the TT Test Menu is
displayed.
The setting items for Test Video will be displayed.
5 23
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION
Procedures
1) Press the [TX/STBY] key to stop the transmitting.
The equipment will enter the transmission standby state.
TT
9. TT Test Menu
5 24
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION
Exit
1) Press the [TX/STBY] key to stop the transmitting.
The equipment will enter the transmission standby state.
3) Left-click Off .
The TT Simulator display will be turned off.
5
5.2.7.3 Status display (Status)
The current Target Tracking status will appear.
Procedures
1) Open the TT Test Menu by performing the following menu
operation.
TT
9. TT Test Menu
5 25
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION
Procedures
1) Open the TT Test Menu by performing the following menu
operation.
TT
9. TT Test Menu
On : Gate is displayed
5 26
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.3 AIS OPERATION
5.3.1 Restrictions
The following restrictions are placed on use of the AIS function.
LOG or 2AXW cannot be selected for the speed sensor in the following case:
The AIS function is turned on and the current offset (Set/Drift Setting) is
selected. 5
MAN cannot be selected for the speed sensor in the following case:
The AIS function is On.
Procedures
1) Press the [AIS/TT] key. Alternatively, left-click the AIS button
in the Target Information located at the upper right of the display.
The received AIS information will be shown on the radar display.
5 27
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.3 AIS OPERATION
Procedures
1) Put the cursor on the AIS symbol to be activated, and right-click.
The setting items for cursor modes will be displayed.
When the automatic activation function is used, AIS targets are automatically activated when
they go into the automatic activation zone. The automatic activation zone is identical to the
automatic acquisition zone (AZ) used for target tracking. For the zone setting, refer to
Section 5.2.1 "Acquiring Target [ACQ]"
The position of the scanner shall be at the centre of the azimuth or range in the acquisition/
activation zone.
If there are more AIS targets than the allowable maximum, they are deactivated in the low-
priority (See the Section 5.1.2 "Definitions of Symbols").
Procedures
1) Put the cursor on the AIS target to be deactivated, and right-click.
The setting items for cursor modes will be displayed.
5 28
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.3 AIS OPERATION
The detail mode displays the numeric data of only a single ship, the simple mode can display
the numeric data of up to two ships.
For NAV Status, one of the following statuses is displayed in accordance with
Navigation Status:
No. Status
0 Under Way Using Engine
1 at Anchor
2 Not Under Command
3 Restricted Manoeuvrability
4 Constrained by Her Draft
5 Moored
6 Aground
7 Engaged in Fishing
8 Under Way Sailing
5 29
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.3 AIS OPERATION
9 Reserved
10 Reserved
11-14 Reserved
15 Not Defined
display.
5.3.5.4 Selecting Detail / Simple Mode for AIS Target Information Display
Procedures
1) Left-click the or button in the Digital Information located
at the center right of the display.
The detail or simple mode display for AIS target information will be selected.
5.3.5.5 Message
Received AIS messages can be displayed.
If the number of messages exceeds 10, the oldest received messages are sequentially deleted.
5 30
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.3 AIS OPERATION
Procedures
1) Open the Message menu by performing the following menu
operation.
AIS
9. TT Test Menu
5
The message will appear.
Procedures
1) Display AIS target information.
If there are messages from the target, a message mark will be displayed in the Digital
Information located at the center right of the display.
Procedures
1) Left-click 1. Delete while the message is displayed.
The Confirmation Window will appear.
5 31
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.3 AIS OPERATION
5.3.5.6 Displaying Data of Lost AIS Target (Display Lost TGT Data)
The data of the last-lost AIS target can be displayed.
The data of only one target that has been lost most recently can be displayed.
Procedures
1) Open the Display Lost Target Data menu by performing the
following menu operation.
AIS
5.3.5.7 Displaying Own Ship's AIS Data (Own Ship's AIS Data)
The AIS data of own ship can be displayed.
Procedures
1) Open the Own Ship's AIS Data menu by performing the following
menu operation.
AIS
Procedures
1) Open the Target Number Display menu by performing the
following menu operation.
5 32
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.3 AIS OPERATION
AIS
If there are many tracking targets and their symbol display is confusing, set Target Number
Display to off to view the radar display easily.
5
5.3.7 Setting AIS Filter (AIS Filter Setting)
5 33
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.3 AIS OPERATION
Procedures
1) Left-click the AIS filter mode switching in Target Information
located at the upper right of the display, and select the filter to be
set.
The AIS filter will be selected.
AIS
3) Set a starting bearing and range by turning the [EBL] dial and
[VRM] dial, and left-click.
5 34
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.3 AIS OPERATION
4) Set an ending bearing and range by turning the [EBL] dial and
[VRM] dial, and left-click.
AIS
AIS
Priority : Displays AIS targets in the AIS filter by priority, and also
displays targets outside the AIS filter.
5 35
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.3 AIS OPERATION
Procedures
1) Put the cursor on the position where a point filter is to be set,
and right-click to select the filter to be set.
2) The setting items for cursor modes will be displayed.Left-click 2. ACT AIS .
A point filter will be set at the cursor position.
If an AIS target is in the point filter, it will be activated.
When an AIS target is activated or an AIS target is not found within one minute, the point
filter will be cleared.
When the data of an AIS target cannot be received for a specified time, the target
is decided to be lost and the target data is deleted. As shown in the table below,
the time until target data is deleted varies depending on the class of receive data
and the target status.
When a dangerous target ship is lost, a lost alarm is issued and the symbol
i changes to a lost symbol. The lost symbol will display continuously on the
last-received position.
5 36
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.3 AIS OPERATION
AIS
5
set.
AIS
5 37
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.4 DECISION OF TARGETS AS IDENTICAL
(Association)
Attention
Procedures
1) Left-click the Association in Target Information located at the upper
right of the display.
Association will be set to on or off.
AIS
1. Association Setting
5 38
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.4 DECISION OF TARGETS AS IDENTICAL
(Association)
Once regard as identical, when one of the differences exceed 125% of the set condition, they
are regarded as dissidence.
5
4. Range 0 999m
5. Cource 0 99
6. Speed 0 99kn
7.Applicable AIS Target ACT or ACT&Sleep (activated AIS target or
all AIS target)
5 39
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.5 ALARM DISPLAY
Critical alarm messages for Target Tracking (TT) and AIS functions:
Error message and alarm are displayed in the lower right of the display.
5 40
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.5 ALARM DISPLAY
In the system, targets are categorized into two types: tracked / activate AIS targets
and dangerous targets.
5
The grade of danger can easily be recognized on the display at a glance. So the
officer can easily decide which target he should pay attention to.
It is not possible to switch off the tracked target visual alarm, unless tracking is
ceased, or the alarm condition no longer applies.
12 0>TCPA
AIS12
Red blinking
5 41
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.5 ALARM DISPLAY
The automatic acquisition function sets a zone in a range and issues an alarm
when a new target (which is not yet acquired) goes into this zone.
For the setting of an automatic acquisition zone, refer to " Acquiring Target " in
Section 5.2.1.1 "Automatic acquisition".
5 42
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.5 ALARM DISPLAY
When it is impossible to continue tracking any acquired and tracked target, or the
data of AIS target cannot received for a specified time, the Lost Alarm
will be generated. The typical causes for alarm generation are shown below, but
not limited to the following:
Red Blinking
12
(pee)
Alarm
acknowledge
once when a lost
target symbol
displayed.
is 5
able
AIS12
Red Blinking
Set Gyro Beep sound (pipi-pipi) The signals from the gyro are stopped, but the
gyro is recovered.
5 43
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.6 TRACK FUNCTION
The specified interval is displayed in the past position display interval switching
in Target Information located at the upper right of the display. When Off is
displayed, the track display function is turned off.
The track mode operates in conjunction with the vector mode, and a true or
relative track is displayed. In relative vector mode, the relative tracks of the target
are displayed. In true vector mode, true tracks that are calculated from the relative
bearing, range, own ship's course, and speed are displayed.
The target is acquisition, past position of traced target is start plot. The AIS target
is displayed, past position of AIS target is start plot.
If the past position plotted time is short, the indicated past position duration may
not have achieved the specified time or range.
5 44
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.6 TRACK FUNCTION
The target track function is available between latitudes of 85N and 85S.
2) Left-click Property .
The Property will appear.
Individual colors can be set for up to 10 ships. The same color is set for 11 to 20 ships.
TT
Note that when this function is turned off, all the other ship's
i track functions are turned off. In this case, the track data of
other ships is not saved, so they cannot be traced later.
5 45
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.6 TRACK FUNCTION
Procedures
1) Open the Target Track Color menu by performing the following
menu operation.
TT
1. All
Individual setting
When Individual is selected, the track numbers Target Track No.1 to No.10 and
the individual setting for Other are valid. Select a color for each target.
The color list is displayed by left-clicking the button corresponding to the item
number to be set. Select a desired color. There are 8 color choices: Off ,
White , Gray , Blue , Green , Yellow , Pink , and Red .
5 46
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.6 TRACK FUNCTION
Procedures
1) Open the Target Track Display menu by performing the following
menu operation.
TT
1. All
Even when Target Track Display is turned off, the track data of
i other ships is saved if Track Memory Interval is set.
Individual setting
When Individual is selected, the track numbers Target Track No.1 to No.10 and
the individual setting for Other are valid. Select on / off for each target.
5 47
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.6 TRACK FUNCTION
5.6.2.5 Setting of Target Ship's Track Saving Interval (Track Memory Interval)
An interval for saving target ship's track data can be set.
This function is not available when the Target Track Function is
i turned off.
Procedures
1) Open the Track Memory Interval menu by performing the
following menu operation.
TT
Off/
3sec/5sec/10sec/30sec/
1min/3min/5min/10min/30min/60min/
1NM/3NM/5NM/10NM
Procedures
1) Open the Clear Track Color menu by performing the following
menu operation.
TT
5 48
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.6 TRACK FUNCTION
Procedures
1) Open the T.TRK menu by performing the following menu
operation.
TT
5 49
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.6 TRACK FUNCTION
Procedures
1) Insert a flash memory card into the card slot
Flash memory card (option) is necessary.
TT
7. File Operations
3) Left-click the item button of 1. Select Card Slot to select a card slot.
The setting item for Select Card Slot is switched between Slot1 and Slot2.
The setting item for Load Mode is switched between Add and
Overwrite .
When Add is selected, new data is added to the current data on the
card. When Overwrite is selected, new data is saved over the current data
on the card.
5) Left-click 3. Load .
Currently saved target ship's track data will be listed.
5 50
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.6 TRACK FUNCTION
Procedures
1) Insert a flash memory card into the card slot.
Flash memory card (option) is necessary.
TT
7. File Operations
4) Left-click 4. Save .
The Input File Name menu will appear.
For inputs to the characters input screen, refer to Section 3.3.4.7 "Entering a character". After
the input, the Confirmation Window will appear.
5 51
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.6 TRACK FUNCTION
Procedures
1) Insert the flash memory card into the card slot.
Flash memory card (option) is necessary.
TT
7. File Operations
4) Left-click 5. Erase .
The Erase menu will appear.
Currently saved target ship's track data on the card will be listed.
5 52
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.6 TRACK FUNCTION
Procedures
1) Insert the flash memory card into the card slot.
Flash memory card (option) is necessary.
TT
7. File Operations
Currently saved target ship's track data on the card will be listed.
Cancel
1) Open the Card T.TRK Display window.
The displayed file is highlighted.
5 53
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.7 TRIAL MANEUVERING (Trial Maneuver)
Attention
The trial maneuvering is the function of simulating own ships course and speed
for collision avoidance when a dangerous target appears. When the own ship's
course and speed are entered in manual mode, the trial maneuvering function
checks if pre-acquired or pre-activated targets are dangerous.
5 54
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.7 TRIAL MANEUVERING (Trial Maneuver)
In this Fig 5-7, the dangerous target forward left becomes safe as a result of
simulation.
The tracked target information indicates the current CPA and TCPA values
regardless of the result of simulation.
NORMAL
HL
5
Own ships vector
Dangerous target
TRIAL
HL
Route
Change of symbol
as a result of
T trial maneuver
5 55
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.7 TRIAL MANEUVERING (Trial Maneuver)
NORMAL
HL
Dangerous target
CPA Ring
TRIAL
HL
Change of symbol
as a result of
trial maneuver
T
CPA Ring
The above Fig 5-8 shows that the relative vector of the target has changed as
shown in the figure as a result of simulation (course and speed), so that the
symbol color is changed into White, a safe target.
Irrespective of the simulation results, the current CPA and TCPA values are shown
in the tracked target information just like when the true vector mode is active.
5 56
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.7 TRIAL MANEUVERING (Trial Maneuver)
TT
3. Trial Maneuver
When the Trial Function is active, the character " T " will display at the bottom of the radar
display.
3) Set values for Course by turning the [EBL] dial, and for Speed by
turning the [VRM] dial.
5
4) Set other characteristics.
For inputs to the value input screen, refer to Section 3.3.4.2 "Directly entering a numeric
value".
Dangerous target symbols are displayed in red and safe target symbols in white.
Vector Time is valid only when Trial Function is set to on. If it is off, the vector time
i before trial maneuvering is displayed.
Time until the start of trial maneuvering is counted down immediately after the input.
The acceleration and deceleration are influenced depending on the relationship
between the current speed and the input speed for trial maneuvering.
If 0.0 kn/min is set for Acceleration when the speed for trial maneuvering is faster
than the current speed, or for Deceleration when the speed for trial maneuvering is
slower than the current speed, the system performs simulation on the assumption
that the speed is changed immediately after the time set for Time to Maneuver .
5 57
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.7 TRIAL MANEUVERING (Trial Maneuver)
Cancel
1) Open the Trial Maneuver menu by performing the following
menu operation.
TT
3. Trial Maneuver
5 58
SECTION 6
TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY
The radar operator has a role of interpreting the radar displays to provide his best
aid in maneuvering the ship. For this purpose, the operator has to observe the
radar displays after fully understanding the advantages and disadvantages that the
radar has. For better interpretation of radar display, it is important to gain more
experiences by operating the radar equipment in fair weathers and comparing the
target ships watched with the naked eyes and their echoes on the radar display.
The radar is mainly used to monitor the courses of own ship and other ships in
open seas, to check buoys and other nautical marks when entering a port, to
measure own ships position in the coastal waters relative to the bearings and
ranges of the shore or islands using a chart, and to monitor the position and
movement of a heavy rain if it appears on the radar display.
Radar beam radiation has the nature of propagating nearly along the curved
surface of the earth. The propagation varies with the property of the air layer
through which the radar beam propagates. In the normal propagation, the distance
(D) of the radar wave to the horizon is approximately 10% longer than the
distance to the optical horizon. The distance (D) is given by the following
6
formula:
D = 2.23 ( h 1 + h 2 ) [NM]
Fig 6-2 is a diagram for determining the maximum detection range of a target that
is limited by the curve of the earth surface in the normal propagation.
Earth
h2
h1 Radar Targets
6 1
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.1 RADAR WAVE WITH THE HORIZON
D[NM]
Height of Target
Height of RADAR Scanner Detective Range
6 2
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.2 STRENGTH OF REFLECTION FROM THE
TARGET
The signal intensity reflected from a target depends not only on the height and size
of the target but also on its material and shape. The echo intensity from a higher
and larger target is not always higher in general.
In particular, the echo from a coast line is affected by the geographic conditions of
the coast. If the coast has a very gentle slop, the echo from a mountain of the
inland appears on the radar display.(Fig 6-3) Therefore, the distance to the coast
line should be measured carefully.
Mountain displayed
on the radar display HL
Table 6-1 shows the graph indicating the relation between the target detection
distance and the radar reflection cross-sectional area (RCS) with regard to the type
and the height of the target in a situation in which the weather is good, the sea
state is calm and the radio wave propagation is normal. As revealed by this table,
even on the same sea shore line, detection distance greatly differs depending on
the height of the target from the surface of the sea. Furthermore, because the
target detection distance is greatly influenced by the shape and material of the
target and environmental conditions, such as the sea state, weather, and radio
wave propagation, caution should be taken when detecting distance of target.
6 3
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.2 STRENGTH OF REFLECTION FROM THE
TARGET
Table 6-1 Relation between type and height of target and detection distance and RCS
Type of target Height from Detection distance RCS [ m 2 ]
sea surface (NM)
(m)
X band S band X band S band
6 4
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.3 SEA CLUTTER AND RAIN AND SNOW
CLUTTER
In addition to the echo required for observing ships and land, radar video image
also includes unnecessary echo, such as reflection from waves on the sea surface
and reflection from rain and snow. Reflection from the sea surface is called "sea
clutter," and reflection from rain and snow is called "rain and snow clutter," and
those spurious waves must be eliminated by the clutter rejection function.
a. Sea clutter
Sea clutter appears as an image radiating outwardly from the center of the radar
display and changing depending on the size and the shape of waves. Generally, as
waves become larger, image level of the sea clutter is intensified and the clutter
far away is also displayed. When waves are large and the sea clutter level is high,
it is difficult to distinguish sea clutter from a small boat whose reflection intensity
is weak. Accordingly, it is necessary to properly adjust the sea clutter rejection
function. Table 6-2 shows the relation between the sea state (SS) showing the size
of waves generated by wind and the radar's detection probability.
6
Table 6-2 Sea state and probability of target detection
S band radar (probability to detect a target at a distance of 0.4 NM)
1 m2 V V V V-M
5 m2 V V-M M-NV
10 m2 V V V V-M
6 5
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.3 SEA CLUTTER AND RAIN AND SNOW
CLUTTER
As shown in Table 6-2, the number of SS increases as the wind speed becomes
high and the waves become large. Table 6.2 reveals that detection probability
decreases from V (80 %) to NV (less than 50 %) as the number of SS increases.
Therefore, even if the sea state is calm and a target clearly appears on the radar
display, when the sea state becomes rough, target detection probability decreases
resulting in difficulty of target detection by the radar.
Table 6-3 Relation between Douglas sea state and average wind speed and significant
wave height
Sea state Average wind Significant wave
speed (kn) height (m)i
0 <4 <0,2
1 5-7 0,6
2 7-11 0,9
3 12-16 1,2
4 17-19 2,0
5 20-25 3,0
6 26-33 4,0
For example, in the case of a standard marine buoy, RCS of X band radar is 5 m2
as shown in Table 6-1. When observing such a target in the sea state (SS3) in
which significant wave height exceeds 1.2 meters, detection probability is M-NV,
as shown in Table 6-2, which indicates 50 % or less.
6 6
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.3 SEA CLUTTER AND RAIN AND SNOW
CLUTTER
16
Precipitation
16mm/hr of 16 mm/hr Pulse
width 0.05us
0.05us
14 4mm/hr
Precipitation of 4 mm /hr Pulse
0.05us
width 0.05us
Precipitation
16mm/hr of 16 mm/hr Pulse
width 0.8us
0.8us
Precipitation of 4 mm /hr Pulse width 0.8us
4mm/hr 0.8us
Detection distance while it is raining [NM]
12
10
8
6
(NM)
4
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
16
6
Precipitation
16mm/hrof16 mm /hr Pulse
width0.0.05us
05us
14 4mm/hrof
Precipitation 4 mm /hr Pulse
0.05us
width 0. 05us
Precipitation
16mm/hrof16 mm /hr Pulse
width0.0.8us
8us
12
10
8
6
(NM)
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
6 7
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.3 SEA CLUTTER AND RAIN AND SNOW
CLUTTER
However, these functions may make some targets invisible, particularly targets
with higher speeds.
6 8
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.4 FALSE ECHOES
The radar observer may be embarrassed with some echoes that do not exist
actually. These false echoes appear by the following causes that are well known:
a. Shadow
When the radar scanner is installed near a funnel or mast, the echo of a target that
exists in the direction of the funnel or mast cannot appear on the radar display
because the radar beam is reflected on the funnel or mast. Whether there are some
false echoes due to shadows can be checked monitoring the sea clutter returns, in
which there may be a part of weak or no returns.
Such shadows appear always in the same directions, which the operator should
have in mind in radar operation.
6
b. Side Lobe Effect
A broken-line circular arc may appear at the same range as the main lobe of the
radar beam on the radar display. This type of false echo can easily be
discriminated when a target echo appears isolated. (see Fig 6-6)
HL
6 9
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.4 FALSE ECHOES
One of those echoes is the direct echo return from the target and the other is the
secondary reflection return from a mast or funnel that stands in the same direction
as shown in Fig 6-7.
Direct microwave
HL
Actual target
Radar
scanner
Secondary reflection
Funnel of microwave
False echo from funnel
6 10
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.4 FALSE ECHOES
For instance, assuming that the pulse length is MP3 (on the repetition frequency
of 1400 Hz), the first pulse is reflected from a target at about 58 NM or more and
received during the next pulse repetition time. In this case, a false echo (second
time echo) appears at a position that is about 58 NM shorter than the actual
distance. If the false echo appears at 5 NM on the radar display, the true distance
of the target is 5+58=63 NM. On the pulse length is SP1 (on the repetition
frequency of 2250 Hz), a false echo may appear at a position that is about 36 NM
shorter than the actual distance.
This type of false echo can be discriminated by changing over the range scale (the
repetition frequency), because the distance of the target changes accordingly.
If second time echo is appeared, the use of Economy mode in PRF menu is
effective. Otherwise, Stagger Trigger menu set to on. (See Section 3.8.3 "Set
Scanner Unit (TXRX Setting)").
f. Radar Interference
When another radar equipment using the same frequency band as that on own ship
is near own ship, a radar interference pattern may appear on the radar display.
This interference pattern consists of a number of spots which appear in various
forms. In many cases, these spots do not always appear at the same places, so that
they can be discriminated from the target echoes. (See Fig 6-9)
HL HL
6
If radar equipment causing an interference pattern and this radar are of the same
model, their transmitting repetition frequency is nearly the same. As a result,
interference patterns may be displayed concentrically.
In this case, the interference patterns cannot be eliminated by using only the
interference reflector function, so ine-tune the transmitting repetition
frequency.(See Section 3.8.3 "Set Scanner Unit (TXRX Setting)")
6 11
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.5 DISPLAY OF RADAR TRANSPONDER (SART)
The SART (Search and rescue Radar Transponder) is a survival device authorized
by the GMDSS (Global Maritime Distress and Safety System), which is used for
locating survivors in case that a distress accident occurs at sea. The SART is
designed to operate in the 9 GHz frequency band.
When receiving the 9 GHz radar signal (interrogating signal) transmitted from the
radar equipment on a rescue ship or search aircraft, the SART transmit a series of
response signals to inform the distress position to the rescue and search party.
This radar provides a shortcut item to make settings for SART
i signal reception. Execution of this item automatically switches
to the setting for SART reception.It also functions for detect the
beacon or target enhancer.
Procedures
1) Press [RANGE +] or [RANGE -] key to set the radar range to 6 NM
or 12 NM.
3. RADAR Menu
1. Process Setting
9. SART
On SART ON
With the SART display mode set to ON, settings as shown below are made automatically.
6 12
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.5 DISPLAY OF RADAR TRANSPONDER (SART)
[Example of Display
Land
SART code
Other Ships
Position of
SART
Attention
6
When the SART function is set to ON, small targets around own
ship will disappear from the radar display. So it is necessary to
exercise full surveillance over the conditions around own ship by
visual watch in order to avoid any collision or stranding.
If two or more sets of radar equipment are installed on own ship,
use one set of 9 GHz band radar for detection of the SART signal
and operate others as normal radars for avoiding collision,
monitoring targets around own ship, and checking on own ship
s position and avoidance of stranding.
After end of detecting the START signal, turn the START display
off. Then the radar returns normally to the nautical mode.
6 13
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.6 DISPLAY OF AIS-SART
6.6.1 Display
When receiving AIS-SART signal, AIS-SART symbol is displayed on the
RADAR screen.
Land Area
AIS-SART
Symbol
Other
Ship
For details of AIS-SART Symbol, refer to Section 5.1.2.2 "Types and Definitions
of AIS Target Symbols".
6 14
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.6 DISPLAY OF AIS-SART
When the sleeping AIS-SART symbol is clicked once, the symbol changes into
activated AIS-SART symbol. And then activated AIS-SART symbol is clicked
once more, the symbol changes into numeric displayed AIS-SART symbol and
their information is displayed.
6 15
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.6 DISPLAY OF AIS-SART
6 16
SECTION 7
SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION
7 1
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION
Before power-on operation can be performed, the switches S1, S2, S5, S6, S7 and
jumper TB105 on the gyro interface circuit (PC4201) must be set in accordance
with the type of your gyro compass by performing the procedure below.
The switches are factory-set for a gyration ratio of 180X and the step motor type.
Make sure of the type of the gyro compass installed on the own ship before
starting the procedure below.
Procedures
1) Set S5 to "OFF".
The gyro compass and GYRO I/F are cut off.
The items to be set are listed below. For the settings, refer to Table 7-1Gyro and Log
Select Switches (S1 DIP Switch).
7 2
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION
The items to be set are listed below. For the setting, refer to Table 7-2Gyro and Log Select
Switches (S2 DIP Switch).
ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
7) Connect the gyro signal and log signal cables to the terminal
block.
7
8) Set S5 to "ON".
The gyro compass and GYRO I/F are connected.
9) After power-on operation, make sure of the radar video and the
operation with the true bearing value.
See the Section 7.1.7 "Setting of True Bearing Value".
7 3
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION
Table 7-1 Gyro and Log Select Switches (S1 DIP Switch)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
STEP ON
SYNC OFF
360X OFF OFF
GYRO SIG
180X ON OFF
90X OFF ON
36X ON ON
DIRECTION REV ON
NOR OFF
TYPE SYNC ON
PULSE OFF
PULSE/ Don't care OFF
LOG SIG
NM
100P 30X ON ON
200P 90X OFF ON
400P 180X ON OFF
800P 360X OFF OFF
Table 7-2 Gyro and Log Select Switches (S2 DIP Switch)
S2 SETTING TABLE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
LOG ALARM ON
OFF
GYRO SIMULATOR ON
OFF
LOG SIMULATOR ON
OFF
OTHER SETTING
7 4
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION
7.1.3 Tuning
Adjust the tuning control for the transmitter and receiver.
The turning control should be adjusted when the system is installed or when the
magnetron is replaced.
1. Tune Adjustment
4) Adjust the tune adjustment value so that the tune indicator bar at
the upper left of the display is maximized.
For inputs to the value input screen, refer to Section 3.3.4.3 "Increasing or decreasing a
numeric value".
4. TXRX Adjustment
7 5
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION
When tune indicator and echo peak are mismatch, adjust this menu.
Procedures
1) Adjust tuning by referring to Section 7.1.3.1 "Tune Adjustment"
4. TXRX Adjustment
7 6
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION
Procedures
1) Select H Up for the bearing presentation. Set video processing
(PROC) to PROC Off .
2. Bearing Adjustment
For inputs to the value input screen, refer to Section 3.3.4.3 "Increasing or decreasing a
numeric value".
Procedures
1) Search the radar display for a target of which range is already
known.
7 7
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION
3. Range Adjustment
For inputs to the value input screen, refer to Section 3.3.4.3 "Increasing or decreasing a
numeric value".
Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.
9. Next
3. Device Installation
7 8
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION
Procedures
1) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the true
bearing value setting menu.
Main
1. Gyro Setting
7
Set the height of radar antenna above sea level. Do not change this setting
carelessly.
Procedures
1) Measure the height of radar antenna above sea level in advance.
4. TXRX Adjustment
1. Antenna Height
7 9
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION
CCRP Up to four locations can be input. (One location selected when used)
Radar antenna: Up to eight radar antennas can be input. (Automatically selected in
response to ISW operation)
GPS Up to four locations can be input. (One location selected when used)
Procedures
1) Measure the CCRP location, radar antenna location, and GPS
antenna location in advance.
4. CCRP Setting
4) Specify the ship length for Length at the upper right of the CCRP
Setting Menu, and the ship width for Beam.
6) To input the second CCRP, click the CCRP2 button to display the
CCRP2 X,Y value, and input the value in the same manner for
step 5).
Similarly, input the third and subsequent CCRPs.
7) Repeat the above steps to input the GPS location(s) and radar
antenna location(s).
7 10
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION
5m
Example:
RADAR Antenna2
X 5m, Y 250m
Length 300m
GPS1
250 m X -10m, Y 30m CCRP1
X 0m, Y 25m
30m
25m
15m
7 11
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS
7.2 SETTINGS
Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.
1. Baud Rate
7 12
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS
There are two methods for receiving signals: specifying a port for each sensor, or
7
using the automatic recognition function without specifying ports.
Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.
2. RX Port
7 13
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS
The system is factory-set for using all sentences. To receive only specified
sentences, select No Use for sentences which are not necessary.
Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.
3. RX Sentence
1. GPS(LL/COG/SOG) GGA/RMC/RMA/GNS/GLL/VTG
2. GPS(WPT/Time) GGA/RMC/RMB/BWC/BWR/ZDA
3. Depth DPT/DBK/DBT/DBS
4. Wind MWV/MWD
5. Current
Data Set Number 0-9. Set the number of the sentence to be used by Data
Set Number. (Initial value 0)
6. Autopilot APB
7 14
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS
Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.
4. TX Port
7 15
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS
The sector blank function operates in the relative bearing with the bow as the
benchmark.
Notice
Displays the Magnetron Current bar instability indicating in sector blank area, but it
is normal operating.
For how to magnetron current to check, see Section 8.3.1.7 "Magnetron Current".
3. Sector Blank
3. Sector Blank
3) Select the sector blank number ( Make Sector 1 to Make Sector 3 ) for
sector creation, and click the Make Sector button in the menu.
The selected sector blank will be made.
7 16
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS
5) Set the ending azimuth of the sector blank by operating the [EBL]
dial, and left-click the ENT button.
The end angle of the sector blank will be set.
If a structure such as the mast is close to the radar antenna, automatic tuning
operation may become unstable. In this case, set a TNI blank in the direction of
the structure in order to stabilize the tuning operation.
Only one type of a sector can be created. The TNI blank function operates in the
relative bearing with the bow as the benchmark.
9. Next
2. TNI Blank
3) Select the item 1. TNI Blank in the menu, and turn on or off the TNI
blank function.
7 17
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS
9. Next
2. TNI Blank
4) Set the starting azimuth of the TNI blank by operating the [EBL]
dial, and left-click the ENT button.
The start angle of the TNI blank will be set.
5) Set the ending azimuth of the TNI blank by operating the [EBL]
dial, and left-click the ENT button.
The end angle of the TNI blank will be set.
Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.
4. TXRX Adjustment
6. Output Pulse
7 18
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS
The input value of externally input bearing pulses can be set. The system can set
2048 pulses or 4096 pulses.
9. Next
3) Set the number of pulses for the item 1. Input BP Count in the
menu.
7 19
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS
Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.
8. Language
1. English
2. Japanese
i
3. Other
Procedures
1) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Date
Time setting menu.
Main
7. Sub Menu
6. Date Time Setting
The Date Time Setting menu will open.
7 20
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS
1. Installation Information
7 21
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS
Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.
6. Alarm System
1. Watch Alarm
1. Reset Interval
The reset signal is turned off when trackball is moved, that caused by vibration.If
trackball move distance go over the threshold (dot unit) when reset signal is
turned on.
Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.
6. Alarm System
1. Watch Alarm
2. Trackball Threshold
7 22
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS
Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.
6. Alarm System
2. Relay Output
7
On : The relay output is turned on when alarm have issued.
Off : The relay output is not turned on when alarm have issued.
Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.
7 23
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS
6. Alarm System
2. Relay Output
Off : The ALR sentence is not output when alarm have issued.
Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.
6. Alarm System
7 24
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS
Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.
7
2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the External
ACK Setting menu.
2. Installation Menu
6. Alarm System
Alarm Setting Operation Operation CPA/ New Lost NAV System ISW
Miss TCPA Target
On
Off1
Off2
7 25
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS
NOTE: If the connection is not suggested from JRC office, don't connect PC or other
maker's system to JRC-LAN.
Connecting PC or other maker's system may cause a lower radar system performance.
Connecting PC or other maker's system may cause a lower that performance.
Accepted Devices
RADAR : JMA-7100/9100/5300MK2 Series
ECDIS : JMA-901B/701B
Chart RADAR : JMA-900B Series
Conning Display : JMA-901B-CON/701B-CON
Route planning system : JAN-1186
Navigation workstation : NDC-1186
GPS/DGPS : JLR-7500/7800
Receivable Data
[1] Route Data
The system can display the route created by other JRC navigation equipements. Refer to
Section 3.7 "USE ROUTE FUNCTION".
When the system display Route which are created in the ECDIS,
i following items are not displayed.
XTL
Arrival Radius
ROT
Turn Radius
Time Zone
Sail
7 26
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS
Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.
9. Next
4. Network
3) Select the item 1. Network Function in the menu, and turn on or off
the Network Function.
Procedures
1)
2)
Open the Serviceman Menu.
9. Next
4. Network
3. Sensor Priority
Settable sensors
No.1 ECDIS No.1 FFD Conning Display No.2 Data Server No.3 Remote GPS
No.2 ECDIS No.2 FFD No.1 Converter Unit Console Conning Nonei
No.3 ECDIS No.3 FFD No.2 Converter Unit NAV W/S
No.4 ECDIS No.4 FFD No.1 Alart I/F No.1 GPS
No.1 MFD No.1 Chart RADAR No.2 Alart I/F No.2 GPS
No.2 MFD No.2 Chart RADAR Port Conning No.3 GPS
No.3 MFD No.3 Chart RADAR STAB Conning No.1 Remote GPS
No.4 MFD No.4 Chart RADAR No.1 Data Server No.2 Remote GPS
7 27
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS
Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.
9. Next
4. Network
4. Synchronization
7 28
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS
NOTE: If the connection is not suggested from JRC office, don't connect PC or other
maker's system to JRC-LAN.
Connecting PC or other maker's system may cause a lower radar system performance.
Connecting PC or other maker's system may cause a lower that performance.
Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.
7
9. Next
5. LAN Port Setting
1. TX Setting
Settable sentences
TTM(TT), TLL(TT), TTD(TT), TLB(TT), OSD, RSD, ALR, ACK, TTM(AIS), TLL(AIS),
TTD(AIS), TLB(AIS)
7 29
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS
There are two methods for receiving signals: specifying a port for each sensor, or
using the automatic recognition function without specifying ports.
Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.
9. Next
5. LAN Port Setting
2. RX Port
Selectable ports
When the automatic AUTO
recognition function is used:
When the ports are specified: Own LAN LAN (GPS) LAN (Ships Clock)
Own : The system use data from sensor connected to the system
directly.
i. In order to set Section 3.12.1 "Receive Port Setting (RX Port)", select User Setting in
advance.
ii. LAN (GPS) and LAN (Ships Clock) are selectable signals for Time Zone and Date/Time.
7 30
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS
The system is factory-set for using all sentences. To receive only specified
sentences, select No Use for sentences which are not necessary.
Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.
9. Next
5. LAN Port Setting
3. RX Sentence
1. GPS(LL/COG/SOG) GGA/RMC/RMA/GNS/GLL/VTG
2. GPS(WPT/Time) GGA/RMC/RMB/BWC/BWR/ZDA
3. Depth DPT/DBK/DBT/DBS
4. Wind MWV/MWD
5. Current
Data Set Number 0-9. Set the number of the sentence to be used by Data
Set Number. (Initial value 0)
7
Layer A Set the number of the sentence to be used with layer A
by Layer Number. (Initial value 3)
Layer B Set the number of the sentence to be used with layer B
by Layer Number. (Initial value 4)
Layer C Set the number of the sentence to be used with layer C
by Layer Number. (Initial value 5)
6. Autopilot APB
7 31
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.3 ADJUSTMENT
7.3 ADJUSTMENT
1. Signal Processing
After system installation, a great change in the noise level adjustment value should be
avoided; it should be fine adjusted within 5.
7 32
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.3 ADJUSTMENT
Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.
1. Signal Processing
2. Setting Mode
Factory-adjustment method
The noise level adjustment value is once decreased to about 130.
While the noise level adjustment value is gradually increased, the value
with which radar echoes start turning yellow is determined as the set
value.
The noise level adjustment mode is turned off when the adjustment is
finished.
Attention
Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.
7 33
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.3 ADJUSTMENT
2. TT
1. Vector Constant
Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.
2. TT
7 34
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.3 ADJUSTMENT
3. MBS
1. MBS Level 7
3) Set the radar as follows:
Set the radar range to 0.125 NM.
Set the radar video enhance function (ENH) to OFF.
Set the image processing (PROC) to OFF.
Turn the [RAIN] control to the minimum position (fully to the left).
Turn the [GAIN] control to the maximum position (fully to the right).
Turn the [SEA] control to achieve the strength with which main bang can be judged.
7 35
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.3 ADJUSTMENT
3. MBS
2. MBS Area
7 36
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.3 ADJUSTMENT
Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.
2) Open the MON (Performance Monitor) Adjustment menu by performing
the following menu operation.
1. Adjust Menu
4. TXRX Adjustment
4. MON Adjustment
18.00NM
Performance Monitor pattern
7 37
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.3 ADJUSTMENT
Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.
4. TXRX Adjustment
7 38
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.4 MAINTENANCE MENU
7
Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.
1. Safety Switch
7 39
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.4 MAINTENANCE MENU
2. Area Initial
1. Serviceman Menu The set values in the Serviceman menu are initialized.
2. Except Serviceman Menu The set values not in the Serviceman menu are initialized.
4. TT Setting The set values for the target tracking function are initialized.
5. AIS Setting The set values for the AIS display function are initialized.
6. Day/Night The color scheme and brilliance setting for the day/night
mode are initialized.
2. Area Initial
7 40
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.4 MAINTENANCE MENU
To save the internal memory data onto a flash memory card (option), the card
must be inserted in card slot beforehand.
The internal memory data should be saved at completion of system setting, and the operation
condition should be saved periodically.
Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.
Perform the read operation in order to return the system to the previous operation condition
after replacement of the radar processing circuit in the system.
Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.
7 41
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.4 MAINTENANCE MENU
Transmission time
Motor run time
Clear the above total time when the magnetron or scanner unit motor is replaced.
Perform the following procedure to clear the motor run time when the scanner motor is
replaced.
Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.
5. TXRX Time
1. Clear TX Time
Perform the following procedure to inherit the scanner unit time data when the TXRX's
internal control circuit is replaced.
Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.
5. TXRX Time
7 42
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.4 MAINTENANCE MENU
Perform the following procedure of 7.4.4.4 to inherit the scanner unit time data when the
TXRX's internal control circuit is replaced.
Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.
5. TXRX Time
display unit.
7
Perform the above procedure of 7.4.4.3 to inherit the antenna time data when the antenna's
internal control circuit is replaced.
Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.
5. TXRX Time
7 43
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.4 MAINTENANCE MENU
Ask our agent or sales department for the supply of character strings to be
updated.
To update character strings, the flash memory card (option) containing the
character string file must be inserted in card slot 2.
Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.
To display the read character strings in the second language, select Other in the menu
shown in Section 7.2.6 "Language Setting (Language)".
7 44
SECTION 8
COUNTERMEASURES FOR TROUBLE
AND ADJUSTMENT
For operating the radar equipment in the good conditions, it is necessary to make
the maintenance work as described below. If maintenance is made properly,
troubles will reduce. It is recommended to make regular maintenance work.
Remove the dust, dirt, and sea water rest on the equipment cabinet with a piece of
dry cloth.
Especially, clean the air vents with a brush for good ventilation.
8 1
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.2 MAINTENANCE ON EACH UNIT
i. After the work, turn "ON" the scanner unit safety switch.
1) The proper fastening torque of the fitting bolts (M8) is 1176 to 1470 N/
cm (120 to 150kgf/cm) (which makes the inside water-tight and protects
the packings against permanent compressive strain).The packings start
producing from the cover at a torque of approximately 1470N/cm
(150kgf/cm). Do not fasten the bolts with a torque exceeding the
specified value. Otherwise, the screws may be broken.
3) Screw all the bolts by hand first to prevent them playing, then fasten
them evenly in order not to cause one-sided fastening. (Fasten the
bolts with 25% of the required torque at the first step.)
8 2
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.2 MAINTENANCE ON EACH UNIT
8
b. Radiator
Attention
8 3
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.2 MAINTENANCE ON EACH UNIT
c. Rotating section
c-1 Supply Oil Seal
The scanner unit NKE-1130 (JMA-9132-SA) and NKE-1139 (JMA-9133-SA)
with a grease nipple needs grease supply. Remove the cap on the grease nipple on
the front of the radiator support, and grease with a grease gun. Make the oiling
every six months. The oil quantity shall be approximately 100 g, which is as
much as the grease comes out of the oil seal. Use the grease of Mobilux 2 of
Mobil Oil.
8 4
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.2 MAINTENANCE ON EACH UNIT
For details, refer to the coaxial cable installation procedure for S-band radars.
8
When cleaning the screen, do not wipe it too strongly
with a dry cloth. Also, do not use gasoline or thinner to
clean the screen. Otherwise the screen surface may be
damaged
Dust accumulated on the screen will reduce clarity and darken the video. For
cleaning it, wipe it with a piece of soft cloth (flannel or cotton).
Do not wipe it strongly with a piece of dry cloth nor use gasoline or thinner.
8 5
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.3 PERFORMANCE CHECK
Make operational check on the radar equipment regularly and if any problem is
found, investigate it immediately. Pay special attention to the high voltage
sections in checking and take full care that no trouble is caused by any error or
carelessness in measurement. Take note of the results of checking, which can be
used effectively in the next check work.
Operational check shall be made in accordance with Table 8-1 Function Check
List in the order as specified in it.
Display Unit Video and echoes on the screen Sensitivity Can be correctly controlled
LCD brilliance can be controlled correctly
Various markers
Various numerical indications
Lighting
Power Supply, Backup Battery See the Section [4] "Supply Voltage"
System Alarm Log Display See the Section 8.3.1.5 "System Alarm
Log display"
Scanner Unit Signals from the Scanner Unit See the Section [2] "TXRX Test"
8 6
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.3 PERFORMANCE CHECK
Procedures
1) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Test
Menu.
Main
9. Test Menu
3. Line Test
[2]TXRX Test
[3]Check of Communication Lines (Line Test)
8
4. Supply Voltage [4]Supply Voltage
8 7
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.3 PERFORMANCE CHECK
5V 4.75 to 5.25V
8 8
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.3 PERFORMANCE CHECK
Each key on the operation panel on the display is shown in reverse video at the
8
same time the key is pressed, and the name of the pressed key is displayed.
The buzzer will sound. The buzzer automatically stops after it sounds for a
specified length of time.
8 9
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.3 PERFORMANCE CHECK
Procedures
1) Open the MON Display menu by performing the following menu
operation.
Main
9. Test Menu
4. MON Display
Procedures
1) Check the attenuation value.
*Transmitter System
About one minute after opening this menu item, check the
transmitter attenuation value.
8 10
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.3 PERFORMANCE CHECK
Procedures
1) Turn the [VRM] dial to make adjustments so that the farthest
point of the performance monitor pattern.
*Receiver System
8 11
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.3 PERFORMANCE CHECK
The current alarm is displayed at the lower right of the radar display. For details,
refer to Section 9.1.1 "List of Alarms and other Indications".
The Alarm log display button (page2-31 Alarm) is clicked, in the same way as
that one.
To erase the alarm logs, press the All Clear button in the log display window.
X-Band
S-Band
Note: Displays the Magnetron Current bar instability indicating in sector blank area,
but it is normal operating.
For how to setting sector blank function, see Section 7.2.2 "Sector Blank
Setting (Sector Blank)".
8 12
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
The system includes parts that need periodic replacement. The parts should be
replaced as scheduled. Use of parts over their service life can cause a system
failure.
8
Even after the main power source is turned off, some
high voltages remain for a while. Do not contact the
inverter circuit in the LCD with bare hands. Otherwise,
an electric shock may be caused.
8 13
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
When mounting a new magnetron, do not touch the magnet with a screwdriver or
put it on an iron plate. After replacement, connect the lead wire correctly.
The magnetron that has been kept in storage for a long time may cause sparks and
operate unstably when its operation is started. Perform the aging in the following
procedures:
1) Warm up the cathode for a longer time than usually. (20 to 30 minutes
in the STBY state.)
2) Start the operation from the short pulse range and shift it gradually to
the longer pulse ranges. If the operation becomes unstable such as
the magnetron current is unstable, in during this process, return it to
the standby mode immediately. Keep the state for 5 to 10 minutes until
the operation is restarted.
8 14
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
[Replacement procedure]
8
Remove the eight
hexagonal screws.
8 15
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
Loosen the
Use a non-magnetic screwdriver. If the
eight screws.
magnetron comes into contact with any
metal (tool), its performance may
deteriorate.
5) Install the new magnetron together with the fixture and tighten the screws to hold the
cables.
Follow the removal procedure in the reverse order.
Do not forget to tighten the screws and connect the cables.
[Operation check]
After you have completed the replacement work, follow the procedure below to
check the operation.
8 16
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
1) Turn on the power supply for the radar. Allow sufficient time for the radar to be
preheated (about 20 to 30 minutes / bring the radar unit to STBY mode).
2) Start emitting radio waves from the short pulse range and gradually change the
emissions to the long pulse range. Open the service engineer menu to perform tuning
adjustment.
If operation becomes unstable such as the magnetron current is unstable, bring the
radar unit back to STBY mode and restart emission after allowing for an interval of 5
to 10 minutes.
3) Emit radio waves in long pulse range mode for about 15 minutes and reopen the
service engineer menu to perform tuning adjustment.
Adjust the setting in the service engineer menu until the tuning indication bar on the
display unit reaches the 8th calibration marking.
Check in the service engineer menu that the magnetron current is between the 6th and
9th calibration markings.
8
[Replacement procedure]
Bow direction
8 17
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
Loosen the
four screws.
Remove the
5) Remove the screws (four M4 screws) two screws.
Remove the
holding the magnetron in place, then green cable.
replace the magnetron after cutting the
Remove the
leads (yellow and green) for the yellow cable.
replacement magnetron to an
appropriate length.
8 18
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
Use a non-magnetic screwdriver. If the magnetron comes into contact with any metal
(tool), its performance may deteriorate.
6) After having replaced the magnetron, reassemble the unit by following the disassembly
procedure in the reverse order.
Do not forget to tighten the bolts and screws, and do not forget to reconnect the cables.
Extreme care should be taken to connect the leads (yellow and green) to the magnetron
for prevention of contact with other parts or the casing. Contact may cause them to
discharge.
[Operation check]
After you have completed the replacement work, follow the procedure below to
check the operation.
1) Turn on the power supply for the radar. Allow sufficient time for the radar to be
preheated (about 20 to 30 minutes / bring the radar unit to STBY mode).
2) Start emitting radio waves from the short pulse range and gradually change the
emissions to the long pulse range. Open the service engineer menu to perform tuning
adjustment.
If operation becomes unstable such as the magnetron current is unstable, bring the
radar unit back to STBY mode and restart emission after allowing for an interval of 5
to 10 minutes.
8
3) Emit radio waves in long pulse range mode for about 15 minutes and reopen the
service engineer menu to perform tuning adjustment.
Adjust the setting in the service engineer menu until the tuning indication bar on the
display unit reaches the 8th calibration marking.
Check in the service engineer menu that the magnetron current is between the 6th and
9th calibration markings.
8 19
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
Bow direction
8 20
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
Loosen the
four screws.
Tighten the
five bolts.
Magnetron
4) Cut the leads (yellow and green) for the
Green cable
replacement magnetron to an appropriate
Yellow cable
length, then tighten the screws and fix the
cables in place.
After having replaced the magnetron, reassemble the unit by following the disassembly
procedure in the reverse order.
8 21
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
Do not forget to tighten the bolts and screws, and do not forget to reconnect the cables.
Extreme care should be taken to connect the leads (yellow and green) to the magnetron
for prevention of contact with other parts or the casing.
[Operation check]
After you have completed the replacement work, follow the procedure below to
check the operation.
1) Turn on the power supply for the radar. Allow sufficient time for the radar to be
preheated (about 20 to 30 minutes / bring the radar unit to STBY mode).
2) Start emitting radio waves from the short pulse range and gradually change the
emissions to the long pulse range. Open the service engineer menu to perform tuning
adjustment.
If operation becomes unstable such as the magnetron current is unstable, bring the
radar unit back to STBY mode and restart emission after allowing for an interval of 5
to 10 minutes.
3) Emit radio waves in long pulse range mode for about 15 minutes and reopen the
service engineer menu to perform tuning adjustment.
Adjust the setting in the service engineer menu until the tuning indication bar on the
display unit reaches the 8th calibration marking.
Check in the service engineer menu that the magnetron current is between the 4th and
7th calibration markings.
8 22
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
[Replacement procedure]
8 23
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
Remove the
two screws.
Use a non-magnetic screwdriver. If the
magnetron comes into contact with any metal
(tool), its performance may deteriorate.
Green
cable
replacement magnetron.
After having replaced the magnetron,
reassemble the unit by following the
disassembly procedure in the reverse order.
Green cable
Do not forget to tighten the bolts and screws, and
do not forget to reconnect the cables.
[Operation check]
After you have completed the replacement work, follow the procedure below to
check the operation.
1) Turn on the power supply for the radar. Allow sufficient time for the radar to be
preheated (about 20 to 30 minutes / bring the radar unit to STBY mode).
2) Start emitting radio waves from the short pulse range and gradually change the
emissions to the long pulse range. Open the service engineer menu to perform tuning
adjustment.
If operation becomes unstable such as the magnetron current is unstable, bring the
radar unit back to STBY mode and restart emission after allowing for an interval of 5
to 10 minutes.
3) Emit radio waves in long pulse range mode for about 15 minutes and reopen the
service engineer menu to perform tuning adjustment.
8 24
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
Adjust the setting in the service engineer menu until the tuning indication bar on the
display unit reaches the 8th calibration marking.
Check in the service engineer menu that the magnetron current is between the 6th and
9th calibration markings.
[Replacement procedure]
8
Loosen the four screws .
8 25
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
8 26
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
Green cable
Use a non-magnetic screwdriver. If the
magnetron comes into contact with any Yellow cable
metal (tool), its performance may
deteriorate. Remove the four screws.
8 27
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
[Operation check]
After you have completed the replacement work, follow the procedure below to
check the operation.
1) Turn on the power supply for the radar. Allow sufficient time for the radar to be
preheated (about 20 to 30 minutes / bring the radar unit to STBY mode).
2) Start emitting radio waves from the short pulse range and gradually change the
emissions to the long pulse range. Open the service engineer menu to perform tuning
adjustment.
If operation becomes unstable such as the magnetron current is unstable, bring the
radar unit back to STBY mode and restart emission after allowing for an interval of 5
to 10 minutes.
3) Emit radio waves in long pulse range mode for about 15 minutes and reopen the
service engineer menu to perform tuning adjustment.
Adjust the setting in the service engineer menu until the tuning indication bar on the
display unit reaches the 8th calibration marking.
Check in the service engineer menu that the magnetron current is between the 6th and
9th calibration markings.
8 28
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
[Replacement procedure]
Driver unit (driver circuit
1) Remove the cover on the right (starboard) side
board at the back side)
(see 8.4.2.1) and loosen the four screws (M4)
to remove the driver unit, which has the motor
driver circuit board on its back side.
Remove the
four screws.
8 29
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
8 30
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
[Operation check]
After you have completed the replacement work, follow the procedure below to
check the operation.
1) Turn on the radar power supply. After the countdown is completed, start emission and
check that the radar image appears without error. Check that you do not hear any
unusual sound when the motor starts, rotates, and stops.
2) Open the service engineer menu to initialize the motor rotation time.
Tools for removing the cover from the scanner unit.(Refer to the 8.4.2.2)
[Replacement procedure]
8
Motor
Motor driver circuit
Motor
8 31
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
Do not forget to tighten the bolts and screws, and do not forget to reconnect the cables.
8)
8 32
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
[Replacement procedure]
3) After having replaced the motor, reassemble the unit by following the disassembly
procedure in the reverse order.
Do not forget to tighten the bolts and screws, and do not forget to reconnect the cables.
Clamp the cables so they do not interfere with the rotation of the motor's rotors.
[Operation check]
After you have completed the replacement work, follow the procedure below to
check the operation.
1) Turn on the radar and emit radar waves once the countdown is finished, and check that
the radar image is correctly displayed. Check that the motor does not make any
8
abnormal sound when it starts to rotate, while it is rotating, or when it stops.
8 33
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
Perform the replacement work on a soft cloth to avoid damage to the LCD screen and
other parts.
[Required tools]
[Disassembly]
Remove
8 34
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
Remove
Remove
Remove
6) Displace the module and remove the three
cables.
8
7) Remove the LCD module.
Remove
8 35
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
[Assembly]
Positions of the
[Operation Check]
two bosses
8 36
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
If Battery Dead is appeared at the lower-right of the display when start up the
radar system, the battery has no time left to live. There is a necessary to replace
the battery. In This condition, this radar system is restored configuration
information from flash memory and normal operation is available. However, you
turned of the radar system before saving to flash memory, the configuration
information is maybe lost. In this case, you must setup the configuration again.
About disposal of used battery, refer to Section 10.2.
8 37
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
[Disassembly]
Remove
8 38
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
[Assembly]
8
[Check Item]
[Notes]
8 39
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
If you installed the battery with the wrong polarity, remove the battery immediately and
do not use the same battery again.
During the procedures, do not put the battery on any circuit board or conductive item.
To dispose of a used battery, follow the instructions provided in Section 10.2 "DISPOSAL
OF USED BATTERIES".
8 40
SECTION 9
TROUBLE SHOOTING AND
AFTER-SALES SERVICE
In case of semiconductor circuits, it is deemed that there are few cases in which
the used semiconductor devices have inferior quality or performance deterioration
except due to insufficient design or inspection or by other external and artificial
causes. In general, the relatively many causes are disconnection in a high-value
resistor due to moisture, a defective variable resistor and poor contact of a switch
or relay.
Some troubles are caused by defective parts, imperfect adjustment (such as tuning
adjustment) or insufficient service (such as poor cable contact). It will also be
effective to check and readjust these points.
Alarm message is displayed in the lower right of the display. For more details
refer to page2-31 Alarm.
9
This section gives the list of alarms displayed by the system and other display
lists.
Table9-1 Critical Alarm
Message Class Description ALR No.i
CPA/TCPA Alarm There is a dangerous target. 301
i. ALR No.: Unique alarm number in ALR sentence and ACK sentence
9 1
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 9.TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES SERVICE > 9.1 FAULT FINDING
9 2
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 9.TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES SERVICE > 9.1 FAULT FINDING
9
time.
New Target Alarm Acquisition or activation of a target in the automatic 302
acquisition / activation zone.
REF Target Alarm Decrease in the reference target accuracy.
Trial Warning There is a dangerous target, when trial maneuver is
active.
TT (Boot) Alarm Target tracking unit start failure. 344
TT (Data) Alarm The target tracking unit is malfunctioning. 323
TT 95% Capacity INFO Over 95% of the maximum number of targets to be
tracked.
TT MAX Target INFO The maximum number of targets is under acquisition.
i. ALR No.: Unique alarm number in ALR sentence and ACK sentence
ii. *** is a 3-digit number which is Local Alarm No in the ALR sentence.
9 3
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 9.TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES SERVICE > 9.1 FAULT FINDING
9 4
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 9.TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES SERVICE > 9.1 FAULT FINDING
9
Update ISW INFO Tried to enter new TXRX function, when interswitch
Software software used old version.
i. ALR No.: Unique alarm number in ALR sentence and ACK sentence
9 5
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 9.TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES SERVICE > 9.1 FAULT FINDING
If picture freeze occurred, turn off the system and restart the system.
Operation Status
9 6
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 9.TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES SERVICE > 9.2 TROUBLE SHOOTING
There are also troubles by the following causes, which should be referred to in
checking or repair work.
Table9-10 7ZXRD0025
Name Type/Code Shape (mm) In Spare Parts # Location
use
Fuse MF60NR250V0.5 4 12 F1 F4 GYRO Interface
Circuit
(5ZFGD00006)
6.4 CMJ-462E
30
(5ZFCA00053) NBA-5135
6.35
31.8
9 7
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 9.TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES SERVICE > 9.2 TROUBLE SHOOTING
NKE-1125/2254
Table9-12 NKE-1125/2254(JMA-9122-6XA/9XA/6XAHJMA-7122-6XA/9XA/6XAH)
NTG-3225
Table9-13 NTG-3225(JMA-9123-7XA/9XAJMA-7123-7XA/9XA)
Parts No. Name Type Manufacture Location Code
V101 Magnetron M1568BS NJRC Tr an s m it ter 5VMAA00106
Receiver Unit
NKE-1130
Table9-14 NKE-1130(JMA-9132-SAJMA-7132-SA)
NTG-3230
Table9-15 NTG-3230(JMA-9133-SAJMA-7133-SA)
Parts No. Name Type Manufacture Location Code
V101 Magnetron M1555 NJRC Tr an s m it ter 5VMAA00104
Receiver Unit
9 8
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 9.TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES SERVICE > 9.2 TROUBLE SHOOTING
9
UNIT
9 9
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 9.TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES SERVICE > 9.2 TROUBLE SHOOTING
9 10
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 9.TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES SERVICE > 9.2 TROUBLE SHOOTING
OPERATION UNIT
OPERATION CIRCUIT B
OPERATION CIRCUIT D
CCK-974
CCK-976
9
OPERATION UNIT TRACKBALL CCK-1013
MONITOR UNIT BEZEL KIT MPXP34376* Radar bezel kit
MONITOR UNIT 23 inch LCD CML-799L 23.1-inch LCD PANEL
MONITOR UNIT LCD OPERATION CIRCUIT CCK-972
i. *means revision, such as A, B and so on.
9 11
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 9.TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES SERVICE > 9.2 TROUBLE SHOOTING
RADAR PROCESS RADAR PROCESS CIRCUIT MPBC44213* CDC-1324 with mounting bracket,
UNIT CDC-1325 and CDC-1186D
RADAR PROCESS RADAR PROCESS CIRCUIT MDLW11900* CDC-1324 with mounting bracket
UNIT
9 12
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 9.TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES SERVICE > 9.2 TROUBLE SHOOTING
9
RADAR PROCESS POWER SUPPLY CBD-1661
UNIT
9 13
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 9.TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES SERVICE > 9.2 TROUBLE SHOOTING
RADAR PROCESS UNIT RADAR PROCESS CIRCUIT MPBC44213* CDC-1324 with mounting
bracket, CDC-1325 and
CDC-1186D
RADAR PROCESS UNIT RADAR PROCESS CIRCUIT MDLW11900* CDC-1324 with mounting
bracket
RADAR PROCESS UNIT AIS PROCESS CIRCUIT CDC-1325
RADAR PROCESS UNIT ARPA PROCESS CIRCUIT CDC-1186D
RADAR PROCESS UNIT GYRO INTERFACE CIRCUIT CMJ-462E
RADAR PROCESS UNIT TERMINAL BOARD CQD-2097A
RADAR PROCESS UNIT MOTHER BOARD CQC-1192
RADAR PROCESS UNIT FAN (RPU) 109R0612S4D13
RADAR PROCESS UNIT POWER SUPPLY CBD-1661
RADAR PROCESS UNIT FAN (PSU) H-7BFRD0006*
OPERATION UNIT OPERATION CIRCUIT A CCK-973
OPERATION UNIT OPERATION CIRCUIT B CCK-974
OPERATION UNIT OPERATION CIRCUIT D CCK-976
OPERATION UNIT TRACKBALL CCK-1013
MONITOR UNIT BEZEL KIT MPXP34376* Radar bezel kit
MONITOR UNIT 23 inch LCD CML-799L 23.1-inch LCD PANEL
MONITOR UNIT LCD OPERATION CIRCUIT CCK-972
i. *means revision, such as A, B and so on.
9 14
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 9.TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES SERVICE > 9.3 AFTER-SALES SERVICE
If it is still out of order, you are recommended to stop operation of the equipment
and consult with the dealer from whom you purchased the product, or our branch
office in your country or district, the sales department in our main office in Tokyo.
If any failure occurs in the product during its normal operation in accordance with
the instruction manual, the dealer or JRC will repair free of charge. In case that
any failure is caused due to misuse, faulty operation, negligence or force major
such as natural disaster and fire, the product will be repaired with charges.
9
on page 9-16
Name of company/organization, address and telephone number
For maintenance, consult with the near-by dealer or our sales department.Such
maintenance will be made with charges.
9 15
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 9.TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES SERVICE > 9.3 AFTER-SALES SERVICE
Check the following items in the order of the number, and check the applicable
answer between YES or NO.
If the item cannot be determined as YES or NO, explain in detail in the item (18),
others.
i. If result is NO, then check the fuse. (Refer to Section 9.1.2 "Operation Checking" and Section 9.2 "TROUBLE
SHOOTING")
ii. Check these items while transmission is ON.
iii. Functions mentioned in the items (14), (15) and (17) may be optional, answer is not necessary.
9 16
SECTION 10
DISPOSAL
DISPOSAL
10.1 DISPOSAL OF THE UNIT ....................................................................10-1
10.2 DISPOSAL OF USED BATTERIES .....................................................10-1
10.3 DISPOSAL OF USED MAGNETRON ..................................................10-2
10.4 DISPOSAL OF TR-TUBE .....................................................................10-2
10.5 ABOUT THE CHINA ROHS .................................................................10-3
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 10.DISPOSAL > 10.1 DISPOSAL OF THE UNIT
When disposing of this unit, be sure to follow the local laws and regulations for
the place of disposal.
In this unit, Lithium batteries are used for the following parts:
10 1
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 10.DISPOSAL > 10.3 DISPOSAL OF USED MAGNETRON
When the magnetron is replaced with a new one, return the used magnetron to
our dealer or business office.
For detail, consult with our dealer or business office.
In the case that either mark shown in Fig 10-1 is on the expired TR-tube,
Radioisotopes are in the TR-tube.
Disposal of TR-tube with these marks must be done in accordance with the
laws and regulations of the pertaining country. For detail, consult with our
dealer or business office.
Radiation from TR-tube has no effect on the human body.
Don't take apart TR-tube.
10 2
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 10.DISPOSAL > 10.5 ABOUT THE CHINA ROHS
(Names & Content of toxic and hazardous substances or elements
(Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements)
(Part name)
(Pb) (Hg) (Cd) (Cr6+) (PBB) (PBDE)
(Scanner Unit)
(Transmitter-receiver Unit)
(Inboard Unit)
(Display Unit)
(OperationUnit)
(Peripherals)
(Options)
(Cables)
(Documennts)
SJ/T11306-2006
(Indicates that this toxic, or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this
part is below the requirement in SJ/T11363-2006.)
SJ/T11363-2006
(Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials
used for this part is above the limit requirement in SJ/T 11363-2006.)
10
10 3
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 10.DISPOSAL > 10.5 ABOUT THE CHINA ROHS
10 4
SECTION 11
SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATION
11.1 JMA-9133-SA TYPE RADAR ...............................................................11-1
11.2 JMA-9132-SA TYPE RADAR ............................................................... 11-2
11.3 JMA-9123-7XA/9XA TYPE RADAR ....................................................11-3
11.4 JMA-9122-6XA/9XA TYPE RADAR ....................................................11-4
11.5 JMA-9122-6XAH TYPE RADAR .........................................................11-5
11.6 JMA-9110-6XA TYPE RADAR ............................................................11-6
11.7 JMA-9110-6XAH TYPE RADAR .........................................................11-7
11.8 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-1139) ...............................................................11-8
11.9 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-1130) ...............................................................11-9
11.10 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-1129-7/9) ......................................................11-10
11.11 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-1125-6/9) .......................................................11-11
11.12 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-2254-6HS) .....................................................11-12
11.13 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-2103-6) ..........................................................11-13
11.14 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-2103-6HS) .....................................................11-14
11.15 TRANSMITTER RECEIVER UNIT (NTG-3230) .................................11-15
11.16 TRANSMITTER RECEIVER UNIT (NTG-3225) .................................11-16
11.17 DISPLAY UNIT (NCD-4990) ...............................................................11-17
11.18 Target Tracking Function .................................................................11-20
11.19 AIS FUNCTION ...................................................................................11-21
11.20 PERFORMANCE MONITOR (NJU-84) ..............................................11-22
11.21 PERFORMANCE MONITOR (NJU-85) ..............................................11-22
11.22 AC-DC CONVERTER (NBA-5135) .....................................................11-22
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 11.SPECIFICATION > 11.1 JMA-9133-SA TYPE RADAR
See 11.8
TRANSMITTER RECEIVER UNIT (NTG-3230)
See 11.15
DISPLAY UNIT (NCD-4990)
See 11.17
PERFORMANCE MONITOR (NJU-84)
See 11.20
OPTION
11
DISPLAY UNIT to
TRANSMITTER RECEIVER UNIT
35m
SAFE DISTANCE FOR STANDARD COMPASS
11 1
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 11.SPECIFICATION > 11.2 JMA-9132-SA TYPE RADAR
See 11.9
DISPLAY UNIT (NCD-4990)
See 11.17
PERFORMANCE MONITOR (NJU-84)
See 11.20
OPTION
11 2
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 11.SPECIFICATION > 11.3 JMA-9123-7XA/9XA TYPE RADAR
See 11.10
TRANSMITTER RECEIVER UNIT (NTG-3225)
See 11.16
DISPLAY UNIT (NCD-4990)
See 11.17
PERFORMANCE MONITOR (NJU-85)
See 11.21
OPTION
11
DISPLAY UNIT to
TRANSMITTER RECEIVER UNIT
35m
SAFE DISTANCE FOR STANDARD COMPASS
11 3
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 11.SPECIFICATION > 11.4 JMA-9122-6XA/9XA TYPE RADAR
See 11.11
DISPLAY UNIT (NCD-4990)
See 11.17
PERFORMANCE MONITOR (NJU-85)
See 11.21
OPTION
11 4
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 11.SPECIFICATION > 11.5 JMA-9122-6XAH TYPE RADAR
See 11.11
DISPLAY UNIT (NCD-4990)
See 11.17
PERFORMANCE MONITOR (NJU-85)
See 11.21
AC/DC CONVERTER (NBA-5135)
See 11.22
OPTION
Scanner with Deicing Heater None
Interswitch Unit NQE-3141-2A (Maximum 2 Radars)
NQE-3141-4A (Maximum 4 Radars)
DISPLAY UNIT (Desktop type) NCD-4990T
Maximum Cable Length
SCANNER UNIT to 65m
TRANSMITTER RECEIVER UNIT
11
SAFE DISTANCE FOR STANDARD COMPASS
11 5
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 11.SPECIFICATION > 11.6 JMA-9110-6XA TYPE RADAR
11 6
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 11.SPECIFICATION > 11.7 JMA-9110-6XAH TYPE RADAR
See 11.21
AC/DC CONVERTER (NBA-5135)
See 11.22
OPTION
Scanner with Deicing Heater None
Interswitch Unit NQE-3141-2A (Maximum 2 Radars)
NQE-3141-4A (Maximum 4 Radars)
DISPLAY UNIT (Desktop type) NCD-4990T
Maximum Cable Length
SCANNER UNIT DISPLAY 65m
UNIT
SAFE DISTANCE FOR STANDARD COMPASS
11 7
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 11.SPECIFICATION > 11.8 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-1139)
SCANNER UNITNKE-1139
Dimension Height 791 x Swing Circle 4000 (mm)
Mass Approx.150kg
Polarization Horizontal
Directional Characteristics Horizontal beam width : 1.9
Vertical beam width : 25
Side lobe Level : below -26dB (within +/-10)
: below -30dB (outside +/-10)
Revolution Approx.24rpm
Power Supply for Motor AC100 - 115V50/60Hz1or
AC220 - 240V50/60Hz1
Maximum Wind Velocity 51.5m/s (100knots)
11 8
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 11.SPECIFICATION > 11.9 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-1130)
SCANNER UNITNKE-1130
Dimension Height 791 x Swing Circle 4000 (mm)
Mass Approx.180kg
Polarization Horizontal
Directional Characteristics Horizontal beam width : 1.9
Vertical beam width : 25
Side lobe Level : below -26dB (within +/-10)
: below -30dB (outside +/-10)
Revolution Approx.24rpm
Power Supply for Motor AC100 - 115V50/60Hz1 or
AC220 - 240V50/60Hz1
Maximum Wind Velocity 51.5m/s (100knots)
Transmitting Frequency 3050 20MHz
Transmitting Power 30kW
Transmitting Tube Magnetron[M1555]
TX Pulse width / Repetition SP10.07s/2250Hz
Frequency MP10.2s/2250Hz MP20.3s/1900HzMP30.4s/1400Hz
LP10.8s/750HzLP21.0s/650Hz LP31.2s/510Hz
0.1250.250.5NM SP1
0.75NM SP1/MP1
1.5NM SP1/MP1/MP2/MP3
3NM MP1/MP2/MP3/LP1
6NM MP1/MP2/MP3/LP1/LP2
12NM MP1/MP2/MP3/LP1/LP2
24NM MP3/LP1/LP2
48NM LP2
96NM LP3
Modulator Solid State Modulator Circuit
Duplexer Circulator + Diode Limiter
Front End Module Built-in
Intermediate Frequency Amplifier Intermediate Frequency : 60MHz
Band Width : 25/8/3MHz
Gain : more than 90dB
Amplifying Characteristics : Logarithmic Amplifier
Overall Noise Figure 7.5dB ( Typical)
Tuning Manual/AUTO
11
11 9
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 11.SPECIFICATION > 11.10 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-1129-7/9)
SCANNER UNITNKE-1129-7/9
Dimension 7ft Height 536 x Swing Circle 2270 (mm)
9ft Height 536 x Swing Circle 2825 (mm)
Mass 7ft Approx.51kg
9ft Approx.53kg
Polarization Horizontal
Directional Characteristics Horizontal beam width : 1.0 (7ft)
: 0.8 (9ft)
Vertical beam width : 20
Side lobe Level : below -26dB (within +/-10)
: below -30dB (outside +/-10)
Revolution Approx.24rpm
Power Supply for Motor AC100 - 115V50/60Hz1or
AC220 - 240V50/60Hz1
Maximum Wind Velocity 51.5m/s (100knots)
11 10
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 11.SPECIFICATION > 11.11 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-1125-6/9)
SCANNER UNITNKE-1125-6/9
Dimension 6ft Height 536 x Swing Circle 1910 (mm)
9ft Height 536 x Swing Circle 2825 (mm)
Mass 6ft Approx. 55kg
9ft Approx. 60kg
Polarization Horizontal
Directional Characteristics Horizontal beam width : 1.2 (6ft)
: 0.8 (9ft)
Vertical beam width : 20
Side lobe Level : below -26dB (within +/-10)
: below -30dB (outside +/-10)
Revolution Approx.24rpm
Power Supply for Motor AC100 - 115V50/60Hz1 or
AC220 - 240V50/60Hz1
Maximum Wind Velocity 51.5m/s (100knots)
Transmitting Frequency 9410 30MHz
Transmitting Power 25kW
Transmitting Tube Magnetron[M1568BS]
TX Pulse width / Repetition SP10.07s/2250Hz
Frequency MP10.2s/2250Hz MP20.3s/1900HzMP30.4s/1400Hz
LP10.8s/750HzLP21.0s/650Hz LP31.2s/510Hz
0.1250.250.5NM SP1
0.75NM SP1/MP1
1.5NM SP1/MP1/MP2/MP3
3NM MP1/MP2/MP3/LP1
6NM MP1/MP2/MP3/LP1/LP2
12NM MP1/MP2/MP3/LP1/LP2
24NM MP3/LP1/LP2
48NM LP2
96NM LP3
Modulator Solid State Modulator Circuit
Duplexer Circulator + Diode Limiter
Front End Module Built-in
Intermediate Frequency Amplifier Intermediate Frequency : 60MHz
Band Width : 25/8/3MHz
Gain : more than 90dB
Amplifying Characteristics : Logarithmic Amplifier
Overall Noise Figure 7.5dB ( Typical)
Tuning Manual/AUTO
11
11 11
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 11.SPECIFICATION > 11.12 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-2254-6HS)
SCANNER UNITNKE-2254-6HS
Dimension Height 536 x Swing Circle 1910 (mm)
Mass Approx. 55kg
Polarization Horizontal
Directional Characteristics Horizontal beam width : 1.2
Vertical beam width : 20
Side lobe Level : below -26dB (within +/-10)
: below -30dB (outside +/-10)
Revolution Approx.48rpm
Power Supply for Motor DC24V
Maximum Wind Velocity 51.5m/s (100knots)
Transmitting Frequency 9410 30MHz
Transmitting Power 25kW
Transmitting Tube Magnetron[M1568BS]
TX Pulse width / Repetition SP10.07s/2250Hz
Frequency MP10.2s/2250Hz MP20.3s/1900HzMP30.4s/1400Hz
LP10.8s/750HzLP21.0s/650Hz LP31.2s/510Hz
0.1250.250.5NM SP1
0.75NM SP1/MP1
1.5NM SP1/MP1/MP2/MP3
3NM MP1/MP2/MP3/LP1
6NM MP1/MP2/MP3/LP1/LP2
12NM MP1/MP2/MP3/LP1/LP2
24NM MP3/LP1/LP2
48NM LP2
96NM LP3
Modulator Solid State Modulator Circuit
Duplexer Circulator + Diode Limiter
Front End Module Built-in
Intermediate Frequency Amplifier Intermediate Frequency : 60MHz
Band Width : 25/8/3MHz
Gain : more than 90dB
Amplifying Characteristics : Logarithmic Amplifier
Overall Noise Figure 7.5dB ( Typical)
Tuning Manual/AUTO
11 12
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 11.SPECIFICATION > 11.13 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-2103-6)
SCANNER UNITNKE-2103-6
Dimension Height 458 x Swing Circle 1910 (mm)
Mass Approx. 40kg
Polarization Horizontal
Directional Characteristics Horizontal beam width : 1.2
Vertical beam width : 20
Side lobe Level : below -26dB (within +/-10)
: below -30dB (outside +/-10)
Revolution Approx.24rpm
Power Supply for Motor DC24V
Maximum Wind Velocity 51.5m/s (100knots)
Transmitting Frequency 9410 30MHz
Transmitting Power 10kW
Transmitting Tube Magnetron[MAF1565N]
TX Pulse width / Repetition SP10.08s/2250Hz
Frequency MP10.25s/1700Hz MP20.5s/1200Hz
LP10.8s/750HzLP21.0s/650Hz
0.1250.250.5NM SP1
0.75NM SP1/MP1
1.5NM SP1/MP1/MP2
3NM MP1/MP2LP1
6NM MP1/MP2/LP1/LP2
12NM MP1/MP2/LP1/LP2
24NM MP2/LP1/LP2
48NM LP2
96NM LP2
Modulator Solid State Modulator Circuit
Duplexer Circulator + Diode Limiter
Front End Module Built-in
Intermediate Frequency Amplifier Intermediate Frequency : 60MHz
Band Width : 20/6/3MHz
Gain : more than 90dB
Amplifying Characteristics : Logarithmic Amplifier
Overall Noise Figure 7.5dB ( Typical)
Tuning Manual/AUTO
11
11 13
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 11.SPECIFICATION > 11.14 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-2103-6HS)
SCANNER UNITNKE-2103-6HS
Dimension Height 458 x Swing Circle 1910 (mm)
Mass Approx. 40kg
Polarization Horizontal
Directional Characteristics Horizontal beam width : 1.2
Vertical beam width : 20
Side lobe Level : below -26dB (within +/-10)
: below -30dB (outside +/-10)
Revolution Approx.48rpm
Power Supply for Motor DC24V
Maximum Wind Velocity 51.5m/s (100knots)
Transmitting Frequency 9410 30MHz
Transmitting Power 10kW
Transmitting Tube Magnetron[MAF1565N]
TX Pulse width / Repetition SP10.08s/2250Hz
Frequency MP10.25s/1700Hz MP20.5s/1200Hz
LP10.8s/750HzLP21.0s/650Hz
0.1250.250.5NM SP1
0.75NM SP1/MP1
1.5NM SP1/MP1/MP2
3NM MP1/MP2LP1
6NM MP1/MP2/LP1/LP2
12NM MP1/MP2/LP1/LP2
24NM MP2/LP1/LP2
48NM LP2
96NM LP2
Modulator Solid State Modulator Circuit
Duplexer Circulator + Diode Limiter
Front End Module Built-in
Intermediate Frequency Amplifier Intermediate Frequency : 60MHz
Band Width : 20/6/3MHz
Gain : more than 90dB
Amplifying Characteristics : Logarithmic Amplifier
Overall Noise Figure 7.5dB ( Typical)
Tuning Manual/AUTO
11 14
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 11.SPECIFICATION > 11.15 TRANSMITTER RECEIVER UNIT (NTG-3230)
11
11 15
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 11.SPECIFICATION > 11.16 TRANSMITTER RECEIVER UNIT (NTG-3225)
11 16
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 11.SPECIFICATION > 11.17 DISPLAY UNIT (NCD-4990)
11
GPS IEC61162-1(NMEA0183)
LOG
GYRO
AIS IEC61162-2
Inter Switch (OPTION)
Radar Buoy
External Alarm output
11 17
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 11.SPECIFICATION > 11.17 DISPLAY UNIT (NCD-4990)
Receivable Signalii
Receive capability NAV1/NAV2/LOG/ALM/AIS/HDG at TB4501
Port: COM DSub-9pin
Navigation equipment Longitude/Latitude GGA>RMC>RMA>GNS>GLL
IEC61162-1/2
Waypoint RMB>BWC(BWR)
COG/SOG RMC RMA VTG
SPEED VBW
Day/Time information ZDA
Alarm acknowledge ACK
Rate of Turn ROT
Rudder RSA
Bearing signal GYRO-SYNC 360x, 180x, 90x, 36x(GYRO I/F)
GYRO-STEP 360x, 180x, 90x, 36x(GYRO I/F)
IEC61162-2 38400bps THS>HDTover 40Hz
(HDG port at terminal board TB4501)
IEC61162-1iii HDT>HDG>HDM>VHW
(HDG port at terminal board TB4501)
Speed signal LOG-SYNC 360x, 180x, 90x, 30x(GYRO I/F)
LOG-PULSE 800, 400, 200, 100(GYRO I/F)
External event mark Contact input (EVENT port at terminal board TB4601)
Radar buoy Negative input (RBVD port at terminal board TB4401)
Depth IEC61162-1/JRC DPT>DBS>DBT>DBK,
JRC format
Water temperature IEC61162-1/JRC MTW, JRC format
Tendency IEC61162-1/JRC CUR, JRC format
Wind IEC61162-1 MWV>MWD
AIS IEC61162-2 VDM,VDO (AIS port at terminal
board TB4601 )
Acknowledge Contact input (SYSACK, ARPAACK, PWRACK port
at terminal board TB4601)
Sendable Signal
Slave video Radar video: TIY, VD, BP(2048p), BZ
(Terminal board TB4401)
Send capability NAV1/NAV2/ALM/ARPA/JARPA port at TB4501
Port MNT port at TB4601
COM at DSub-9pin
Navigation information Radar system data RSD
IEC61162-1/2
Own ship data OSD
Tracking target data TTM,TLL,TTD,TLB,JRC-ARPA
AIS target data TTM,TLL,TTD,TLB
Alarm ALR
Auto pilot APB
Bearing of destination BOD
Latitude/Longitude data GGA,GLL,RMC
Waypoint RMB,BWC
COG/SOG VTG
Cross track error XTE
11 18
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 11.SPECIFICATION > 11.17 DISPLAY UNIT (NCD-4990)
ii. The Speed measuring accuracy of speed sensor shall confirm to IMO Resolution MSC.96(72).
The measuring accuracy of GPS shall confirm to IMO Resolution MSC.112(73).
11
11 19
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 11.SPECIFICATION > 11.18 Target Tracking Function
11 20
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 11.SPECIFICATION > 11.19 AIS FUNCTION
11 21
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 11.SPECIFICATION > 11.20 PERFORMANCE MONITOR (NJU-84)
11 22
Appendix A
NQE-3141 Interswitch Unit
A.1 OVERVIEW
A.1.1 Overview
Interswitch NQE-3141 is equipment that enables free changeover between radar
display units installed on the bridge and antenna units having different
characteristics.
If display unit is turned off or malfunctioned, the scanner unit can be controlled by
other display unit.
PRF Fine Tuning Section 3.8.3 "Set Scanner Unit (TXRX Setting)"
A
A 1
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > A.NQE-3141 Interswitch Unit > A.1 OVERVIEW
Connected
Scanner
Unit
Connection
Mode
Connection Switch
The upper stand indicates the number of the connected scanner unit.
i. When Slave is selected, transmission / standby and pulse length cannot be changed.
The available range is also limited.
A 2
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > A.NQE-3141 Interswitch Unit > A.2 INTERSWITCH OPERATION
Follow the flowchart below to change the current interswitch connection pattern.
A
A 3
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > A.NQE-3141 Interswitch Unit > A.2 INTERSWITCH OPERATION
Procedures
1) Press the [TX/STBY] key to stop transmitting.
The transmission standby state will be placed.
Exit
1) Left-click the 0.Exit button.
The Inter Switch Menu will close.
Current
connection
status
a. Connection
pattern
Display unit
in operation
b. Set c.Exit
A 4
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > A.NQE-3141 Interswitch Unit > A.2 INTERSWITCH OPERATION
a. Connection pattern
If this button is clicked, the connection pattern is selected.
b. Set
If this button is clicked, the change of connection is determined.
c. Exit
If this button is clicked, the Inter Switch Menu is closed .
If only 2 display units are installed but the interswitch is set for 3
i or more display units, the Inter Switch Menu for 3 or more
display units will appear.
a. Connected
scanner unit
b. Display unit
connected as
master
c. Display unit
connected as
slave
f. Set
d. Name
e. File
g. Exit
Operations
A
A 5
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > A.NQE-3141 Interswitch Unit > A.2 INTERSWITCH OPERATION
If this button is clicked in the naming a display unit or scanner unit mode , the name input
window is opened .
d. Name
If this button is clicked, set to the display or scanner unit rename mode.
e. File Operations
If this button is clicked, the File Operations menu is opened.
f. Set
If this button is clicked, the change of connection is determined.
g. Exit
If this button is clicked, the Inter Switch Menu is closed .
Procedures
1) Open the Inter Switch menu (with 2 Display Units).
2) Move the cursor onto the Connection pattern (see Section A.2.2 "Inter
Switch Menu" and Section a. "Connection pattern") to be changed , and left-click.
The connection pattern will be selected, and 3. Set (Section b. "Set") will blink.
A 6
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > A.NQE-3141 Interswitch Unit > A.2 INTERSWITCH OPERATION
Procedures
1) Open the Inter Switch Menu (with 3 or More Display Units).
2) Move the cursor onto the display unit (Section b. "Display unit connected as
master" or Section c. "Display unit connected as slave") to be changed , and left-
click.
The selected display unit will be highlighted.
If the change destination is empty, control will move and 3. Set will blink.
A
A 7
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > A.NQE-3141 Interswitch Unit > A.2 INTERSWITCH OPERATION
Procedures
1) Open the Inter Switch Menu (with 3 or More Display Units).
Procedures
1) Open the Inter Switch Menu (with 3 or More Display Units).
A 8
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > A.NQE-3141 Interswitch Unit > A.2 INTERSWITCH OPERATION
Procedures
1) Open the Inter Switch Menu (with 3 or More Display Units).
Procedures
1) Open the Inter Switch Menu (with 3 or More Display Units).
3) Move the cursor to the display unit (Section b. "Display unit connected as
or scanner unit (Section a.
master" or Section c. "Display unit connected as slave")
"Connected scanner unit") to be renamed , and left-click.
he Input IND Name or the Input TXRX Name window will appear.
The selected display unit or antenna unit will be renamed when the new name is input.
A
A 9
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > A.NQE-3141 Interswitch Unit > A.3 REFERENCE
A.3 REFERENCE
The wait time is necessary for protecting the electronic tubes that emit radio
waves.
This is because internal processing still needs some preparation time upon
completion of connection pattern change. Let several seconds pass between
connection pattern change operations.
A slave display unit cannot control tune. Tune is controlled by the master display
unit. Slave is shown in the transmitter pulse length (upper left of the display).
Range change for a slave display unit is limited by the range and pulse length /
repetition frequency of the master display unit. As a rule, a greater range than the
range of the master display unit cannot be set for a slave display unit. However, if
the transmitter pulse length of a slave display unit is identical to the master
display unit's and the repetition frequency is within the master display unit's, a
greater range than the master display unit's can be selected for the slave display
unit. When the master display unit narrows the range or changes the transmitter
A 10
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > A.NQE-3141 Interswitch Unit > A.3 REFERENCE
pulse length, the range of the slave display unit may be forcibly changed. In this
case, Master Range CHG is shown in the alarm indication (lower right of the
display), and the alarm sounds.
The settings of the DIP switches SW11 to SW13 are shown below.
SW 11 SW 13 SW 12
ON
OFF
Unused
Description 1, 2
Set the switch to OFF in
Unused ON
normal state.
Unused OFF
Master/slave setting
Description 3
Set the switch to ON if the
slave ISW PCB is selected in Slave ON
extension mode.
Master OFF
Description 4
Set the switch to OFF if the
number of connected display Extension mode ON
units is four or less .
Normal mode OFF
A
A 11
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > A.NQE-3141 Interswitch Unit > A.3 REFERENCE
ON
OFF
Radar connection settings
3) SW13 (unused)
1 2 3 4
ON
OFF
Before the DIP switches of the interswitch circuit can be set, the
interswitch breaker must be turned off in order to ensure safety
operation.
A 12
Appendix B
DRAWINGS
DRAWINGS
B.1 Interconnection Diagram of Display Unit ........................................... B-1
B.1.1 NCD-4990 ........................................................................................ B-2
B.1.2 NCD-4990 w/NBA-5135 ................................................................... B-3
B.1.3 NCD-4990T ...................................................................................... B-4
B.1.4 NCD-4990T w/NBA-5135 ................................................................ B-5
B.1.5 NWZ-170-R ...................................................................................... B-6
B.1.6 NWZ-170-RT .................................................................................... B-7
B.1.7 NCE-5163-R ..................................................................................... B-8
B.1.8 NCE-5163-RT ................................................................................... B-9
B.1.9 NBA-5135 ...................................................................................... B-10
B.2 Power System Diagram of Display Unit ........................................... B-11
B.3 Signal Flow Diagram of Display Unit ................................................ B-12
B.4 Primary Power System Diagram ....................................................... B-13
B.5 Block Diagram of Scanner Unit ........................................................ B-14
B.5.1 NKE-2103 ...................................................................................... B-15
B.5.2 NKE-2254 ...................................................................................... B-16
B.5.3 NKE-1125/NKE-1130 ..................................................................... B-17
B.5.4 NKE-1129, NTG-3225 / NKE-1139, NTG-3230 ............................. B-18
B.6 Interconnection Diagram of Scanner Unit ....................................... B-19
B.6.1 NKE-2103 ...................................................................................... B-20
B.6.2 NKE-2254 ...................................................................................... B-21
B.6.3 NKE-1125 (AC110V) ...................................................................... B-22
B.6.4 NKE-1125 (AC220V) ...................................................................... B-23
B.6.5 NKE-1129 (AC110V) ...................................................................... B-24
B.6.6 NKE-1129 (AC220V) ...................................................................... B-25
B.6.7 NTG-3225 ...................................................................................... B-26
B.6.8 NKE-1130 (AC110V) ...................................................................... B-27
B.6.9 NKE-1130 (AC220V) ...................................................................... B-28
B.6.10 NKE-1139 (AC110V) ...................................................................... B-29
B.6.11 NKE-1139 (AC220V) ...................................................................... B-30
B.6.12 NTG-3230 ...................................................................................... B-31
B.7 Terminal Board Connection Diagram ............................................... B-32
B.7.1 JMA-9110-6XA/JMA-9110-6XAH .................................................. B-33
B.7.2 JMA-9110-6XA/JMA-9110-6XAH (desktop) ................................. B-34
B.7.3 JMA-9122-6XAH ............................................................................ B-35
B.7.4 JMA-9122-6XAH (desktop) ........................................................... B-36
B.7.5 JMA-9122-6XA/9XA ...................................................................... B-37
B.7.6 JMA-9123-7XA/9XA ...................................................................... B-38
B.7.7 JMA-9132-SA ................................................................................ B-39
B.7.8 JMA-9133-SA ................................................................................ B-40
B.7.9 NCD-4990T .................................................................................... B-41
B.8 GYRO I/F ............................................................................................. B-42
B.9 Inter Switch Unit ................................................................................. B-44
B.9.1 Terminal Board Connection Diagram ......................................... B-44
B.9.2 Interconnection Diagram ............................................................. B-46
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > B.DRAWINGS > B.1 Interconnection Diagram of Display Unit
B
B 1
MONITOR UNIT
NWZ-170-R
*OPTION OPERATION UNIT
(USER SUPPLY) NCE-5163-R
*PS/2 MOUSE/TRK BAL L
LCD PANEL (U SER SUPPL Y)
OPERATION OPERATION
CML-799L CIRCUIT B CIRCUIT A
CCK-974 CCK-973
(7WSRD0002C) PC620 PC610
A1
7P 14P 15P
J6201 J6101 J6102
SP1
CCK -972A PC710
OPERATION
CIRCUIT
(U SER SU PPLY )
8P
J711
CCK-976
6P 6P 30P
J 6410
PC640
J6409 J 6401
AC 2m 5ZCG H 00285 (N WZ-170-R)
B 2
28P
J 4406
ARPA PROCESS
D VI-D CIRCUIT
64P
J4404 9P TO O PU
8P
J 4407 CDC-1186D *OPTION B101
J4309 30P
R J-45 64P J4311
J4501
PC450
3P
50P J4313 TO SUB O PU
J 4408 30P
C F-c ard
B102 J4312
3P
RADAR PROCESS
11P
J4314
GYRO INTERFACE
INTERSWITCH UNIT
TB914 TO TRU
CIRCUIT CIRCUIT 15P
CH1 26P
14P
TB4101
NQE-3141-2A
TB913 J4306
CMJ-462E TO ISW
CDC-1324 PC420
11P
TB912
26P
J4307
26P
TB4201
CH2
PC440
>
AC O UT2 2P
15P
64P 64P 64P 2P
B.DRAWINGS
POWER SUPPLY
IN 2P
TB905
TERMINAL BOARD TB4401
PC900
SCA NN ER MOTOR
U AC O UT2 CQD-2097 TO SEN SOR
CBD-1661
20P W 401 H -7ZCRD 1339 22P
NCD-4990
PC430
POW ER V 50P TB4501
J4301
W 50P
64P 64P 64P 64P J4105 TO A LAR M SYSTEM
J4101 J 4102 J4104 J4103 22P
W 402 H -7ZCRD 1339 TB4601
>
50P
18P
J4302
MOTHERBOARD 50P
TO G YRO
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual
J4106 6P
TB4701
R ED W 403 H -7ZCRD 1339
CQC-1192
20P 50P
WHT 8P
AC IN
J4108 J4303
BL U 50P T O L OG
PC410 J4107 12P
TB4801
18P
J4304
TO PC
9P
8P J4310
J4305
R ED 4351A07335 FILTER
U U
BL U
W OU T IN W AC 100-115V 50/60H z
B.1.1 WHT
V V
AC 220-240V 50/60H z
NCD-4990
JMA-9122-6/9XA,JMA-9123-7/9XA,JMA-9132-SA,JMA-9133-SA
Interconnection diagram of DISPLAY UNIT type NCD-4990(self standing)
B
MONITOR UNIT
NWZ-170-R
*OPTION OPERATION UNIT
B.1 Interconnection Diagram of Display Unit
(USER SUPPLY)
*PS/2 MOUSE/TRK BAL L
NCE-5163-R
LCD PANEL (U SER SUPPL Y)
OPERATION OPERATION
CML-799L CIRCUIT B
CCK-974
CIRCUIT A
CCK-973
(7WSRD0002C) PC620 PC610
A1
7P 14P 15P
J6201 J6101 J6102
SP1
CCK -972A PC710
(U SER SU PPLY )
8P
J711
8P
H-7ZCR D1328 6P 6P 2P 7P 14P 14P 15P
J 6411 J6408 J6406 J6405 J6404 J6403 J6402
9P 2m H -7ZCRD 1329A (N W Z-170-R ) OPERATION CIRCUIT D
CCK-976
6P 6P 30P
J 6410
PC640
J6409 J 6401
>
AIS PROCESS
NDC-1399-9 15P
J 4409
64P
J4403
CIRCUIT
V GA
CDC-1325 2m H -7ZC RD 1337 (N CE-5163-R )
15P
J 4405
64P
J4601
PC460 JR C SU PPLY
V GA
B 3
28P
J 4406
ARPA PROCESS
CIRCUIT
>
D VI-D
WHT
RED
64P
J4404 9P TO OPU
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual
8P
U V FG J 4407 CDC-1186D *OPTION B101
J4309 30P
J4311
R J-45 64P
PC450
NCD-4990 w/NBA-5135
J4501
TB522 50P
3P
J4313 TO SUB OPU
AC IN J 4408
B102 30P
C F-c ard J4312
3P
RADAR PROCESS
11P
J4314
GYRO INTERFACE
W406 H-7ZCRD 1342A
TB914
INTERSWITCH UNIT
TO TRU
CIRCUIT CIRCUIT 15P
CH1 26P
14P
TB4101
CONVERTER UNIT
NQE-3141-2A
TB913 J4306
CMJ-462E TO ISW
CDC-1324 PC420 11P
TB912
26P
J4307
26P
TB4201
CH2
AC OUT2 2P
PC440
NBA-5135
15P
64P 64P 64P 2P
TB911 T O EXT-RA DAR
AC/DC
POWER SUPPLY
IN 2P
TERMINAL BOARD TB4401
PC900 TB905
R ED
U AC OUT2 CQD-2097 TO SEN SOR
CBD-1661
WHT 20P W 401 H -7ZCRD 1339 22P
V
W
50P
J4301 PC430 TB4501
50P
64P 64P 64P 64P J4105 TO A LAR M SYSTEM
J4101 J 4102 J4104 J4103
TB521 W 402 H -7ZCRD 1339
22P
TB4601
50P
DC24V OUT 18P
J4302
+ FG
MOTHERBOARD 50P
J4106
TO G YRO
6P
TB4701
R ED W 403 H -7ZCRD 1339
CQC-1192
20P 50P
WHT 8P
AC IN
J4108 J4303
BL U 50P T O L OG
PC410 J4107 12P
TB4801
18P
J4304
SCAN NER MO TOR TO PC
POWER D C24V 9P
8P J4310
J4305
R ED 4351A07335 FIL TER
U U
BL U
W OU T IN W AC 100-115V 50/60H z
B.1.2 WHT
V V
AC 220-240V 50/60H z
NCD-4990
JMA-9110-6XA,JMA-9110-6XAH,JMA-9122-6XAH
Interconnection diagram of DISPLAY UNIT type NCD-4990(self standing)
MONITOR UNIT
NWZ-170-RT
*OPTION OPERATION UNIT
(USER SUPPLY)
*PS/2 MOUSE/TRK BAL L
NCE-5163-RT
LCD PANEL (U SER SUPPL Y)
OPERATION OPERATION
CML-799L CIRCUIT B
CCK-974
CIRCUIT A
CCK-973
(7WSRD0002C) PC620 PC610
A1
7P 14P 15P
J6201 J6101 J6102
SP1
CCK -972A PC710
OPERATION
CIRCUIT
(U SER SU PPLY )
8P
J711
CCK-976
6P 6P 30P
J 6410
PC640
J6409 J 6401
AC 5m 5ZCG H 00364 (N WZ-170-RT)
B 4
28P
J 4406
ARPA PROCESS
D VI-D CIRCUIT
64P
J4404 9P TO OPU
8P
J 4407 CDC-1186D *OPTION B101
J4309 30P
J4311
R J-45 64P
PC450
J4501 3P
50P J4313 TO SUB OPU
J 4408 30P
C F-c ard
B102 J4312
3P
RADAR PROCESS
11P
J4314
GYRO INTERFACE TB914
INTERSWITCH UNIT
TO TRU
CIRCUIT CIRCUIT 15P
CH1 26P
14P
TB4101
NQE-3141-2A
TB913 J4306
CMJ-462E TO ISW
CDC-1324 PC420 11P
TB912
26P
J4307
26P
TB4201
CH2
AC OUT2 2P
PC440
>
15P
64P 64P 64P 2P
TB911 T O EXT-RA DAR
B.DRAWINGS
POWER SUPPLY
IN 2P
TERMINAL BOARD TB4401
PC900 TB905
CQD-2097
NCD-4990T
CBD-1661
SCAN NER MOTO R 20P W 401 H -7ZCRD 1339 22P
POW ER
V
W
50P
J4301 PC430 TB4501
50P
64P 64P 64P 64P J4105 TO A LAR M SYSTEM
J4101 J 4102 J4104 J4103 22P
W 402 H -7ZCRD 1339 TB4601
50P
18P
>
J4302
MOTHERBOARD 50P
J4106
TO G YRO
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual
6P
TB4701
R ED W 403 H -7ZCRD 1339
CQC-1192
WHT 20P 50P
8P
AC IN
J4108 J4303
BL U 50P T O L OG
PC410 J4107 12P
TB4801
1 2 3 18P
J4304
TB 402 TO PC
9P
1 2 3 8P J4310
J4305
R ED
WH T
BL U
RED
U 4351A07335 FIL TER U
BL U
W OU T IN W AC 100-115V 50/60H z
B.1.3 W 405 H -7ZC RD1341A WHT
V V
AC 220-240V 50/60H z
NCD-4990T
JMA-9122-6/9XA,JMA-9123-7/9XA,JMA-9132-SA,JMA-9133-SA
Interconnection diagram of DISPLAY UNIT type NCD-4990T(desktop)
B
MONITOR UNIT
NWZ-170-RT
*OPTION OPERATION UNIT
B.1 Interconnection Diagram of Display Unit
(USER SUPPLY)
*PS/2 MOUSE/TRK BAL L
NCE-5163-RT
LCD PANEL (U SER SUPPL Y)
OPERATION OPERATION
CML-799L CIRCUIT B
CCK-974
CIRCUIT A
CCK-973
(7WSRD0002C) PC620 PC610
A1
7P 14P 15P
J6201 J6101 J6102
SP1
CCK -972A PC710
(U SER SU PPLY )
8P
J711
8P
H-7ZCR D1328 6P 6P 2P 7P 14P 14P 15P
J 6411 J6408 J6406 J6405 J6404 J6403 J6402
9P 5m H -7ZCRD 1330A (N W Z-170-R T) OPERATION CIRCUIT D
CCK-976
6P 6P 30P
J 6410
PC640
J6409 J 6401
>
AIS PROCESS
NDC-1399-9T 15P
J 4409
64P
J4403
CIRCUIT
V GA
CDC-1325 5m H -7ZC RD 1338 (N CE-5163-R T)
15P
J 4405
64P
J4601
PC460 JR C SU PPLY
V GA
B 5
BL K
28P
ARPA PROCESS
WH T
J 4406
G RN
CIRCUIT
>
D VI-D
64P
J4404 9P TO OPU
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual
8P
NCD-4990T w/NBA-5135
C F-c ard
B102 J4312
3P
RADAR PROCESS
11P
J4314
GYRO INTERFACE TB914
INTERSWITCH UNIT
TO TRU
CIRCUIT CIRCUIT 15P
CH1 26P
14P
TB4101
CONVERTER UNIT
NQE-3141-2A
TB913 J4306
CMJ-462E TO ISW
CDC-1324 PC420 11P
TB912
26P
J4307
26P
TB4201
CH2
AC OUT2 2P
PC440
NBA-5135
15P
64P 64P 64P 2P
TB911 T O EXT-RA DAR
AC/DC
POWER SUPPLY
IN 2P
TERMINAL BOARD TB4401
PC900 TB905
WHT
U AC OUT2 CQD-2097 TO SEN SOR
CBD-1661
B LK 20P W 401 H -7ZCRD 1339 22P
G RN
V
W
50P
J4301 PC430 TB4501
50P
64P 64P 64P 64P J4105 TO A LAR M SYSTEM
J4101 J 4102 J4104 J4103
TB521 W 402 H -7ZCRD 1339
22P
TB4601
50P
DC24V OUT 18P
J4302
+ FG
MOTHERBOARD 50P
J4106
TO G YRO
6P
TB4701
GR N R ED W 403 H -7ZCRD 1339
CQC-1192
WHT 20P 50P
W408 H -7ZC RD 1344A 8P
AC IN
J4108 J4303
BL U 50P T O L OG
PC410
GR N J4107 12P
TB4801
1 2 3 1 2 3 18P
J4304
TB401 TB 402 TO PC
9P
1 2 3 1 2 3 8P J4310
J4305
R ED
WH T
BL U
RED
U 4351A07335 FIL TER U
BL U
W OU T IN W AC 100-115V 50/60H z
B.1.4 SCAN NER MO TOR
B.1.5 NWZ-170-R
CML-799L
(H-7WSRD0002C)
LCD
CCK-972A
PC710
FAN
RGB DVI ALM
AC 1 00V
24 0V
BRILL J7101
AC 2m VM0301-VM0303B2M
DVI 2m H-7ZCRD1345
9P 2m H-7ZCRD1329A
FL1
8P
H-7ZCRD1328
CQD-2097A
CDC-1324
CBD-1661
OUTLET
J4406
J4309
CML-764-R (NWZ-170-R)
B 6
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > B.DRAWINGS > B.1 Interconnection Diagram of Display Unit
B.1.6 NWZ-170-RT
CML-799L
(H-7WSRD0002C)
LCD
CCK-972A
PC710
FAN
RGB DVI ALM
AC 1 00V
24 0V
BRILL J7101
AC 5m VM0301-VM0303B5M
DVI 5m H-7ZCRD1346
9P 5m H-7ZCRD1330A
FL1
8P
H-7ZCRD1328
CDC-1324
CBD-1661
CQD-2097A
OUTLET
J4406
J4309
CML-764-RT (NWZ-170-RT)
B
B 7
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > B.DRAWINGS > B.1 Interconnection Diagram of Display Unit
B.1.7 NCE-5163-R
OPERATION UNIT
NCE-5163-R
OPERATION OPERATION
CIRCUIT B CIRCUIT A
CCK-974 CCK-973
PC620 PC610
A1
7P 14P 15P
J6201 J6101 J6102
SP1
W63 H-7ZCRD1333A
W62 H-7ZCRD1332
W64 H-7ZCRD1334
W65 H-7ZCRD1335
OPERATION CIRCUIT D
CCK -976
PC 640
6P 6P 2P 30P
J6410 J6409 J6407 J6401
FL1
W67 2m H-7ZCRD1337
CMD-996-R (NCE-5163-R)
B 8
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > B.DRAWINGS > B.1 Interconnection Diagram of Display Unit
B.1.8 NCE-5163-RT
OPERATION UNIT
NCE-5163-RT
OPERATION OPERATION
CIRCUIT B CIRCUIT A
CCK-974 CCK-973
PC620 PC610
A1
7P 14P 15P
J6201 J6101 J6102
SP1
W63 H-7ZCRD1333A
W62 H-7ZCRD1332
W64 H-7ZCRD1334
W65 H-7ZCRD1335
OPERATION CIRCUIT D
CCK -976
PC 640
6P 6P 2P 30P
J6410 J6409 J6407 J6401
FL1
W68 5m H-7ZCRD1338
CMD-996-RT (NCE-5163-RT)
B
B 9
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > B.DRAWINGS > B.1 Interconnection Diagram of Display Unit
B.1.9 NBA-5135
W6 H-7ZCRD1499
1 2 3 1 2 3
1
TB521
2 3
FS1 1
TB 522
2 3
WHT
W2 H-7ZCRD1496 W5 H-7ZCRD1499
Twisted
W4 H-7ZCRD1498
RED WHT
BLK
U V + + + - - -
FL1 A1
LF-210 AES300-24B
W3 H-7ZCRD1497
u FG v N L FG
BLK
Twisted
BLK
CBD-1684A (NBA-5135)
B 10
B
Power System Diagram of Display Unit
MONITOR UNIT
NWZ-170-R
B.2 Power System Diagram of Display Unit
+5V
CIRCUIT
(U SER SU PPLY )
6P 6P 30P
J 6410
PC640
J6409 J 6401
B.DRAWINGS
B 11
J 4405 J4601 JR C SU PPLY
JMA-9122-6XAH V GA
only 28P
ARPA PROCESS
DC+24V
>
J 4406
D VI-D CIRCUIT
WHT
RED
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual
64P
3.3V
J4404 9P TO OPU
8P
U V FG J 4407 CDC-1186D *OPTION B101
J4309 30P
J4311
R J-45 64P
PC450
U,V +48V
J4501
TB522 50P
3P
TO SUB OPU
J4313
AC IN J 4408
B102
30P
AC100-115V C F-c ard
3P (to SCANNER
J4312
UNIT)
RADAR PROCESS
AC220-240V 11P
J4314
GYRO INTERFACE
W 406 H-7ZCRD 1342A
TB914 TO TRU
INTERSWITCH UNIT
50/60Hz,1
CIRCUIT CIRCUIT 15P CH1 26P
14P
TB4101
CONVERTER UNIT
TB913 J4306
NQE-3141-2
CMJ-462E TO ISW
CDC-1324 PC420
11P
TB912
26P
J4307
26P
TB4201
AC OUT2 2P
PC440 CH2
NBA-5135
DC+24V
15P
64P 64P 64P 2P
TB911 T O EXT-RA DAR
AC/DC
POWER SUPPLY
IN
3.3V,5V, 2P
TB905
TERMINAL BOARD TB4401
PC900
12V,-12V CQD-2097
R ED
U AC OUT2 TO SEN SOR
CBD-1661
W HT 20P 22P
PC430
V W401 H -7ZCRD 1339
50P TB4501
W
64P 64P 64P 64P
50P
J4105
J4301
P+5V TO A LAR M SYSTEM
J4101 J 4102 J4104 J4103
TB521 22P
DC24V OUT U,V 18P
W402 H -7ZCRD 1339
50P
J4302
TB4601
+ FG
AC100-115V MOTHERBOARD 50P
J4106
TO G YRO
3.3V,5V,12V,-12V
6P
AC220-240V
TB4701
50/60Hz,1R ED W403 H -7ZCRD 1339
+48V,DC+24V 50P
20P
CQC-1192
3.3V,5V,12V,-12V
W HT 8P
AC IN
J4303
+24V
J4108 T O L OG
BL U 50P
PC410
12P
J4107
TB4701
SCAN NER MOTOR
18P
3.3V,5V,12V,-12V
J4304
TO PC
+48V,DC+24V
B.2 POWER D C24V
INPUT VOLTAGE
SELECT SWITCH
R ED
BL U
W HT
U
W OU T
V
U
V
AC 100-115V 50/60H z
AC 220-240V 50/60H z
8P
J4305
NCD-4990
9P
J4310
Power supply system diagram of DISPLAY UNIT type NCD-4990(self standing)
MONITOR UNIT
NWZ-170-R
OPERATION UNIT
Signal Flow Diagram of Display Unit
*OPTION
(USER SUPPLY)
*PS/2 MOUSE/TRK BAL L
NCE-5163-R
(U SER SUPPL Y)
OPERATION OPERATION
LCD PANEL CIRCUIT B CIRCUIT A
CML-799 CCK-974 CCK-973
PC620 PC610
A1
7P 14P 15P
J6201 J6101 J6102
SP1
CCK -972 PC710
OPERATION
CIRCUIT
PS/2
(U SER SU PPLY ) Audio Power SW KEY matrix
8P I/F I/F Encoder
6P 6P 30P
J 6410
PC640
J6409 J 6401
AC 2m 5ZCG H00285 (N WZ-170-R )
B 12
J 4405 J4601 JR C SU PPLY
V GA
Serial
De28P
gital Video Inte rface ARPA PROCESS
J 4406
D VI-D CIRCUIT
WHT
RED
TB914 TO TRU
INTERSWITCH UNIT
Se rial
CIRCUIT CIRCUIT 15P CH1 26P
14P
TB4101
CONVERTER UNIT
TB913 J4306
NQE-3141-2
CMJ-462E TO ISW Rada r video,
CDC-1324 PC420
11P
TB912
Rada r video, 26P
J4307
26P
TB4201
Trigger,Rotatio
Trigger,Rotation
PC440 CH2
>
AC OUT2 2P
Radar video,
NBA-5135
15P
64P
Serial,GPIO
64P 2P Radar video,
Trigger,Rotation 64P TB911
B.DRAWINGS
POWER SUPPLY
IN
2P
TB905
TERMINAL BOARD TB4401
PC900
R ED
U AC OUT2 CQD-2097 TO SEN SOR
Serial
CBD-1661
W HT 20P Rada r Hvideo, 22P
PC430
V W401 -7ZCRD 1339
50P TB4501
W 50P
Trigger,Rotation J4301
64P 64P 64P 64P J4105 TO A LAR M SYSTEM Dry Contact
J4101 J 4102 J4104 J4103
TB521 W402 H -7ZCRD 1339
22P
TB4601
50P
DC24V OUT 18P
GYRO
>
J4302
+ FG
MOTHERBOARD 50P
J4106
Serial,GPIO TO G YRO
(STEP/SYN
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual
6P
TB4701
R ED W403 H -7ZCRD 1339
50P LOG
W HT 8P
20P
CQC-1192 GYRO/LOG
(PULSE/SYN
AC IN
J4108 J4303
50P T O L OG
BL U
PC410
12P
J4107
Power supply Control 18P
TB4701
Power supply Fa n alarm J4304
SCAN NER MOTOR TO PC
Serial
B.3 POWER D C24V
R ED
BL U
W HT
U
W OU T
V
U
V
AC 100-115V 50/60H z
AC 220-240V 50/60H z
Powe r supply Control
Powe r supply Fan alarm
8P
J4305
NCD-4990
9P
J4310
Signal flow diagram of DISPLAY UNIT type NCD-4990
B
OVER VOLTAGE
B.4 Primary Power System Diagram
PROTECTION
100V: 148+/-2V
220V: 295+/-2V
AC100-115V
AC220-240V
Primary Power System Diagram
B 13
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual
SCANNER
MOTOR
POWER RADAR PROCESS CIRCUIT = 2.2A(typ)
AC100/230V +3.3V ARPA PROCESS CIRCUIT = 0.1A(typ)
SCAN NER MOTOR
1/1,3 POWER AIS PROCESS CIRCUIT = 0.1(typ)
TERMINAL BOARD = 0.2A(typ)
POWER CONTROL
CIRCUIT
+12V RADAR PROCESS CIRCUIT = 0.1A(typ)
TERMINAL BOARD = 0.4A(typ)
-12V RADAR PROCESS CIRCUIT = 0.1A(typ)
TERMINAL BOARD = 0.1A(typ)
FAN ALM POWER CONTROL
B.4 BATTRY
DC24V
OPERATION UNIT = 0.1A
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > B.DRAWINGS > B.5 Block Diagram of Scanner Unit
B 14
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > B.DRAWINGS > B.5 Block Diagram of Scanner Unit
B.5.1 NKE-2103
SLOT ANTENNA
FILTER
MAG DIODE
V101 LIMITER
RECEIVER
VIDEO
AMP
MH
GENERATOR
INTERFACE
POWER CIRCUIT
SUPPLY AVR
CIRCUIT
DC +24V
MOTOR CONTROL
SAFETY SWITCH DC +24V
Speed control POWER S101
PC1501
B
B 15
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > B.DRAWINGS > B.5 Block Diagram of Scanner Unit
B.5.2 NKE-2254
SLOT ANTENNA
FILTER
MAG DIODE
V101 LIMITER
RECEIVER
VIDEO
AMP
MH
GENERATOR
POWER
INTERFACE CIRCUIT
SUPPLY AVR PC1101
CIRCUIT
DC +24V
MOTOR CONTROL
SAFETY SWITCH DC +24V
Speed control POWER S101
PC1501
B 16
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > B.DRAWINGS > B.5 Block Diagram of Scanner Unit
B.5.3 NKE-1125/NKE-1130
SLOT ANTENNA
ERROR
MOTOR
FILTER
DRIVER
PC1501
MAG DIODE
V101 LIMITER
RECEIVER
VIDEO
AMP
MH
GENERATOR
POWER
INTERFACE CIRCUIT
SUPPLY AVR PC1101
CIRCUIT
AC100-115/220-240V
MOTOR RELAY SAFETY SWITCH 50/60Hz,1
PC1201 S101
B
B 17
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > B.DRAWINGS > B.5 Block Diagram of Scanner Unit
SLOT ANTENNA
MOTOR
MOTOR ROTARY A,B,Z
DRIVER ENCODER
B101 JOINT
PC1501
AC100/110/220/230V
50/60Hz,1
ERROR
RECEIVER
PULSE Tune Control
TRANS RF AMP
DUMMY
LOAD Receiver
Bandwidth
SWITCHING Control
CIRCUIT IF AMP
PC 201
Tx Trigger/Pulse Width
VIDEO
AMP
MH
GENERATOR
INTERFACE CIRCUIT
POWER
PC1101
SUPPLY AVR
CIRCUIT
Serial Com, BP, BZ, VD, TRIG
PC1001
Relay Control
DC+48V
AC100-115/ 220-240V
MOTOR RELAY 50/ 60Hz,1
PC1201
B 18
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > B.DRAWINGS > B.6 Interconnection Diagram of Scanner Unit
B
B 19
ANTENNA NAX-16B-4/6
TRANSCEIVER UNITZT
A103 TRANSCEIVER UNIT INTERCONNECTION
A104 CMK-599
NJC 4002 DUMMY FILTER NJC9952
MAGNETRON
RECEIVER UNIT
V101
A301 E101
MAF1565N NJS6930 NJT1969 (RECEIVER UNIT INTERCONNECTION CMA-823)
A101 A102 IF AMP CIRCUIT (PC301)
S.G. 1.TUNE CAE-529-1
2.+5V
D.L
1.HMCNT
5.IF
3.COM+
4.COM-
8.AGND
11.HSP
2.AGND
7.+15V
2.+15V
3.MAG.I
1.MPS
13.+8V
4.HTER
5.HVER
2.PW3
3.PW2
6.MBK
5.MCT
4.PW1
2.VDE
3.GND
10.BP
4.PMS
YEL GRN
15.NC
5.GND
2.PTE
7.TXE
9.-7V
3.LVR
12.TI
1.PTI
6.TXI
1.VD
1.TIY
J301
7.BZ
J302
6.C2
J303
J18
F CX68 F CX68
J2
ZCRD1290
ZCRD1303
ZCRD1308
DISPLAY
(W101)
(W102)
(W10)
(W111)
UNIT
(W204)
WV101 ZCRD1312
B.6 Interconnection Diagram of Scanner Unit
J202
J203
J201
2.AGND
3.MAG.I
4.PMS
5.GND
4.HTER
5.HVER
2.PTE
14.MOD ID
3.LVR
7.TXE
1.PTI
6.TXI
8.AGND
T201-15
1.TIY
S.G.
7.+15V
1.MPS
2.PW3
3.PW2
4.PW1
6.MBK
5.MCT
7.BZ
6.C2
11.HSP
9.-7V
13.+8V
10.BP
15.NC
CFR-234
12.TI
T201-16 B102
MAG FILTER
CIRCUIT SE
100pF 3
J1003 (W103) J206
B 20
BLK
(W104) 2.E
ZCRD1301 BLU
J1002 J205 3.A
WHT
4.B
POWER SUPPLY
1.+15V
2.+12V
1.+15V
2.+12V
MODULATOR CIRCUIT 5.+12V
RED
SHIELD
CIRCUIT 3.+8V 3.+8V (PC201) 6.F.G.
4.AGN D 4.AGND
(PC1001) 5.-15V 5.-15V CME-
6.X1 J8 P8 J81 P81
6.X1
CBD-1783 7.X2 7.X2 1.PTI
1.PTI WHT
8.+5V 8.+5V TB1 2.PTE
2.PTE BLK
9.HTER 9.HTER 3.TXI WHT
10.HV ER 10.HVER 1-2short : Nomal Speed 3.LVR
4.TXE BRN
4.PMS
2-3short : High Speed 5.E
(W105) 6.TXI
J1001 ZCRD1302 J204 J82 P82
7.TXE 1.LVR BLU
5.
1.2A 1.2A
6.AGND
2.AGND
4.AGND
3.EXBP
8.NC
1.ETIY
1.MPS
3.MBK
2.MCT
1.C2G
2.PMS RED
2.C2
2.1A 2.1A
1.2A
2.1A
7ZCRD 1280
J209
J210
J3
3.E BLK
J1
>
(W108)
(W107) Z CRD1305
ZCRD1304
B.DRAWINGS
J1501
S.G.
1.MPS
3.MBK
2.MCT
1.2A
2.1A 2 5
NKE-2103
J1504
1.MS1 1 4 PM
2.NC
3.MS2
NJU-85 (OPTION
>
MOTOR J1505
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual
J125 1.HMCNT
2.+15V
1.MCNT+
2.MCNT- 3.AGND
B101 3.NC
H-7BDRD0048 MOTOR CONTROL POWER CIRCUIT J4
J1502 1.2A H-7ZCRD####*:
(PC1501)
1.M+ 2.1A
DISPLAY # means specification document No.
2.NC CBD-1779
MORTOR CBP-202 J5 * means revision of the specfication document.
3.M-
1.2A
UNIT
4.NC
2.1A
NKE-2103 / 2103-6HS
B.6.1
SCANNER UNIT INTERCONNECTION
CAX-10
B
103 ANTENNA
NJC4002
104
RECEIVER UNIT NRG-162A DUMMY FILTER NJC 9952
B.6 Interconnection Diagram of Scanner Unit
301
NJS6930
RECEIVER CIRCUIT
J101 CMA-866A
BM15B-XASS-TE S.G.
12.VD_DC
D.L
10.TGTE
MAG
14.VDE
13.TNL
101
6.-15V
7.+15V
11.TNI
4.TNC
8.GND
9.TGT
15.VD
1.BS3
2.BS2
3.BS1
5.+5V
M1568BS
101 102
P3001 NJC 3901M NJ C3901M
CHT-71A
(W001)
B102 ZCRD1251
MODULATOR UNIT NMA-550 (W106)
ZC RD1258
P13 IL-6P
11.TRG2
ENCODER
5.TGTE
7.VDIN
1.MONI
2.MAG I
4.TNC
10.GND
7.-15V
9.+15V
2.MAG I
1.BS3
2.BS2
3.BS1
1.RXD
2.TXD
4.GND
8.+5V
4.TGT
3.GSE
6.TNL
YEL
3.+5V
8.TNI
BLU J1109
3. A J1110 J1191 5.TI 5.TI CIRCUIT
IL -G -12P
WHT IL-G-8P 3 5
IL-G -11P CPA-264
J1111
4.B 6.TIE
8W
IL-4P 6.TIE
RED C202 S.G.
5.+12V 7.+15V J2103 (W104)
P2103
SHIELD 7.+15V 0.22UF 200V
8.G ND 350209-2 ZCRD1256
ZCRD1257
6.GND 8.GND CFR-229
9.NC 9.NC J2101 1.X1
1586514-2 MAG FILTER
J1 10.NC
(W105)
IL-G -6P 10.NC 2.X2 CIRCUIT
1.MH
3.MN
2.7K
2.NC
MODULATOR UNIT
0.22UF
1.TIY 11.NC
1/2W
R202
(W004) 220pF 5
C 203
>
200V
2.TIYE 12.NC ZCRD1253 INTERCONNECTION
(W207)
3.BP CMB-404
B.DRAWINGS
DISPLAY UNIT
BLU 1 1 BLU
1 2 3
1 2 3
5.BZ
BLK.T
1.HMC NT
J1118
P1303
J1303
2 WHT (W201)
BLK.T
6.BZE 2.+15V WHT 2 (W107)
BLK 3 3 BLK ZCRD1259 ZCRD1260
3.GND BREAK C IRCUIT
J2 IL-G -4P
P1503
P1002 J1503 CFA-257
B 21
1.VD T/R CONTROL CIRCUIT J1505 IL-2P-S3E N2
10 ,10W
P1103 IL-3P-S3EN2
2.VDE 1.+15V P1003 1.+15V
CMC-1205R
1.MH
3.MN
2.NC
3.MTR+ 2.+12V 4 4 2.+12V 1.HMC NT
R1
5 5 2.+15V
B8P-SHF
4.MTR- 3.G ND 3.+8V (W307)
B8P-SHF
J1003
J1002
J1103
>
P125
MSTBA2.5/11-G 5.-15V 7 7 5.-15V
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual
8 8 B3P-SHF-1AA
1.BP+ 6.10V 6.X1 MOTOR CONTROL 1.MCNT-
(W305) GRN
2.BP- 7.10VE 9 9 7.X2 POWER SUPPLY J1001 YEL
3.BZ+ 8.+5V 10 10 8.+5V 350428-1 POWER CIRCUIT 2.MCNT+
BRN
B101
CIRCUIT
J1301
P1301
4.BZ- 1.M+ 3.NC
1.MC T P1104 P1004 CBD-1779
5.TRIG+ 1.MC T CBD-1682A 2.M-
P1502
P1502 MOTOR
B6P-SHF
2.MBK
B9P-SHF
2.MBK
J1004
6.TRIG- B4P-VH
J1104
3.TISTOP 1 1 (W301) BLU.T
7.MTR+ 3.HSP 1.M+
4.G ND 2 2
8.MTR- 4.HTER 2.NC
5.MPS 3 3 BLK.T
9.MTRE 5.TISTOP 3.M-
4 4 J1501
10.VD+ 6.MIER 6.C 2 J4 J5 J3
ZCRD1451
IL-G-3P-S3T2-SA 4.NC
11.VD- 7.G ND 350209-1 350209-1 B02P-NV(LF)(SN
J1112 J1113 J1114
1.MS1
3.MS2
1.MPS
3.MBK
2.MCT
350209-1
350209-1
2.1A
1.2A
2.1A
1.2A
2.1A
1.2A
2.NC
8.MPS
1.2A
2.1A
1.2A
2.1A
IL-G-9P IL-G-3P IL-G-3P
B3P-VH
(W208)
J1504
50/60W
MOTOR CBP-168A / CBP-182
8.STABY_REQ
J8 9.MIER
J4
J5
J1106 J1105
3.FAN _ERR 2
3.FAN_ERR1
2.HVGATE1
3.TISTOP1
IL-8P IL-G-5P IL-G-2P
NKE-2254HS
1.HTER1
P1504
1.+12V
P1501
1.+12V
2.GND
4.+24V
7.+15V
1.+12V
4.PMS
5.GND
5.GND
4.GND
2.GND
1.PW1
2.PW2
3.PW3
5.CNT
2.PTE
7.TXE
3.LVR
6.+5V
1.PTI
6.TXI
9.NC
2.C 2
DISPLAY UNIT PART
ZCRD 1494
5 5
6 6
CHG-216
NKE-2254
WHT
RED
(W302)
(W308
RED
BLU
(W010)
(W009)
YEL
7 7 WHT
100W
TR101
(W018) 8 8 RED 2 1
TH101
RED
BLU
YEL
ZCRD1277 FAN
J1302
B201
P1302
5 4
(W006) (W206) TB105 (W401)
H-7BFRD0002 ZCRD1254 ZCRD1447
8 7 ZCRD1508
FAN
U
U
B202
SAFETY SWITCH
2.PMS
2.PTE
4.TXE
1.LVR
1.PTI
3.TXI
S101
CSD-653
3.E
S-32
V
V
H-7BF RD0002
P82 J 82
P81 J81
SCANNER UNIT INTERCONNECTION
UTH
UTH
CAX-15 WHT.T
WHT
BRN
WHT
BLK
RED
BLU
BLK
S.G. H-7ZCRD####*: NKE-2254 / 2254-6HS
ZCRD1280 # means specification document No.
B.6.2 * means revision of the specfication document.
PM
NJU-85
A103 ANTENNA
NJC4002
RECEIVER UNIT NRG-162A DUMMY FILTER 104
A301
NJS6930 NJC9952
RECEIVER CIRCUIT CMA-866A
J101
BM15B-XASS-TE S.G.
12.VD_DC
D.L
10.TGTE
MAG
14.VDE
13.TNL
6.-15V
7.+15V
11.TNI
4.TNC
8.GND
101
9.TGT
15.VD
1.BS3
2.BS2
3.BS1
5.+5V
M1568BS
101 102
NJC3901M NJ C3901M
P3001
CHT-71A
GRN
YEL
(W001)
B102 Z CRD1251
P13 IL-6P
11.TRG2
ENCODER
5.TGTE
7.VDIN
1.MONI
2.MAG I
4.TNC
10.GND
7.-15V
9.+15V
2.MAGI PULSE
1.BS3
2.BS2
3.BS1
1.RXD
2.TXD
4.GND
8.+5V
4.TGT
3.GSE
6.TNL
YEL
3.+5V
8.TNI
2
MODULATOR No.2
2.GS
WHT IL-G-8P 3 5
IL-G -11P CPA-264
J1111
4.B 6.TIE
8W
IL-4P 6.TIE BRAKE CIRCUIT A
RED C202 S.G.
5.+12V 7.+15V J2103 (W104)
P2103
7.+15V 0.22UF 200V CFA-259
B.6 Interconnection Diagram of Scanner Unit
SHIELD ZCRD1256
8.GND 350209-2 CFR-229
ZCRD1257
6.GND 8.GND 120
9.NC 9.NC J2101 1.X1 MAG FILTER 30W
4
1586514-2 BRAKE CIRCUIT B
J1 10.NC
(W105)
IL-G -6P 10.NC 2.X2 CIRCUIT R1 CFA-260
1.MH
3.MN
MODULATOR UNIT
2.7K
2.NC
0.22UF
1.TIY 11.NC
1/2W
R202
(W004) 220pF 5
C 203
330
200V
INTERCONNECTION R2
2.TIYE 12.NC ZCRD1253 30W 1
(W207)
3.BP
ZCRD1263 CMB-404 S.G. S.G. R3 R1
4.BPE P1118 P2101 (W310) (W309)
B3P-SHF
BLU 1 1 BL U
1 2 3
1 2 3
5.BZ
BLK.T
1.HMC NT ZC RD1539 R4 ZCRD1538
J1118
(W308)
P1303
J1303
2 WHT (W201)
BLK.T
WHT 2
W101
6.BZE 2.+15V (W107) ZC RD1537 P1921 P1911
BLK 3 3 BLK ZCRD1259 ZCRD1260
3.GND W 101 P1941 J1941 J1921 J1911
J2 IL-G -4P 1.+12V 1-350209-0
1.BKH1
3.BKH1
1.BKS1
2.BKS2
1-350210-0
P1002 to TB102
B 22
2.NC
2.NC
1.VD
2.VDE
T/R CONTROL CIRCUIT P1103 P1003 3.+12VE
1.+15V 1.+15V
CMC-1205R
1.MH
3.MN
2.NC
3.MTR+ 2.+12V 4 4 2.+12V S3B-XH-A
5 5 BRAKE CONTROL CIRCUIT
B8P-SHF
4.MTR- 3.G ND 3.+8V
B8P-SHF
J1003
J1002
J1103
4.GND 6 6 4.GND
TB101 MSTBA2.5/11-G 5.-15V 7 7 5.-15V
1586514-2 (W305) CCB-655
8 8 Z CRD1454 J1912 P1912
1.BP+ 6.10V 6.X1
B2PS-VH
2.BP- 7.10VE 9 9 7.X2 J1001
1.VERR
3.BZ+ 10 10 POWER SUPPLY 350428-1
1.VERR1 1.VERR1
2.NC
DISPLAY UNIT
3.N
1.P
2.E
CIRCUIT
J1301
P1301
IL-3P 1-480700-0
4.BZ- 1.M+ BLU IL-2P
1.MC T P1104 P1004 1.HMCNT J1212 P1212 J1903 IL-2P
5.TRIG+ 1.MC T 2.M- J1905
CBD-1682A WHT 2.+15V RELAY FILTER
B6P-SHF
2.MBK P1903
B9P-SHF
2.MBK J1202 P1202 (W307) P1905
NKE-1125 (AC110V)
J1004
6.TRIG- BLK
J1104
1 1
RED
BLK
3.TISTOP 3.HSP 3.G ND CIRCUIT 1.MU2 (W303) ZCRD1536
7.MTR+
P1211
2 2 P1505 (W304)
8.MTR- 4.G ND 4.HTER CSC-656 2.GND ZCRD1452
J1211
3 3 ZCRD1314
9.MTRE 5.MPS 5.TISTOP PC1201 3.MV2 J1505
2.N
1.P
4 4 B2P-VH
6.MIER J4 J5 J3
1.VERR
6.C 2 B3P-NV
2.NC
4.NC
10.VD+
1.U1
3.V1
1.MU2 B3P-VH
11.VD- 7.G ND 350209-1 350209-1 B02P-NV(LF)(SN J1201 1.R1
J1112 J1113 J1114 2.NC
2.E
2.1A
1.2A
2.1A
1.2A
2.1A
1.2A
8.MPS B4P-VH
>
B6P-VH
50/60W IL-G-9P IL-G-3P IL-G-3P 3.MV2 2.NC
P1201
8.STABY_REQ
J8 9.MIER 4.N C PC 1501 3.R2
J1106 J1105
3.FAN _ERR 2
3.FAN_ERR1
2.HVGATE1
B.DRAWINGS
R2
3.TISTOP1
5.N C
J1504
P1504
IL-8P IL-G-5P IL-G-2P B201 H-7EPRD0035
5 5
1.HTER1
(W206) P3 6.G ND
1.+12V
1 0 P1
1 0J5 1
R1
1.+12V
2.GND
4.+24V
7.+15V
1.+12V
J1503
4.PMS
5.GND
5.GND
4.GND
2.GND
1.PW1
2.PW2
3.PW3
5.CNT
2.PTE
7.TXE
2.NC
4.NC
3.LVR
2.S2
3.S3
5.S5
6.S6
1.M1
3.M2
5.M3
6 6
1.S1
4.S4
6.+5V
ZC RD 1262
1.PTI
6.TXI
J 1502
8.NC
9.NC
2.C 2
5
RED.T
BLK.T
(W203) (W302) 1.2k
WHT ZCRD1261 ZC RD1265 30W 2
to CCB-655 J1941
WHT
RED
P1113 P1114 P1502
7
P1105
1
WHT C .G.
S-32F
S101
7 7
RED
AC100V BRAKE CIRCUIT
8 8 (W308)
YEL
RED
BLU
(W301) MOTOR DRIVER P1503 WC1 CFA-253
8
ZC RD 1537
2
J1302
P1302
(W018) (W006) RED ZCRD1264 CBD-2001
>
MOTOR
RED
YEL
BLU
ZCRD1277 B201 FAN ZCRD1254
BLK.T
RED
RED.T
CBP-203
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual
B 101
H-7BFRD0002 W401 7ZCRD1508
+48VG
H-7BDRD0050 MOTOR
+48V
+12V
FAN SAFETY SWITCH
V1
W1
B202
U1
WHT.T
HEATER
2.PMS
2.PTE
4.TXE
1.LVR
1.PTI
3.TXI
CSD-654
TB102 CONTROL PART TH101
3.E
H-7BF RD0002
P82 J 82
P81 J81
+48VG
+48V
CHG-216
U1
V1
W1
TR101 WHT.T
OPTION 100W U V UTH
WHT
BRN
WHT
BLK
RED
BLU
BLK
TB105 U V UTH
SCANNER UNIT INTERCONNECTION DISPLAY UNIT
ZCRD1280
S.G. NKE-1125PM (AC100V) X25kW,2
CAX-11
B.6.3
PM
NJU-85
B
A103 ANTENNA
NJC4002
RECEIVER UNIT NRG-162A DUMMY FILTER
B.6 Interconnection Diagram of Scanner Unit
A301 104
NJS6930 NJC9952
RECEIVER CIRCUIT CMA-866A
J101
BM15B-XASS-TE S.G.
12.VD_DC
D.L
10.TGTE
MAG
14.VDE
13.TNL
6.-15V
7.+15V
11.TNI
4.TNC
8.GND
101
9.TGT
15.VD
1.BS3
2.BS2
3.BS1
5.+5V
M1568BS
101 102
NJC3901M NJ C3901M
P3001
CHT-71A
GRN
YEL
(W001)
B102 Z CRD1251
P13 IL-6P
11.TRG2
ENCODER
5.TGTE
7.VDIN
1.MONI
2.MAG I
4.TNC
10.GND
7.-15V
9.+15V
2.MAGI PULSE
1.BS3
2.BS2
3.BS1
1.RXD
2.TXD
4.GND
8.+5V
4.TGT
3.GSE
6.TNL
YEL
3.+5V
8.TNI
2
MODULATOR No.2
2.GS
WHT IL-G-8P 3 5
IL-G -11P CPA-264
J1111
4.B 6.TIE
8W
IL-4P 6.TIE BRAKE CIRCUIT A
RED C202 S.G.
5.+12V 7.+15V J2103 (W104)
P2103
SHIELD 7.+15V
ZCRD1256 0.22UF 200V CFA-259
8.GND 350209-2 CFR-229
ZCRD1257
6.GND 8.GND 120
9.NC 9.NC J2101 1.X1 MAG FILTER 30W
4
1586514-2 BRAKE CIRCUIT B
J1 10.NC
(W105)
IL-G -6P 10.NC 2.X2 CIRCUIT R1 CFA-260
1.MH
3.MN
MODULATOR UNIT
2.7K
2.NC
0.22UF
1.TIY 11.NC
1/2W
R202
(W004) 220pF 5
C 203
>
330
200V
INTERCONNECTION R2
2.TIYE 12.NC ZCRD1253 30W 1
(W207)
3.BP CMB-404
B.DRAWINGS
S.G. S.G. R3 R1
ZCRD1263
4.BPE P1118 P2101 (W310) (W309)
B3P-SHF
BLU 1 1 BL U
1 2 3
1 2 3
5.BZ
BLK.T
1.HMC NT ZC RD1539 R4 ZCRD1538
J1118
(W308)
P1303
J1303
2 WHT (W201)
BLK.T
WHT 2
W101
6.BZE 2.+15V (W107) ZC RD1537 P1921 P1911
BLK 3 3 BLK ZCRD1259 ZCRD1260
3.GND W 101 P1941 J1941 J1921 J1911
J2 IL-G -4P 1.+12V 1-350209-0
1.BKH1
3.BKH2
1.BKS1
2.BKS2
1-350210-0
P1002 to TB102
B 23
1.VD 2.NC
T/R CONTROL CIRCUIT
2.NC
P1103 P1003 3.+12VE
2.VDE 1.+15V 1.+15V
CMC-1205R
1.MH
3.MN
2.NC
3.MTR+ 2.+12V 4 4 2.+12V S3B-XH -A
5 5 BRAKE CONTROL CIRCUIT
B8P-SHF
4.MTR- 3.G ND 3.+8V
B8P-SHF
J1003
J1002
J1103
>
4.GND 6 6 4.GND
TB101 MSTBA2.5/11-G 5.-15V 7 7 5.-15V
1586514-2 (W305) CCB-655
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual
1.VERR
3.BZ+ 10 10 POWER SUPPLY 350428-1
1.VERR1 1.VERR1
2.NC
DISPLAY UNIT
3.N
1.P
2.E
CIRCUIT
J1301
P1301
IL-3P 1-480700-0
4.BZ- 1.M+ BLU IL-2P
1.MC T P1104 P1004 1.HMCNT J1212 P1212 J1903 IL-2P
5.TRIG+ 1.MC T 2.M- J1905
CBD-1682A WHT 2.+15V RELAY FILTER
B6P-SHF
2.MBK P1903
NKE-1125 (AC220V)
B9P-SHF
2.MBK J1202 P1202 (W307) P1905
J1004
6.TRIG- BLK
J1104
1 1
RED
BLK
3.TISTOP 3.HSP 3.G ND CIRCUIT 1.MU2 (W303) ZCRD1536
7.MTR+
P1211
2 2 P1505 (W304)
8.MTR- 4.G ND 4.HTER CSC-656 2.GND ZCRD1452
J1211
3 3 ZCRD1314
9.MTRE 5.MPS 5.TISTOP PC1201 3.MV2 J1505
2.N
1.P
4 4 B2P-VH
6.MIER J4 J5 J3
1.VERR
6.C 2 B3P-NV
2.NC
4.NC
10.VD+
1.U1
3.V1
1.MU2 B3P-VH
11.VD- 7.G ND 350209-1 350209-1 B02P-NV(LF)(SN J1201 1.R1
J1112 J1113 J1114 2.NC
2.E
2.1A
1.2A
2.1A
1.2A
2.1A
1.2A
8.MPS B4P-VH
B6P-VH
50/60W IL-G-9P IL-G-3P IL-G-3P 3.MV2 2.NC
P1201
8.STABY_REQ
J8 9.MIER 4.N C PC 1501 3.R2
J1106 J1105
3.FAN _ERR 2
3.FAN_ERR1
2.HVGATE1
R2
3.TISTOP1
5.N C
J1504
P1504
IL-8P IL-G-5P IL-G-2P B201 H-7EPRD0034
5 5
1.HTER1
(W206) P3 6.G ND
1.+12V
1 0 P1
1 0J5 1
R1
1.+12V
2.GND
4.+24V
7.+15V
1.+12V
J1503
4.PMS
5.GND
5.GND
4.GND
2.GND
1.PW1
2.PW2
3.PW3
5.CNT
2.PTE
7.TXE
2.NC
4.NC
3.LVR
2.S2
3.S3
5.S5
6.S6
1.M1
3.M2
5.M3
6 6
1.S1
4.S4
6.+5V
ZC RD 1262
1.PTI
6.TXI
J 1502
8.NC
9.NC
2.C 2
5
RED.T
BLK.T
(W203) (W302) 1.2k
WHT ZCRD1261 ZC RD1265 30W 2
WHT
RED
P1113 P1114 to CCB-655 J1941 P1502
7
P1105
1
C.G.
S-32F
S101
7 7 WHT
AC220V BRAKE CIRCUIT
8 8 (W308)
YEL
RED
BLU
(W301) MOTOR DRIVER P1503 WC1 CFA-253
8
ZC RD 1537
2
J1302
P1302
RED
(W018) (W006) RED
ZCRD1264 CBD-2000
MOTOR
RED
YEL
BLU
ZCRD1277 B201 FAN ZCRD1254
BLK.T
RED
RED.T
CBP-203 B 101
H-7BFRD0002 W401 7ZCRD1508
+48VG
H-7BDRD0050 MOTOR
+48V
+12V
FAN SAFETY SWITCH
V1
W1
B202
U1
WHT.T
HEATER
2.PMS
2.PTE
4.TXE
1.LVR
1.PTI
3.TXI
CSD-654
TB102 CONTROL PART TH101
3.E
H-7BF RD0002
P82 J 82
P81 J81
+48VG
+48V
CHG-216
U1
V1
W1
TR101 WHT.T
OPTION 100W U V UTH
WHT
BRN
WHT
BLK
RED
BLU
BLK
TB105 U V UTH
SCANNER UNIT INTERCONNECTION DISPLAY UNIT
ZCRD1280
S.G. NKE-1125PM (AC220V) X25kW,2
CAX-11
B.6.4
PM
NJU-85
HEATER CONTROL PART
CHG-216
(OPTION)
100W
TR101
WHT.T TH101
WHT.T
TB105
U BRAKE CIRCUIT A
1.BKH1
3.BKH2
1.BKS1
2.BKS2
1.+12V 1-350210-0
2.NC
U1
2.NC
WHT 3.+12VE
V1 S3B-XH-A
BRAKE CONTROL CIRCUIT
TRANSCEIVER UNIT
W1
CCB-655
+12V
C2 C101 + C102
1.VERR
B102 1000 2200p
2.NC
RED 1.VERR1
ZE
2.E
3.N
1.P
16V 50V 2.E
YEL
Z J1912 J1903 IL-2P J 1905
B 24
SE P1903
P1912 P1905
1.RED
3.BLK
BLU
A S.G. S.G.
W305)
SHIELD (W307)
E ZCRD1455 ZCRD1547
WHT
B ENCODER CHT-71A1
BLK BLK
J 1505
1.P
2.N
B2P-VH
1.VERR
S.G .
1.MU2 B3P-VH
W303) ZCRD1278
2.E
TB104 J81 P81 2.NC
NKE-1129 (AC110V)
1.R1
B6P-VH
1 3.MV2 PC1501 2.NC R2 R1
PTI WHT 4.NC B201 H-7EPRD 0035 3.R2 1.2k 1.2k
TRANSCEIVER UNIT TRANSCEIVER UNIT
J1504
P1504
WHT 6.GND
1 0 J1
(W304)
1 0P1
J1503
BRN
5.M3
2.NC
4.NC
LVR
2.S2
3.S3
5.S5
6.S6
1.M1
3.M2
1.S1
4.S4
ZCRD1314
J1502
5
>
RED RED
TXI BLK BLK
ZCRD1280
P1503 WC1
TXE AC100V
MOTOR MOTOR DRIVER
CBD-2001
CBP-203 B101
VERR1 H-7B DRD0050 MOTOR
E S.G.
>
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual
PM NJU-85
SCANNER UNIT INTERCONNECTION
CAX-12
NKE-1129PM (AC100V) X, 3
B.6.5
B
B.6 Interconnection Diagram of Scanner Unit
100W
TR101
WHT.T TH101
WHT.T
TB105
U BRAKE CIRCUIT A
1.BKH1
3.BKH2
1.BKS1
2.BKS2
1.+12V 1-350210-0
2.NC
2.NC
U1 WHT 3.+12VE
V1 S3B-XH-A
>
W1
B.DRAWINGS
CCB-655
+12V
C2 C101 + C102
1.VERR
B102 1000 2200p
2.NC
RED 1.VERR1
ZE
2.E
3.N
1.P
16V 50V 2.E
YEL
Z J1912 J1903 IL-2P J 1905
B 25
SE P1903
P1912 P1905
1.RED
3.BLK
BLU
A S.G. S.G.
W305)
SHIELD (W307)
E ZCRD1455 ZCRD1547
>
WHT
B ENCODER CHT-71A1
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual
BLK BLK
J 1505
1.P
2.N
B2P-VH
1.VERR
S.G .
1.MU2 B3P-VH
W303) ZCRD1278
2.E
TB104 J81 P81 2.NC
NKE-1129 (AC220V)
1.R1
B6P-VH
1 3.MV2 PC1501 2.NC R2 R1
PTI WHT 4.NC B201 H-7EPRD 0034 3.R2 1.2k 1.2k
TRANSCEIVER UNIT TRANSCEIVER UNIT
J1504
P1504
WHT 6.GND
1 0 J1
(W304)
1 0P1
J1503
BRN
5.M3
2.NC
4.NC
LVR
2.S2
3.S3
5.S5
6.S6
1.M1
3.M2
1.S1
4.S4
ZCRD1314
J1502
5
PMS J82 P82
CFA-253
BLU 1 BLU BRAKE CIRCUIT
E RED RED
P1502
TXI BLK BLK
ZCRD1280
P1503 WC1
TXE AC220V
MOTOR MOTOR DRIVER
CBD-2000
CBP-203 B101
VERR1 H-7B DRD0050 MOTOR
E S.G.
PM NJU-85
SCANNER UNIT INTERCONNECTION
CAX-12
NKE-1129PM (AC220V) X, 3
B.6.6
A103 ANTENNA
NJC4002
RECEIVER UNIT NRG-162A DUMMY FILTER 104
302 301
NJS6926 NJS6930 NJC9952
RECEIVER CIRCUIT
J101 CMA-866A
BM15B-XASS-TE S.G.
12.VD_DC
PIN
D.L
10.TGTE
MAG
14.VDE
13.TNL
6.-15V
7.+15V
11.TNI
4.TNC
8.GND
9.TGT
15.VD
1.BS3
2.BS2
3.BS1
5.+5V
101
M1568BS
101 102
NJC 3901M NJC 3901M
P3001
(W001)
ZCRD1233
MODULATOR UNIT (W106)
MD-12N1 MD-12N1
ZC RD1245
NMA-552
CD201
(W003) C201
5.TGTE
1.MONI
10.GND
2.MAGI 2.MAG I
7.VDIN
7.-15V
9.+15V
4.TNC
CD202
1.RXD
2.TXD
4.GND
4.TGT
3.GSE
6.TNL
1.BS3
2.BS2
3.BS1
8.+5V
3.+5V
8.TNI
3.X1
3.X1
4.X2 4.X2
MODULATOR No.1 1 H-7LPRD0122
J1 J1109 J1110 J1191 5.TI 5.TI CIRCUIT
IL -G-12P
IL-G-6P 3 5
B.6 Interconnection Diagram of Scanner Unit
IL-G-8P
CPA-264
R201
IL-G -11P
J1111
150
IL-4P 6.TIE 6.TIE S.G.
1.TIY C 202
J2103 (W104)
8W
7.+15V
P2103
7.+15V 0.22UF 200V
2.TIYE 8.G ND 350209-2 ZCRD1243 CFR-229
3.BP 8.GND
J2101 MAG FILTER
ZCRD1244
9.NC 9.NC 1.X1
4.BPE 10.NC 1586514-2 2.X2 CIRCUIT
(W105)
5.BZ 10.NC
1.MH
3.MN
2.7K
2.NC
MODULATOR UNIT
0.22UF
11.NC
R202
220pF5
1/2W
6.BZE
C 203
200V
12.NC INTERCONNECTION
J2 IL-G-4P CMB-405 S.G. S.G.
P2101
B3P-SHF
1.VD 1.HMCNT P1118 (W004)
J1118
BLK.T
2.VDE ZC RD 1235 W201
2.+15V ZCRD1246
3.MTR+
B 26
3.GND (W005)
4.MTR- S.G.
ZCRD1236
P1002
T/R CONTROL CIRCUIT P1103 P1003
1.+15V 1.+15V (W301)
CMC-1205R
1.MH
3.MN
2.NC
2.+12V 2.+12V J1001 P1202 ZC RD 1248
TB101
B8P-SHF
MSTBA2.5/11-G 3.G ND 3.+8V 350428-1
B8P-SHF
P101
J1003
J 1202
P1212
J1103
1.BP+ 4.GND 4.GND J1002 1.M+ IL-3P B3P-NV
2.GND
J1212
1.MU2
3.MV2
2.BP- 5.-15V 5.-15V 1586514-2 2.M- 1.HMCNT 1.VERR
3.BZ + 6.10V 6.10V 2.+15V
2.E
4.BZ - 7.10VE 7.10VE 3.GND
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT RE LAY FILTER CIRCUIT
P1211
IL-2P
5.TRIG + 8.+5V 8.+5V
J 1211
CBD-1682A CSC-656
IL-3P
6.TRIG - P1104 P1004 (W303) ZCRD1483
7.MTR+ 1.MCT 1.MCT PC1201
2.NC
4.NC
B6P-SHF
1.U1
3.V1
2.MBK
B9P-SHF
2.MBK
J1004
8.MTR-
J1104
3.TISTOP 3.HSP J1201
9.MTRE B4P-VH
10.VD+ 4.GND 4.HTER
5.MPS 5.TISTOP P1201
11.VD- (W302)
6.MIER 6.C2 J4 J5 J3
>
2.1A
1.2A
2.1A
1.2A
2.1A
1.2A
IL-6P 8.MPS
B.DRAWINGS
8.STABY_REQ
RED
BLK
J1106
RED
BLK
J1105
3.FAN_ERR2
3.FAN _ERR1
2. ZE
2.HVGATE1
I L-8P IL-G -5P
3.TISTOP1
IL-G-2P
3.A TB202
1.HTER1
P3
1.+12V
4.+24V
1.+12V
1.+12V
2.GND
7.+15V
4.PMS
5.GND
2.PTE
7.TXE
5.GND
4.GND
2.GND
4. B
3.LVR
1.PW1
2.PW2
3.PW3
5.CNT
U0
V0
WHT.T +48VG
6.+5V
U1
V1
1.PTI
6.TXI
8.NC
9.NC
2.C 2
RED.T +48V
5.+12V
NTG-3225
WHT
RED
P1105
V1
P8
U1
V0
U0
ZCRD1241
(W013) ZCRD1240 (W008) ZC RD1239
>
(W203) ZCRD1247
3L2 3L1 3L1
ANTENNA DISPLAY
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual
MTRE
MTR+
MTR-
TRIG+
BP -/ BZ-
+48VG
VERR
+12V
PMS
PTE
TXE
ZE
+48V
LVR
VD+
VD-
BP+
PTI
TXI
BZ+
B
A
Z
C2
E
E
E
DISPLAY UNIT ANTENNA ANTENNA DISPLAY UNIT
TRANSCEIVER UNIT INTERCONNECTION
CMK-593
H-7ZCRD####*:
# means specification document No.
B.6.7 * means revision of the specfication document. NTG-3225
B
ANTTENA
RECEIVER UNIT NRG-229 102
B.6 Interconnection Diagram of Scanner Unit
4.-15V
6.+15V
5.MPS
4.TNC
7.GND
1.TGT
6.VDE
3.TNL
1.BS3
2.BS2
3.BS1
8.+5V
5.TNI
9.NC
7.VD
RF CIRCUIT 101
GRN
CHT-71A
YEL
NJC3316
CAF-595
B102 R ECEIRVER UNIT
P3001 P3002
MODULATOR UNIT (W106)
MD-12N1 MD-12N1
SE (W001) (W002)
ZCRD1266
CD 201
ZCRD1267
P1109 P1110 (W003) C 201
J13 ZC RD 1268 J2102 0.01UF 1KV
P13 IL-10P (W103)
IL-6P P1111 P2102 4 6
ENCODER
11.TRG2
5.MicPS
6.VDINE
5.TGTE
1.MONI
10.GND
YEL 1.SHORT
1.SHORT T201
7.VDIN
7.-15V
9.+15V
4.TNC
1.RXD
2.TXD
4.GND
4.TGT
3.GSE
6.TNL
ZCRD1318
1.BS3
2.BS2
3.BS1
8.+5V
CD202
1.Z
3.+5V
8.TNI
2.GS
150
RED 5.TI
IL-G-12P
R01
3 5 S.G.
5.+12V CPA-264 BRAKE CIRCUIT A
J1111
6.TIE
ZCRD 1320 8W
SHIELD 6.TIE
6.GND (W104) C202 CFR-229 CFA-261
7.+15V J2103
P2103
7.+15V 0.22UF 200V
8.G ND 8.GND 350209-2 ZCRD 1319 MAG FILTER 120
J2101 30W 4
(W105)
J1 IL-G-6P 9.NC 9.NC 1.X1 CIRCUIT BRAKE CIRCUIT B
1.TIY 10.NC 10.NC 1586514-2 2.X2 220pF 5 R1 CFA-262
>
1.MH
3.MN
2.7K
2.NC
11.NC MODULATOR UNIT
0.22UF
2.TIYE
R202
330
1/2W
R2
C 203
3 0W 1
200V
3.BP 12.NC INTERCONNECTION
B.DRAWINGS
BLK.T
ZCRD1269 W201) (W308)
2.+15V ZCRD1273 P1921 P1911
ZC RD1542
J2 IL-G-4P 3.G ND (W005)
P1941 J1941 J1921 J1911
B 27
1-350209-0
1.BKH1
3.BKH2
1.BKS1
2.BKS2
1.VD Z CRD1270 1.+15V 1-350210-0
P1002 to CMC-1205R J1112 2.NC
2.NC
2.VDE T/R CONTROL CIRCUIT P1103 P1003 3.+15VE
3.MTR+ 1.+15V 1.+15V
CMC-1205R J1001
1.MH
3.MN
2.NC
2.+12V 2.+12V S3B-XH-A
4.MTR- 350428-1
>
B8P-SHF
3.G ND 3.+8V
B8P-SHF
J1003
ZC RD 1456
J1103
4.G ND 4.GND J1002 1.M+
CCB-655
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual
TB101 MSTBA2.5/11-G
5.-15V 5.-15V 1586514-2 2.M-
1.BP+ IL-2P
6.10V 6.10V 1.VERR1 1.VERR1
2.BP-
1.VERR
7.10VE 7.10VE 2.E 2.E
3.BZ + POWER SUPPLY
2.NC
8.+5V 8.+5V J1912
DISPLAY UNIT
3.N
1.P
2.E
IL-3P P1212 J1212
4.BZ -
5.TRIG + P1104 P1004 CIRCUIT BLU
1.HMCNT RELAY FILTER
P1912 1-480700-0
J1903 IL-2P
1.MCT 1.MCT J1905
NKE-1130 (AC110V)
B6P-SHF
6.TRIG - 2.MBK (W307) P1905
B9P-SHF
2.MBK J1202 P1202
J1004
BLK
3.BLK
J1104
1.RED
7.MTR+ 3.TISTOP 3.HSP 3.GND CSC-656 (W311) ZCRD1541 (W304)
1.MU2
P1211
ZCRD1545 P1505 ZCRD1316
8.MTR- 4.GND PC1201 2.G ND J1511
J1211
4.HTER
IL-3P
P1511 1. P J 1505 B3P-VH
9.MTRE 5.MPS 5.TISTOP 3.MV2 B2P-VH 1.R1
J3 2. N
1.VERR
10.VD+ J4 J5
2.NC
4.NC
6.MIE R 6.C2
1.U1
3.V1
11.VD- 350209-1 350209-1 B02P-NV(LF)(SN 2.NC
7.GND J1201
2.E
J1112 J1113 J1114 1.MU2 3.R2
(W006) B4P-VH
2.1A
1.2A
2.1A
1.2A
2.1A
1.2A
50/60W IL-G-9P IL -G-3P IL-G -3P 8.MPS 2.NC
J1504
ZCRD1271
P1504
P1201 PC 1501
J8 9.MIER R2
8.STABY_REQ
SAFETY SWITCH
B6P-VH
J1106 J1105 3.MV2
3.FAN_ERR2
B201 H-7EPRD0035
3.FAN_ERR1
2.HVGATE1
I L-8P IL-G -5P 4.NC
3.TISTOP1
IL-G-2P R1
CSD-656
1.HTER1
P3 5.NC 1.2k
1.+12V
2.GND
4.+24V
7.+15V
1.+12V
1.+12V
4.PMS
5.GND
2.GND
2.PTE
7.TXE
5.GND
4.GND
3.LVR
1.PW1
2.PW2
3.PW3
5.CNT
6.G ND 30W
6.+5V
1.PTI
6.TXI
(W203)
8.NC
1 0P1
1 0 J1
BLK.T
9.NC
2.C2
RED .T
ZCRD1274 (W302)
5
5
J1503
CFA-255
2.NC
4.NC
1.M1
3.M2
5.M3
1.S1
2.S2
3.S3
4.S4
5.S5
6.S6
Z CRD1453
J1502
(W303) BRAKE CIRCUIT
(W008)
9
P1114
3
P1113 P1105 ZC RD1284
S-32F
S101
WHT ZCRD1283
RED
RED
YEL
YEL
BLU
BLU
to CCB-655 J1941 RED P1502
(W301)
8
2
(W018) B104 FAN ZCRD1322
P1503
WC1 AC100V
BLK.T
ZCRD1275 (W308) MOTOR DRIVER
(W010)
RED.T
ZCRD1542 ZCRD1272 CBD-2001
J 1112 TB102 MOTOR
W401 7ZCRD1509
P1112
+48VG
CBP-205
+48V
B101
UTH
U1
V1
W1
V
1
4
2.PMS
2.PTE
4.TXE
1.LVR
HEATER CONTROL PART
1.PTI
3.TXI
WHT.T H-7BD RD0049 MOTOR
3.E
FAN
HT1 0 1
B103
P82 J 82
CHG-215
P81 J81
+48VG
UTH
+48V
V1
U1
W1
V
U
2
4
1
WHT.T TR101 (OPTION)
200W
WHT
BRN
BLK
RED
BLU
WHT
BLK
SCANNER INTERCONNECTION
CAX-13 DISPLAY UNIT
NKE-1130PMAC100V) S30kw, 2
B.6.8 7ZCRD1279
S.G.
PM
NJU-84
ANTTENA
RECEIVER UNIT NRG-229 102
301 FILTER DUMMY H-7ANRD0018
NJS6318
IF CIRCUIT CAE-499
S.G.
D.L
4.-15V
6.+15V
5.MPS
4.TNC
7.GND
1.TGT
6.VDE
3.TNL
1.BS3
2.BS2
3.BS1
8.+5V
5.TNI
9.NC
7.VD
RF CIRCUIT 101
GRN
CHT-71A
YEL
NJC3316
CAF-595
B102 R ECEIRVER UNIT
P3001 P3002
MD-12N1 MD-12N1
SE (W001) (W002)
ZCRD1266
CD 201
ZCRD1267
P1109 P1110 (W003) C 201
J13 ZC RD 1268 J2102 0.01UF 1KV
P13 IL-10P (W103)
IL-6P P1111 P2102 4 6
ENCODER
11.TRG2
5.MicPS
6.VDINE
5.TGTE
1.MONI
10.GND
YEL 1.SHORT
1.SHORT T201
7.VDIN
7.-15V
9.+15V
4.TNC
1.RXD
2.TXD
4.GND
4.TGT
3.GSE
6.TNL
ZCRD1318
1.BS3
2.BS2
3.BS1
8.+5V
CD202
1.Z
3.+5V
8.TNI
2.GS
150
RED 5.TI
IL-G-12P
R01
3 5 S.G.
5.+12V CPA-264 BRAKE CIRCUIT A
J1111
6.TIE
ZCRD 1320 8W
SHIELD 6.TIE
B.6 Interconnection Diagram of Scanner Unit
P2103
7.+15V 0.22UF 200V
8.G ND 8.GND 350209-2 ZCRD 1319 MAG FILTER 120
J2101 30W 4
(W105)
J1 IL-G-6P 9.NC 9.NC 1.X1 CIRCUIT BRAKE CIRCUIT B
1.TIY 10.NC 10.NC 1586514-2 2.X2 220pF 5 R1 CFA-262
1.MH
3.MN
2.7K
2.NC
11.NC MODULATOR UNIT
0.22UF
2.TIYE
R202
330
1/2W
R2
C 203
3 0W 1
200V
3.BP 12.NC INTERCONNECTION
4.BPE CMB-406 S.G. S.G.
R3 R1 (W309)
5.BZ (W310) ZCRD1543
P2101
B3P-SHF
BLK.T
ZCRD1269 W201) (W308)
2.+15V ZCRD1273 P1921 P1911
ZC RD1542
J2 IL-G-4P 3.G ND (W005)
P1941 J1941 J1921 J1911
B 28
1-350209-0
1.BKH1
3.BKH2
1.BKS1
2.BKS2
1.VD Z CRD1270 1.+15V 1-350210-0
P1002 to CMC-1205R J1112 2.NC
2.NC
2.VDE T/R CONTROL CIRCUIT P1103 P1003 3.+15VE
3.MTR+ 1.+15V 1.+15V
CMC-1205R J1001
1.MH
3.MN
2.NC
2.+12V 2.+12V S3B-XH-A
4.MTR- 350428-1 (W305) BRAKE CONTROL CIRCUIT
B8P-SHF
3.G ND 3.+8V
B8P-SHF
J1003
ZC RD 1456
J1103
4.G ND 4.GND J1002 1.M+
CCB-655
TB101 MSTBA2.5/11-G
5.-15V 5.-15V 1586514-2 2.M-
1.BP+ IL-2P
6.10V 6.10V 1.VERR1 1.VERR1
2.BP-
1.VERR
7.10VE 7.10VE 2.E 2.E
3.BZ + POWER SUPPLY
2.NC
8.+5V 8.+5V J1912
DISPLAY UNIT
3.N
1.P
2.E
IL-3P P1212 J1212
4.BZ -
5.TRIG + P1104 P1004 CIRCUIT BLU
1.HMCNT RELAY FILTER
P1912 1-480700-0
J1903
NKE-1130 (AC220V)
B6P-SHF
6.TRIG - 2.MBK (W307) P1905
B9P-SHF
2.MBK J1202 P1202
J1004
BLK
3.BLK
J1104
1.RED
7.MTR+ 3.TISTOP 3.HSP 3.GND CSC-656 (W311) ZCRD1541 (W304)
1.MU2
P1211
ZCRD1545 P1505 ZCRD1316
8.MTR- 4.GND PC1201 2.G ND J1511
J1211
4.HTER
IL-3P
P1511 1. P J 1505 B3P-VH
9.MTRE 5.MPS 5.TISTOP 3.MV2 B2P-VH 1.R1
J3 2. N
1.VERR
10.VD+ J4 J5
2.NC
4.NC
6.MIE R 6.C2
1.U1
3.V1
11.VD- 350209-1 350209-1 B02P-NV(LF)(SN 2.NC
J1201
>
7.GND
2.E
J1112 J1113 J1114 1.MU2 3.R2
(W006) B4P-VH
2.1A
1.2A
2.1A
1.2A
2.1A
1.2A
50/60W IL-G-9P IL -G-3P IL-G -3P 8.MPS 2.NC
J1504
ZCRD1271
P1504
PC 1501
B.DRAWINGS
J8 9.MIER P1201 R2
8.STABY_REQ
SAFETY SWITCH
B6P-VH
J1106 J1105 3.MV2
3.FAN_ERR2
B201 H-7EPRD0034
3.FAN_ERR1
2.HVGATE1
I L-8P IL-G -5P 4.NC
3.TISTOP1
IL-G-2P R1
CSD-656
1.HTER1
P3 5.NC 1.2k
1.+12V
2.GND
4.+24V
7.+15V
1.+12V
1.+12V
4.PMS
5.GND
2.GND
2.PTE
7.TXE
5.GND
4.GND
3.LVR
1.PW1
2.PW2
3.PW3
5.CNT
6.G ND 30W
6.+5V
1.PTI
6.TXI
(W203)
8.NC
1 0P1
1 0 J1
BLK.T
9.NC
2.C2
RED .T
ZCRD1274 (W302)
5
5
J1503
CFA-255
2.NC
4.NC
1.M1
3.M2
5.M3
1.S1
2.S2
3.S3
4.S4
5.S5
6.S6
Z CRD1453
J1502
(W303) BRAKE CIRCUIT
(W008)
9
P1113
3
P1114 P1105 ZC RD1284
S-32F
S101
to CCB-655 J1941 WHT ZCRD1283
RED
RED
YEL
YEL
BLU
BLU
RED P1502
(W301)
8
2
>
BLK.T
ZCRD1275 ZCRD1542 MOTOR DRIVER
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual
(W010)
RED.T
J 1112
ZCRD1272
TB102 CBD-2000
W401 7ZCRD1509 MOTOR
P1112
+48VG
CBP-205
+48V
B101
UTH
U1
V1
W1
V
1
4
2.PMS
2.PTE
4.TXE
1.LVR
HEATER CONTROL PART
1.PTI
3.TXI
WHT.T H-7BD RD0049 MOTOR
3.E
FAN
HT1 0 1
B103
P82 J 82
CHG-215
P81 J81
+48VG
UTH
+48V
V1
U1
W1
V
U
2
4
1
WHT.T TR101 (OPTION)
200W
WHT
BRN
BLK
RED
BLU
WHT
BLK
SCANNER INTERCONNECTION
CAX-13 DISPLAY UNIT
NKE-1130PMAC220V) S30kw, 2
B.6.9 7ZCRD1279
S.G.
PM
NJU-84
B
SAFETY SWITCH CSD-657
B.6 Interconnection Diagram of Scanner Unit
S101
S-32
W301) ZCRD1287 RED 2 3 WHT W302) ZCRD1288
RED.T 5 6 RED.T
BLK.T 8 9 BLK.T
BRAKE CIRCUIT A
CFA-261
120
30W
4
BRAKE CIRCUIT B
R1 CFA-262
R2 330
30W 1
1.BKH1
1.BKS1
2.BKS2
1.+12V
3.BKH2
1-350210-0
2.NC
2.NC
3.+12VE
S3B-XH-A
BRAKE CONTROL CIRCUIT
CCB-655
TB103
U1
1.VERR
B2PS-VH
W401 7ZCRD1509
2.NC
1.VE RR1
V1
3.N
1.P
2.E
>
2.E
WHT.T TR101 HEATER CONTROL J1903 IL-2P J1905
U J1912
AC100V
B.DRAWINGS
1.RED
3.BLK
V 100W CHG -215 W305) ZCRD1457
(W307)
WHT.T (OPTION)
UTH ZCRD1552
+12V
TRANSCEIVER UNIT
B 29
WHT
C2 C101 + C102 J1505
1.P
2.N
BLK 1000 2200p B2P-VH
1.VERR
RED B102
ZE 16V 50V
2.E
YEL 1.MU2
Z
>
SE 2.NC B3P-VH
PC1501 1.R1
BLU 3.MV2
A S.G. S.G.
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual
4.S4 B6P-VH
1.2k 1.2k
E SHIELD 5.NC 3.R2
30W 30W
J 1504
P1504
6.GND
1 0 J1
WHT
1 0P1
B ENCODER CHT-71A1 (W304)
J1503
5
2.NC
4.NC
ZCRD1316
1.M1
3.M2
5.M3
1.S1
2.S2
3.S3
5.S5
6.S6
J1502
BLK
BLK
NKE-1139 (AC110V)
S.G. CFA-255
P1502 BRAKE CIRCUIT
TB104 W303) ZCRD1276 J81 P81 P1503 WC1
1 AC100V
PTI WHT
MOTOR
TRANSCEIVER UNIT
ZCRD1179
TXE
TRANSCEIVER UNIT
S.G.
VERR1
E
PM NJU-84
SCANNER INTERCONNECTION
CAX-14
B.6.10
NKE-1139PM (AC100V) S, 3
SAFETY SWITCH CSD-657
S101
S-32
W301) ZCRD1287 RED 2 3 WHT W302) ZCRD1288
RED.T 5 6 RED.T
BLK.T 8 9 BLK.T
BRAKE CIRCUIT A
CFA-261
120
30W
4
BRAKE CIRCUIT B
R1 CFA-262
R2 330
30W 1
1.BKH1
3.BKH2
1.BKS1
2.BKS2
1.+12V 1-350210-0
2.NC
2.NC
3.+12VE
S3B-XH-A
BRAKE CONTROL CIRCUIT
CCB-655
B.6 Interconnection Diagram of Scanner Unit
TB103
U1
1.VERR
B2PS-VH
W401 7ZCRD1509
2.NC
1.VERR
V1
3.N
1.P
2.E
2.E
WHT.T TR101 HEATER CONTROL J1903 IL-2P J1905
U J1912
AC100V
1.RED
3.BLK
V 100W CHG -215 W305) ZCRD1457
(W307)
WHT.T (OPTION)
UTH ZCRD1552
+12V
TRANSCEIVER UNIT
B 30
WHT
C2 C101 + C102 J1505
1.P
2.N
BLK 1000 2200p B2P-VH
1.VERR
RED B102
ZE 16V 50V
2.E
YEL 1.MU2
Z SE 2.NC
PC1501 1.R1
B3P-VH
BLU 3.MV2
A S.G. S.G.
4.NC B201 H-7EPRD0034 2.NC R2 R1
4.S4 B6P-VH
1.2k 1.2k
E SHIELD 5.NC 3.R2
30W 30W
J 1504
P1504
6.GND
1 0 J1
WHT
1 0P1
B ENCODER CHT-71A1 (W304)
J1503
5
2.NC
4.NC
ZCRD1316
1.M1
3.M2
5.M3
1.S1
2.S2
3.S3
5.S5
6.S6
J1502
BLK
BLK
NKE-1139 (AC220V)
S.G. CFA-255
P1502 BRAKE CIRCUIT
TB104 W303) ZCRD1276 J81 P81 P1503 WC1
1 AC220V
PTI WHT
MOTOR
>
TRANSCEIVER UNIT
BRN
LVR H-7BDRD0049 MOTOR
PMS J82
1
P82
BL U
E RE D
TXI BLK
ZCRD1179
TXE
>
TRANSCEIVER UNIT
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual
S.G.
VERR1
E
PM NJU-84
SCANNER INTERCONNECTION
CAX-14
B.6.11
NKE-1139PM (AC220V) S, 3
B
ANTENNA
205
H-7ANRD0018
RECEIVER UNIT NRG-229
B.6 Interconnection Diagram of Scanner Unit
S.G.
J101 J102 MAG 101
IL-9P IL-7P M1555
2.TGTE
4.-15V
6.+15V
5.MPS
4.TNC
7.GND
1.TGT
6.VDE
3.TNL
1.BS3
2.BS2
3.BS1
8.+5V
5.TNI
201
9.NC
7.VD
GRN
NJC 3317
YEL
P3001 P3002 RECEIVER UN IT
INTERCONNECTION MODULATOR UNIT (W106)
CMA-902 NMA-553 Z CRD1230
MD-12N1 MD-12N1
(W001) (W002)
CD201
ZC RD 1217 ZC RD1218
P1109 P1110 C201
5.TGTE
1.MONI
10.GND
1.SHORT
7.VDIN
7.-15V
9.+15V
1.SHORT
4.TNC
1.RXD
2.TXD
4.GND
ZC RD 1227
CD202
4.TGT
3.GSE
T1
6.TNL
1.BS3
2.BS2
3.BS1
8.+5V
3.+5V
8.TNI
2.GS
2.MAGI 2.MAGI
3.X1 No.2 2 PULSE TRANS
3.X1
J1109 J1110 J1191 4.X2 4.X2 No.1 1 H-7LPRD 0122
IL-G-8P IL-G -11P
R201
J1 IL-4P 5.TI MODULATOR CIRCUIT
150
5.TI
IL -G-12P
IL-G-6P 3 5 S.G.
J1111
6.TIE
ZCRD 1229 8W
6.TI E CFR-229
1.TIY
7.+15V CPA-264 J2103 (W104) C202
P2103
7.+15V 0.22UF 200V
2.TIYE
8.GND 8.GND 350209-2 ZC RD 1228 MAG FILTER CIRCUIT
3.BP J2101 220pF5
9.N C 9.NC 1.X1
>
(W105)
10.NC 10.NC
5.BZ
1.MH
3.MN
2.NC
MODULATOR UNIT
2.7K
11.NC
0.22UF
B.DRAWINGS
R202
1/2W
6.BZE
C203
200V
12.NC INTERCONNECTION
J2 IL-G -4P CMB-407 S.G. S.G.
P2101
B3P-SHF
1.VD 1.HMCNT P1118 W004
J1118
BLK.T
2.VD E ZCRD1220 W201
2.+15V ZCRD1231
B 31
3.MTR+ 3.GND
4.MTR- (W005)
ZC RD1221 S.G.
P1002
T/R CONTROL CIRCUIT P1103 P1003
1.+15V 1.+15V (W301)
CMC-1205R J1001
>
1.MH
3.MN
2.NC
2.+12V 2.+12V ZC RD1215
350428-1 P1202
TB101
B8P-SHF
MSTBA2.5/11-G 3.GND 3.+8V
B8P-SHF
P101
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual
J1003
J1202
J1103
P1212
1.BP+ 4.GND 4.G ND J1002 1.M+
IL-3P B3P-NV
2.M-
2.GND
1586514-2 J1212
1.MU2
3.MV2
2.BP- 5.-15V 5.-15V 1.HMCN T 1.VERR
3.BZ+ 6.10V 6.10V 2.+15V
2.E
4.BZ- 7.10VE 7.10VE
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 3.GND
P1211
RELAY FILTER CIRC UIT
IL-2P
5.TRIG+ 8.+5V 8.+5V
J 1211
CBD-1682A CSC-656
IL-3P
6.TRIG- P1104 P1004
7.MTR+ 1.MCT 1.MCT PC1201
2.NC
4.NC
B6P-SHF
1.U1
3.V1
2.MBK
B9P-SHF
2.MBK
J1004
8.MTR-
J1104
3.TI STOP 3.HSP J1201 (W303) ZCRD1484
9.MTRE B4P-VH
10.VD+ 4.GND 4.HTER
5.MPS 5.TI STOP P1201
11.VD-
6.MIER 6.C2 J4 J5 J3 (W302)
(W006) 350209-1 350209-1 B02P-NV(LF)(SN Z CRD1216
J1112 J1113 J1114 J13 ZC RD1222
7.GND
2.1A
1.2A
2.1A
1.2A
2.1A
1.2A
IL -G -9P IL-G-3P IL-G-3P IL-6P 8.MPS
J8 1.Z 9.MIER
8.STABY_REQ
BLK
J1106
RED
RED
J1105
3.FAN_ERR2
BLK
3.FAN _ERR1
2.ZE
2.HVGATE1
IL-8P IL-G-5P
3.TISTOP1
I L-G -2P
3. A TB202
1.HTER1
P3
1.+12V
2.GND
4.+24V
1.+12V
1.+12V
7.+15V
4.PMS
5.GND
2.GND
2.PTE
7.TXE
5.GND
4.GND
4.B
3.LVR
1.PW1
2.PW2
3.PW3
5.CNT
U0
V0
+48VG
6.+5V
U1
V1
1.PTI
6.TXI
8.NC
9.NC
2.C 2
+48V
5.+12V
NTG-3230
WHT
RED.T
WHT.T
P1105
V1
RED
P8
U1
V0
U0
ZCRD1226 (W013) ZCRD1225 (W008) ZCRD1224
(W203) ZCRD1232
3L2 3L1 3L1
SCANNER DISPLAY
TB201 TB204 TB203 UNIT UNIT
TRIG-
MTRE
MTR+
MTR-
TRIG+
BP -/BZ-
+48VG
VERR
+12V
PMS
PTE
TXE
ZE
+48V
LVR
VD+
VD-
BP+
PTI
TXI
GND
BZ+
B
A
Z
C2
E
E
DISPLAY UNIT SCANNER UNIT SCANNER DISPLAY
UNIT UNIT
TRANSCEIVER UNIT INTERCONNECTION
CMK-594
B.6.12 H-7ZCRD####*:
# means specification document No.
* means revision of the specfication document.
NTG-3230
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > B.DRAWINGS > B.7 Terminal Board Connection Diagram
B 32
DISPLAY UNIT NCD-4990
19-CORES COMPOSITE CABL E (J RC SUPPL Y)
SCANNER UNIT
B.7.1
C FQ-6912-**
RADAR H -2695111153
(J RC SUPPL Y) CQD-2097 T ERMIN AL BOARD
NKE-2103-6/6HS
(INTERSWITC H)
TB4101(AN T)
COA XI AL
1 VD+
2 VD-
SHI ELD W iring of PER FOR MANC E MONITOR
T B4201(ISW IN/OU T) 3 TRIG +
1 is com pleted .
1 VDIN 1 4 TRIG -
OR N J4 J3 P81
2 VDIN 1E 5 BP+ BLK .T/ SKY .T P1
BLU B LK BLU.T /GRY .T PTI
3 TRIG IN1 6 BP- PTI
250V-T TYCS-1 GR N 2A 2A
4 TRIG IN1E 7 BZ+ PTE PTE
3C-2V x 5 (MAX 30m ) WHT
VDR YE L WHT .T/ ORN.T T XI WHT
5 BPIN1 8 BZ- B RN TXI
Y EL 1A 1A T XE B RN
6 BPIN1E 9 MTR+ YE L.T/ PNK.T TXE
GRN WHT
7 BZIN1 10 MTR-
8 BZIN1E 11 MTRE J5 P82 P2
WH T-B LU PUR. T/ BRN.T J1 B LU B LU
9 MTRIN 1+ 12 (NC) L VR L VR
WH T-WH T Y EL.T/ PNK.T 2A SHIE LD R ED R ED
10 MTRIN 1- 13 +48V PMS PMS
R ED.T/ GR N. T ETIY B LK B LK
11 MTRIN 1E 14 +48VG E E
ORG B LK.T/ SK Y.T 1A
12 PWR IN1
BLK AGND
13 PWR IN1E CBD -1684A TB522 R ED.T/ GR N .T
PNK WHT.T/ ORN .T J2
14 PWR OU T1 ORN
J4407 BR N 1 + C OAXI AL EXBP
15 PWR OU T1E
RJ -45 L AN 2 VD
16 VDOU T1
17 VDOU T1E 2 AGND
R ED
18 TRIG OU T1 PUR .T/ BRN.T
VDE GR N
PERFORMANCE
19 TRIG OU T1E 3 FG
B LU.T /GRY .T YEL
EXBZ MONITOR
PUR COM+
CQD-1891 20 BPOU T1 BLK
(J RC SUPPL Y) 21 BPOU T1E WHT
AGND
WHT COM- NJU-85
RED 22 BZOUT1 CBD -1684A TB521
R
23 BZOUT1E 1 U
GRN WH T-YE L
G 24 MTROUT 1+ 2 V
5-1 P)
WH T-WH T
BL U 25 MTROUT 1- 3 FG W406 H- 7ZC RD1342 A
B ( Wir ing is com pleted .)
26 MTROUT 1E
GR Y CBD -1661 ACOU T1
H
B LK BA TT IN +
V
C DC4 2 3-1
9 0 4J4 BUS(D
BA TT IN -
H -2695110006 U
(J RC SUPPL Y) V
ECDIS 250V-T TYCS-1 W
B 33
DGPS
4 NA V1RX- 4 SYSALM + 4 ETIY3E
5 NA V2TX+ 5 PWR AL M+ 5 SVD 1
6 NA V2TX- 6 PWR AL M- 6 SVD 1E
ECHO 250V-T TYCS-1
7 NA V2RX+ 7 ARPAAC K+ 7 ETIY1
JMA-9110-6XA/JMA-9110-6XAH
0. 6/ 1kV-D PYCYS-1.5
JMA-9110-6XA/6XAH
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM OF RADAR TYPE JMA-9110-6XA/6XAH
B
DISPLAY UNIT NCD-4990T
19-CORES COMPOSITE CABL E (J RC SUPPL Y)
SCANNER UNIT
B.7.2
C FQ-6912-**
RADAR H -2695111153
(J RC SUPPL Y) CQD-2097 T ERMIN AL BOARD NKE-2103-6/6HS
(INTERSWITC H)
TB4101(AN T)
COA XI AL
1 VD+
2 VD-
SHI ELD W iring of PER FOR MANC E MONITOR
T B4201(ISW IN/OU T) 3 TRIG +
1 is com pleted .
1 VDIN 1 4 TRIG -
OR N J4 J3 P81
2 VDIN 1E 5 BP+ BLK .T/ SKY .T P1
BLU B LK BLU.T /GRY .T PTI
3 TRIG IN1 6 BP- PTI
250V-T TYCS-1 GR N 2A 2A
4 TRIG IN1E 7 BZ+ PTE PTE
3C-2V x 5 (MAX 30m ) WHT
VDR YE L WHT .T/ ORN.T T XI WHT
5 BPIN1 8 BZ- B RN TXI
Y EL 1A 1A T XE B RN
6 BPIN1E 9 MTR+ YE L.T/ PNK.T TXE
GRN WHT
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual
7 BZIN1 10 MTR-
8 BZIN1E 11 MTRE J5 P82 P2
WH T-B LU PUR. T/ BRN.T B LU
>
9 MTRIN 1+ 12 (NC) J1 L VR B LU
Y EL.T/ PNK.T L VR
WH T-WH T 2A SHIE LD R ED R ED
10 MTRIN 1- 13 +48V PMS PMS
R ED.T/ GR N. T ETIY B LK B LK
11 MTRIN 1E 14 +48VG E E
ORG B LK.T/ SK Y.T 1A
12 PWR IN1
BLK AGND
13 PWR IN1E TB401 R ED.T/ GR N .T
PNK WHT.T/ ORN .T J2
14 PWR OU T1 WHT- BLK ORN
J4407 BR N 1 + C OAXI AL EXBP
15 PWR OU T1E
RJ -45 L AN 2 VD
16 VDOU T1
BLK- BLK AGND
17 VDOU T1E 2
R ED
18 TRIG OU T1 PUR .T/ BRN.T
VDE GR N
PERFORMANCE
GR N B LU.T /GRY .T EXBZ
19 TRIG OU T1E 3 FG YEL
B.DRAWINGS
PUR
20 BPOU T1
COM+ MONITOR
CQD-1891 BLK
(J RC SUPPL Y) 21 BPOU T1E WHT
AGND
>
5-1 P)
WH T-WH T
BL U 25 MTROUT 1- CBD -1661 ACOU T1
B
26 MTROUT 1E BA TT IN + W407 H- 7ZC RD1343 A
GR Y BA TT IN - ( JRC SUPPLY)
H
WHT
B LK U
V BLK
C DC4 2 3-1
9 0 4J4 BUS(D
V
H -2695110006 W
GRN
(J RC SUPPL Y)
ECDIS 250V-T TYCS-1
B 34
DGPS
4 NA V1RX- 4 SYSALM + 4 ETIY3E
5 NA V2TX+ 5 PWR AL M+ 5 SVD 1
6 NA V2TX- 6 PWR AL M- 6 SVD 1E CBD -1684A TB 521
ECHO 250V-T TYCS-1 WHT
7 NA V2RX+ 7 ARPAAC K+ 7 ETIY1 1 U
SOU NDER B LK
8 NA V2RX- 8 ARPAAC K- 8 ETIY1E 2 V
GRN
9 LOG RX+ 9 SYSACK+ 9 EXA1 3 FG
LOG 250V-T TYCS-1 10 LOG RX- 10 SYSACK- 10 EXA1E
(NMEA0183) 11 AL MTX+ 11 PWR ACK+ 11 EXB1
12 AL MTX- 12 PWR ACK- 12 EXB1E
B.7 Terminal Board Connection Diagram
BLK
23 EXZ2
250V-T TYCS-4 24 EXZ2E
AIS 25 (NC )
26 (NC )
27 ACKOU T+
LOG 0. 6/1kV-D PYCYS-1.5 28 ACKOU T-
TB4801(L O G)
(200P /NM) 29 WMRST+
1 (N C)
30 WMRST-
2 (N C)
3 (N C)
250V -M PYCYS-7
GYRO 4 (N C)
5 P1+ T B402
R ED
T B4701(G YRO) 6 P1- 1 U
WHT
1 1/R1 7 (N C) 2 V
B LK
2 2/S1 8 (N C) 3 W
3 3/S2 9 S1+
4 S3 10 S2- FILTER AC IN
R ED WHT 0.6/1kV-D PYCY-6
5 5/R2 11 (N C) U SHIPS MAINS
B LK AC100-115V/ AC220-240V 50/60H z 1
6 (NC) 12 (N C) W
ALARM MONITORING WHT B LK (X-BAND 10kW RADAR)
V
SYSTEM
( NEAREST AP PRO ACH) W405 H -7ZC RD 1341A( JRC SUPPL Y)
0. 6/1kV-D PYCYS-1.5 Wiring is com pleted.
JMA-9110-6XA/6XAH
23 BZOUT1E 1 U
GRN WH T-YE L
G 24 MTROUT 1+ 2 V
5-1 P)
WH T-WH T TB105
BL U 25 MTROUT 1- 3 FG W406 H- 7ZC RD1342 A
B 1 U
26 MTROUT 1E ( Wir ing is com pleted .)
GR Y 2 V
H CBD -1661 ACOU T1
3 UT H
B LK BA TT IN +
V
C DC4 2 3-1
9 0 4J4 BUS(D
BA TT IN -
H -2695110006 U
(J RC SUPPL Y) V
ECDIS 250V-T TYCS-1 W
B 35
DGPS D HEATER OPTION
4 NA V1RX- 4 SYSALM + 4 ETIY3E
5 NA V2TX+ 5 PWR AL M+ 5 SVD 1 C IRCU IT BR EAKER
6 NA V2TX- 6 PWR AL M- 6 SVD 1E 0.6/1kV-DPYCY S-1. 5 5A ( SHIP YAR D SUPPLY)
ECHO 250V-T TYCS-1
7 NA V2RX+ 7 ARPAAC K+ 7 ETIY1 AC100V,1,100W
SOU NDER 8 NA V2RX- 8 ARPAAC K- 8 ETIY1E 0.6/1kV-D PYCYS-1.5
9 LOG RX+ 9 SYSACK+ 9 EXA1
LOG 250V-T TYCS-1 10 LOG RX- 10 SYSACK- 10 EXA1E
(NMEA0183) 11 AL MTX+ 11 PWR ACK+ 11 EXB1 N BL -175 0.6/1kV-D PYCYS-1.5
12 AL MTX- S TEP- DOWN
SHIPS MAINS
12 PWR ACK- 12 EXB1E
B.DRAWINGS
0. 6/1kV-D PYCYS-1.5
JMA-9122-6XAH
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM OF RADAR TYPE JMA-9122-6XAH
B
DISPLAY UNIT NCD-4990T
19-CORES COMPOSITE CABL E (J RC SUPPL Y)
SCANNER UNIT
B.7.4
C FQ-6912-**
RADAR H -2695111153
(J RC SUPPL Y) CQD-2097 T ERMIN AL BOARD
NKE-2254-6HS
(INTERSWITC H)
TB4101(AN T)
C OA XI AL
1 VD+
2 VD-
SHI ELD W iring of PER FOR MANC E MONITOR
T B4201(ISW IN/OU T) 3 TRIG +
1 is com pleted .
1 VDIN 1 4 TRIG -
OR N J4 J3 P81
2 VDIN 1E 5 BP+ BLK .T/ SKY .T P1
BLU B LK BLU.T /GRY .T PTI
3 TRIG IN1 6 BP- PTI
250V-T TYCS-1 GR N 2A 2A
4 TRIG IN1E 7 BZ+ PTE PTE
3C-2V x 5 (MAX 30m ) WHT
VDR YE L WHT .T/ ORN.T T XI WHT
5 BPIN1 8 BZ- B RN TXI
Y EL AC/DC CONVERTER UNIT 1A 1A T XE B RN
6 BPIN1E 9 MTR+ YE L.T/ PNK.T TXE
GRN WHT
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual
7 BZIN1 10 MTR-
WH T-B LU
8 BZIN1E 11 MTRE
NBA-5135 PUR. T/ BRN.T
J5 P82
B LU P2
>
9 MTRIN 1+ 12 (NC) J1 L VR B LU
Y EL.T/ PNK.T L VR
WH T-WH T 2A SHIE LD R ED R ED
10 MTRIN 1- 13 +48V PMS PMS
R ED.T/ GR N. T TIY B LK B LK
11 MTRIN 1E 14 +48VG E E
ORG B LK.T/ SK Y.T CBD -1684A TB 522 1A
12 PWR IN1 WHT -B LK
BLK 1 + TIYE
13 PWR IN1E TB401 R ED.T/ GR N .T B LK-B LK
PNK WHT.T/ ORN .T 2
14 PWR OU T1 WHT- BLK GRN J2 ORN
J4407 BR N 1 + 3 FG C OAXI AL BP
15 PWR OU T1E
RJ -45 L AN 2 VD
16 VDOU T1
BLK- BLK BPE
17 VDOU T1E 2
R ED CBD -1684A TB 521 VDE PERFORMANCE
18 TRIG OU T1 PUR .T/ BRN.T WHT GR N
GR N B LU.T /GRY .T 1 U BZ
19 TRIG OU T1E 3 FG B LK YEL
B.DRAWINGS
PUR
20 BPOU T1
2 V M TR+ MONITOR
CQD-1891 GRN BLK
3 FG BZE
(J RC SUPPL Y) 21 BPOU T1E WHT
>
5-1 P)
WH T-WH T TB105
BL U 25 MTROUT 1- CBD -1661 ACOU T1
B 1 U
26 MTROUT 1E BA TT IN + W407 H- 7ZC RD1343 A
GR Y ( JRC SUPPLY) 2 V
H BA TT IN -
WHT 3 UT H
B LK U
V BLK
C DC4 2 3-1
9 0 4J4 BUS(D
V
H -2695110006 W
GRN
(J RC SUPPL Y)
ECDIS 250V-T TYCS-1
B 36
DGPS D HEATER OPTION
4 NA V1RX- 4 SYSALM + 4 ETIY3E
5 NA V2TX+ 5 PWR AL M+ 5 SVD 1 C IRCU IT BR EAKER
6 NA V2TX- 6 PWR AL M- 6 SVD 1E 0.6/1kV-DPYCY S-1. 5 5A ( SHIP YAR D SUPPLY)
ECHO 250V-T TYCS-1
7 NA V2RX+ 7 ARPAAC K+ 7 ETIY1 AC100V,1,100W
SOU NDER 8 NA V2RX- 8 ARPAAC K- 8 ETIY1E 0.6/1kV-D PY CYS-1.5
9 LOG RX+ 9 SYSACK+ 9 EXA1
LOG 250V-T TYCS-1 10 LOG RX- 10 SYSACK- 10 EXA1E
(NMEA0183) 11 AL MTX+ 11 PWR ACK+ 11 EXB1 N BL -175 0.6/1kV-D PYCYS-1.5
12 AL MTX- S TEP- DOWN
SHIPS MAINS
12 PWR ACK- 12 EXB1E
T RA NSF OR MER AC220V , 50/60H z, 1, fo r HEAT ER
B.7 Terminal Board Connection Diagram
5-1 P)
WH T-WH T
BL U 25 MTROUT 1- CBD -1661 ACOU T1
B
26 MTROUT 1E BA TT IN +
GR Y BA TT IN -
H
JMA-9122-6XA/9XA
Y EL
B LK U
V GRN
C DC4 2 3-1
9 0 4J4 BUS(D
V
H -2695110006 W D HEATER OPTION
(J RC SUPPL Y) C IRCU IT BR EAKER
ECDIS 250V-T TYCS-1 0.6/1kV-DPYCY S-1. 5 5A ( SHIP YAR D SUPPLY)
AC100V,1,100W
0.6/1kV-DPYC YS-1.5
CONNING 250V-T TYCS-1
DISPLAY
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual
TB4501(OPTION) TB4601(ALA RM) TB4401(EXT RAD AR) N BL -175 0.6/1kV-D PYCYS-1.5 SHIPS MAINS
1 NA V1TX+ 1 ARPAAL M+ 1 RBVD S TEP- DOWN
T RA NSF OR MER AC220V , 50/60H z, 1, fo r HEAT ER
>
B 37
DGPS
4 NA V1RX- 4 SYSALM + 4 ETIY3E
5 NA V2TX+ 5 PWR AL M+ 5 SVD 1
6 NA V2TX- 6 PWR AL M- 6 SVD 1E
ECHO 250V-T TYCS-1
7 NA V2RX+ 7 ARPAAC K+ 7 ETIY1
SOU NDER 8 NA V2RX- 8 ARPAAC K- 8 ETIY1E
9 LOG RX+ 9 SYSACK+ 9 EXA1
LOG 250V-T TYCS-1 10 LOG RX- 10 SYSACK- 10 EXA1E
(NMEA0183) 11 AL MTX+ 11 PWR ACK+ 11 EXB1
12 AL MTX- 12 PWR ACK- 12 EXB1E
B.DRAWINGS
0. 6/1kV-D PYCYS-1.5
JMA-9122-6XA/9XA
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM OF RADAR TYPE JMA-9122-6XA/9XA
B
DISPLAY UNIT NCD-4990
14-C OR ES CO MPOSITE CABL E (JRC SU PPL Y)
SCANNER UNIT
B.7.6
RADAR H -2695111153 H-2695110056
(J RC SUPPL Y) CQD-2097 T ERMIN AL BOARD
NKE-1129-71/72/91/92
(INTERSWITC H)
TB4101(AN T)
1
1 VD+
2 VD-
2 W iring of PER FOR MANC E MONITOR
T B4201(ISW IN/OU T) 3 TRIG +
1 is com pleted .
1 VDIN 1 4 TRIG -
3 TB103 TB105 TB104 P81
2 VDIN 1E 5 BP+ YEL P1
1 U1 1 U GRY 1 PTI
BLU PTI
3 TRIG IN1 6 BP- GR N PTI
250V-T TYCS-1 4 2 V1 2 V 2 PTE
4 TRIG IN1E 7 BZ+ PTE PTE
3C-2V x 5 (MAX 30m ) 3 W1 3 UT H BLU 3 L VR WHT
VDR YE L T XI WHT
5 BPIN1 8 BZ- OR N R ED B RN TXI
OR N 4 +12v 4 PMS T XE B RN
6 BPIN1E 9 MTR+ TXE
GRN WHT 5 C2 5 E
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual
9 MTRIN 1+ 12 (NC) L VR B LU
1 L VR
WH T-WH T R ED 8 A 8 (NC ) R ED R ED
10 MTRIN 1- 13 +48V PUR PMS
B LU 9 E 9 VER R B LK PMS
11 MTRIN 1E 14 +48VG E B LK
2 BLK E
ORG 10 B 10 E
12 PWR IN1
BLK
13 PWR IN1E
PNK
14 PWR OU T1
J4407 BR N
15 PWR OU T1E
RJ -45 L AN 2
16 VDOU T1
17 VDOU T1E PERFORMANCE
R ED
18 TRIG OU T1
19 TRIG OU T1E
B.DRAWINGS
5-1 P)
WH T-WH T
BL U 25 MTROUT 1- CBD -1661 ACOU T1
B
26 MTROUT 1E BA TT IN +
GR Y NBL -175 0.6/1kV -DPYCYS-1.5
H BA TT IN -
JMA-9123-7XA/9XA
C DC4 2 3-1
9 0 4J4 BUS(D
V
H -2695110006 W
(J RC SUPPL Y)
ECDIS 250V-T TYCS-1
14-CORES COMPOSIT E CA BLE (JR C SUPPL Y)
H-2695110056 FR-9 FLEXIBLE WAVE GUIDE
CONNING 250V-T TYCS-1 (JRC SUPPLY)
DISPLAY TB4501(OPTION) TB4601(ALA RM) TB4401(EXT RAD AR)
1 NA V1TX+ 1 ARPAAL M+ 1 RBVD
2 NA V1TX- 2 ARPAAL M- 2 RBVD E
250V-T TYCS-1
3 NA V1RX+ 3 SYSALM + 3 ETIY3
B 38
DGPS
4 NA V1RX- 4 SYSALM + 4 ETIY3E
5 NA V2TX+ 5 PWR AL M+ 5 SVD 1
6 NA V2TX- 6 PWR AL M- 6 SVD 1E
ECHO 250V-T TYCS-1
7 NA V2RX+ 7 ARPAAC K+ 7 ETIY1
SOU NDER 8 NA V2RX- 8 ARPAAC K- 8 ETIY1E TB201 T B203 TB204
1 OR N GR Y
9 LOG RX+ 9 SYSACK+ 9 EXA1 1 VD + 1 +12V 1 PTI
250V-T TYCS-1 WHT
LOG 10 LOG RX- 10 SYSACK- 10 EXA1E 2 VD - 2 C2 2 PTE
(NMEA0183) 2 BLU
11 AL MTX+ 11 PWR ACK+ 11 EXB1 3 TR IG+ 3 ZE 3 L VR
3 R ED
12 AL MTX- 12 PWR ACK- 12 EXB1E 4 TR IG- 4 Z 4 PMS
3 1
A
B.7 Terminal Board Connection Diagram
5-1 P)
WH T-WH T
BL U 25 MTROUT 1- CBD -1661 ACOU T1
B
26 MTROUT 1E BA TT IN +
GR Y BA TT IN -
H
Y EL
B LK U
V GRN
C DC4 2 3-1
9 0 4J4 BUS(D
V
H -2695110006 W D HEATER OPTION
(J RC SUPPL Y) C IRCU IT BR EAKER
ECDIS 250V-T TYCS-1 0.6/1kV -DPYCY S-1.5 5A ( SHIP YAR D SUPPLY)
AC100V,1,100W
0.6/1kV-D PYCYS-1.5
CONNING 250V-T TYCS-1
DISPLAY
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual
TB4501(OPTION) TB4601(ALA RM) TB4401(EXT RAD AR) N BL -175 0.6/1kV-D PYCYS-1.5 SHIPS MAINS
1 NA V1TX+ 1 ARPAAL M+ 1 RBVD S TEP- DOWN AC220V , 50/60H z, 1, fo r
T RA NSF OR MER
>
B 39
DGPS
4 NA V1RX- 4 SYSALM + 4 ETIY3E
5 NA V2TX+ 5 PWR AL M+ 5 SVD 1
6 NA V2TX- 6 PWR AL M- 6 SVD 1E
ECHO 250V-T TYCS-1
7 NA V2RX+ 7 ARPAAC K+ 7 ETIY1
SOU NDER 8 NA V2RX- 8 ARPAAC K- 8 ETIY1E
9 LOG RX+ 9 SYSACK+ 9 EXA1
LOG 250V-T TYCS-1 10 LOG RX- 10 SYSACK- 10 EXA1E
(NMEA0183) 11 AL MTX+ 11 PWR ACK+ 11 EXB1
12 AL MTX- 12 PWR ACK- 12 EXB1E
B.DRAWINGS
0. 6/1kV-D PYCYS-1.5
JMA-9132-SA
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM OF RADAR TYPE JMA-9132-SA
B
DISPLAY UNIT NCD-4990
14-C OR ES CO MPOSITE CABL E (JRC SU PPL Y)
SCANNER UNIT
B.7.8
RADAR H -2695111153 H-2695110056
(J RC SUPPL Y) CQD-2097 T ERMIN AL BOARD
NKE-1139-1/2
(INTERSWITC H)
TB4101(AN T)
1
1 VD+
2 VD-
2 W iring of PER FOR MANC E MONITOR
T B4201(ISW IN/OU T) 3 TRIG +
1 is com pleted .
1 VDIN 1 4 TRIG - YE L
3 1 U1 TB103 TB104 P81
2 VDIN 1E 5 BP+ GR N GRY P1
BLU 2 V1 1 PTI PTI
3 TRIG IN1 6 BP- PTI
250V-T TYCS-1 4 3 U 2 PTE
4 TRIG IN1E 7 BZ+ BLU PTE PTE
3C-2V x 5 (MAX 30m ) 4 V 3 L VR WHT
VDR YE L T XI WHT
5 BPIN1 8 BZ- R ED B RN TXI
OR N 5 UTH 4 PMS T XE B RN
6 BPIN1E 9 MTR+ ORN TXE
GRN WHT 6 +12v 5 E
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual
7 BZIN1 10 MTR- 4
7 C2 6 TXI
8 BZIN1E 11 MTRE WHT P82
WH T-B LU 8 ZE 7 TXE B LU P2
>
9 MTRIN 1+ 12 (NC) L VR B LU
3 L VR
WH T-WH T R ED 9 Z 8 (NC ) R ED R ED
10 MTRIN 1- 13 +48V 1 PMS PMS
B LU 10 A 9 (NC ) B LK B LK
11 MTRIN 1E 14 +48VG E E
ORG 11 E 10 (NC )
12 PWR IN1 PU R
BLK 12 B 11 VER R
13 PWR IN1E 2 BLK
PNK 12 E
14 PWR OU T1
J4407 BR N
15 PWR OU T1E
RJ -45 L AN 2
16 VDOU T1
17 VDOU T1E PERFORMANCE
R ED
18 TRIG OU T1
JMA-9133-SA
19 TRIG OU T1E
B.DRAWINGS
5-1 P)
WH T-WH T
BL U 25 MTROUT 1- CBD -1661 ACOU T1
B
26 MTROUT 1E BA TT IN +
GR Y NBL -175 0.6/1kV -DPYCYS-1.5
H BA TT IN -
Y EL STEP -DOWN SHIPS MAINS
U TRA NSFORME R
B LK GRN AC 220V, 50/60H z, 1, f or H EATER
V
C DC4 2 3-1
9 0 4J4 BUS(D
V
H -2695110006 W
(J RC SUPPL Y)
ECDIS 250V-T TYCS-1
14-CORES COMPOSIT E CA BLE (JR C SUPPL Y)
H-2695110056 HF-20D COAXIAL CABLE
CONNING 250V-T TYCS-1 (JRC SUPPLY)
DISPLAY TB4501(OPTION) TB4601(ALA RM) TB4401(EXT RAD AR)
1 NA V1TX+ 1 ARPAAL M+ 1 RBVD
2 NA V1TX- 2 ARPAAL M- 2 RBVD E
250V-T TYCS-1
3 NA V1RX+ 3 SYSALM + 3 ETIY3
B 40
DGPS
4 NA V1RX- 4 SYSALM + 4 ETIY3E
5 NA V2TX+ 5 PWR AL M+ 5 SVD 1
6 NA V2TX- 6 PWR AL M- 6 SVD 1E
ECHO 250V-T TYCS-1
7 NA V2RX+ 7 ARPAAC K+ 7 ETIY1
SOU NDER 8 NA V2RX- 8 ARPAAC K- 8 ETIY1E TB201 T B203 TB204
1 OR N GR Y
9 LOG RX+ 9 SYSACK+ 9 EXA1 1 VD + 1 +12V 1 PTI
250V-T TYCS-1 WHT
LOG 10 LOG RX- 10 SYSACK- 10 EXA1E 2 VD - 2 C2 2 PTE
(NMEA0183) 2 BLU
11 AL MTX+ 11 PWR ACK+ 11 EXB1 3 TR IG+ 3 ZE 3 L VR
3 R ED
12 AL MTX- 12 PWR ACK- 12 EXB1E 4 TR IG- 4 Z 4 PMS
3 1
A
B.7 Terminal Board Connection Diagram
B.7.9 NCD-4990T
MONITOR UNIT
NWZ-170
OPERATION UNIT
NCE-5163
J4406 DSUB -9P J4309
DVI-D
FEMALE
RADAR PROCESS
CIRCUIT
CDC-1324
TERMINAL BOARD
CQD-2097
Option
SUB OPERATION UNIT
Option for X-band 10kW and X-band 25kW-H S.
Used with N KE-2103-6,N KE-2103-6H S and N KE-
NCE-5163
CBD -1661
2254-6H S AC OUT 2
Main
AC/DC POWER SUPPLY
J4311
CONVERTER UNIT CBD-1661
Sub
NBA-5135 J4312
CBD -1661
CBD -1684A TB521 AC OUT 1
1 U 1 U
2 V 2 V
3 FG 3 W
B
B 41
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > B.DRAWINGS > B.8 GYRO I/F
KEEP DEFAULT
OPEN
LOG PULSE
INDICATOR LED
LED
LOW-VOLTAGE GYRO
SETTING
36X ON ON ON
GYRO SIMULATOR
RATIO
B 42
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > B.DRAWINGS > B.8 GYRO I/F
B
B 43
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > B.DRAWINGS > B.9 Inter Switch Unit
TB4201 TB4201
ISW IN/OUT ISW IN/OUT
1
VDIN 1 1 1 VDIN 1
VDIN 1E 2 2 VDIN 1E
BLUE
TRIGIN 1 3 3 TRIGIN 1
TRIGIN 1E 4 4 TRIGIN 1E
YELLOW
BPIN 1 5 5 BPIN 1
BPIN 1E 6 6 BPIN 1E
GREEN
BZIN 1 7 7 BZIN 1
BZIN 1E 8 8 BZIN 1E
WHITE-BLUE
MTRIN 1+ 9 9 MTRIN 1+
WHITE-WHITE
MTRIN 1- 10 10 MTRIN 1-
MTRIN 1E 11 11 MTRIN 1E
ORANGE
PWRIN 1+ 12 12 PWRIN 1+
BLACK
PWRIN 1E 13 13 PWRIN 1E
PINK
PWROUT 1 14 14 PWROUT 1
BROWN
PWROUT 1E 15 15 PWROUT 1E
2
VDOUT 1 16 16 VDOUT 1
VDOUT 1E 17 17 VDOUT 1E
RED
TRIGOUT 1 18 18 TRIGOUT 1
TRIGOUT 1E 19 19 TRIGOUT 1E
PURPLE
BPOUT 1 20 20 BPOUT 1
BPOUT 1E 21 21 BPOUT 1E
CLEAR
BZOUT 1 22 22 BZOUT 1
BZOUT 1E 23 23 BZOUT 1E
WHITE-YELLOW
MTROUT 1+ 24 24 MTROUT 1+
WHITE-WHITE
MTROUT 1- 25 25 MTROUT 1-
MTORUT 1E 26 26 MTORUT 1E
H-2695111153
(JRC SUPPLY )
B 44
DISPLAY1 DISPLAY2 DISPLAY3 DISPLAY4
NCD-4990 NCD-4990 NCD-4990 NCD-4990
TB4201 TB4201 TB4201 TB4201
1 1 1 1
1 VDIN 1 1 VDIN 1 1 VDIN 1 1 VDIN 1
2 VDIN 1E 2 VDIN 1E 2 VDIN 1E 2 VDIN 1E
BLU BLU BLU BLU
3 TRIGIN 1 3 TRIGIN 1 3 TRIGIN 1 3 TRIGIN 1
4 TRIGIN 1E 4 TRIGIN 1E 4 TRIGIN 1E 4 TRIGIN 1E
YEL YEL YEL YEL
5 BPIN 1 5 BPIN 1 5 BPIN 1 5 BPIN 1
6 BPIN 1E 6 BPIN 1E 6 BPIN 1E 6 BPIN 1E
GRN GRN GRN GRN
7 BZIN 1 7 BZIN 1 7 BZIN 1 7 BZIN 1
8 BZIN 1E 8 BZIN 1E 8 BZIN 1E 8 BZIN 1E
WHT-BLU W HT-BLU WHT-BLU WHT-BLU
9 MTRIN 1+ 9 MTRIN 1+ 9 MTRIN 1+ 9 MTRIN 1+
WHT-WHT WHT-WHT WHT-WHT WHT-WHT
10 M TRIN 1- 10 M TRIN 1- 10 MTRIN 1- 10 MTRIN 1-
11 MTRIN 1E 11 MTRIN 1E 11 MTRIN 1E 11 M TRIN 1E
ORG ORG ORG ORG
12 PWRIN 1+ 12 PWRIN 1+ 12 PWRIN 1+ 12 PWRIN 1+
BLK BLK BLK BLK
13 PWRIN 1E 13 PWRIN 1E 13 PW RIN 1E 13 PWRIN 1E
PNK PNK PNK PNK
14 PWROUT 1 14 PWROUT 1 14 PWROUT 1 14 PWROUT 1
BRN BRN BRN BRN
15 PWROUT 1E 15 PWROUT 1E 15 PWROUT 1E 15 PWROUT 1E
2 2 2 2
16 VDOUT 1 16 VDOUT 1 16 VDOUT 1 16 VDOUT 1
17 VDOUT 1E 17 VDOUT 1E 17 VDOUT 1E 17 VDOUT 1E
RED RED RED RED
18 TRIGOUT 1 18 TRIGOUT 1 18 TRIGOUT 1 18 TRIGOUT 1
19 TRIGOUT 1E 19 TRIGOUT 1E 19 TRIGOUT 1E 19 TRIGOUT 1E
PUR PUR PUR PUR
20 BPOUT 1 20 BPOUT 1 20 BPOUT 1 20 BPOUT 1
21 BPOUT 1E 21 BPOUT 1E 21 BPOUT 1E 21 BPOUT 1E
CLR CLR CLR CLR
22 BZOUT 1 22 BZOUT 1 22 BZOUT 1 22 BZOUT 1
23 BZOUT 1E 23 BZOUT 1E 23 BZOUT 1E 23 BZOUT 1E
WHT-YEL WHT-YEL WHT-YEL WHT-YEL
24 M TROUT 1+ 24 MTROUT 1+ 24 MTROUT 1+ 24 MTROUT 1+
WHT-WHT WHT-WHT WHT-WHT WHT-WHT
B 45
25 MTROUT 1- 25 MTROUT 1- 25 MTROUT 1- 25 MTROUT 1-
26 MTORUT 1E 26 MTORUT 1E 26 MTORUT 1E 26 MTORUT 1E
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual
NKE-3141-4
CCL-304R
>
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
YEL PUR YEL PUR YEL PUR YEL PUR
>
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
G RN CL R 7 G RN WH T 7 GR N WHT 7 GR N WHT 7
H-2695111153
H-2695111153
H-2695111153
H-2695111153
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
WH T-BL U WHT -YEL WH T-BLU WHT-Y EL WH T-BLU W HT-YEL WH T-BLU WHT-Y EL
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
WH T-WHT WH T-WHT WH T-WH T WH T-WHT WH T-WH T WH T-WHT WH T-WH T WH T-WHT
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
11 11 OR 11 11 11 11 11 11
ORG O RG OR G
12 G 12 12 12
BL K BLK BLK BLK
13 13 13 13
PN K PN K PN K PN K
14 14 14 14
(JRC SUPPLY )
(JRC SUPPLY )
(JRC SUPPLY )
(JRC SUPPLY )
BR N BR N BR N BRN
15 15 15 15
B.9 Inter Switch Unit
B
B.9.2
H-7ZCRD0971 J1 CBD-1675 2 2
GND GND
>
1 1 VIN 3 3
GND GND
2 2 +
VIN 4 4 CCL-304
+15V +15V
- 5 5
GND GND
6 6
Terminal board 5V 5V
B.DRAWINGS
J4308 ISW
>
CH-1 CH-2
CH-3 CH-4
CQD-1973 CQD-1973
Interconnection Diagram
B.9 Inter Switch Unit
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
B 46
1
J3 J3
1
26
26
1
1
26
26
E
H -7ZCRD 0921 P904 J904
1
AC
2 (L)
FG
3
1 2 AC CCL-304
TB901 4 (N)
5
U V TE901 TRT
6
AC100V-240V P+
7
TRT
8 P-
9
CD9 E
10
01 PO WLED
B 47
CH-1 CH -2 CH-3 CH-4
R901
1
>
TO TO TO
DISPLAY1 DISPLAY2 DISPLAY3
B.9 Inter Switch Unit
B
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > B.DRAWINGS > B.9 Inter Switch Unit
B 48
Appendix C
Menu Index
Menu Index
C.1 Main ....................................................................................................... C-1
C.2 PI ............................................................................................................ C-5
C.3 TT ........................................................................................................... C-7
C.4 AIS ......................................................................................................... C-8
C.5 AZ .......................................................................................................... C-9
C.6 Track .................................................................................................... C-10
C.7 Route ................................................................................................... C-11
C.8 U.Map .................................................................................................. C-12
C.9 Serviceman Menu ............................................................................... C-14
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > C.Menu Index > C.1 Main
C.1 Main
C
3. Trails Reduction - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8.2.3 on page 3-96
5. Trails Process - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8.2.4 on page 3-96
C 1
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > C.Menu Index > C.1 Main
C 2
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > C.Menu Index > C.1 Main
3. ROT
4. RSA
5. Time Zone
6. Date/Time
7. Sub Menu
1. Display Color Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8.5.1 on page 3-99
1. Day/Night - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8.5.2 on page 3-100
2. Outer PPI
3. Inner PPI
4. Character
5. RADAR Video
6. RADAR Trails(Time)
8. Target Symbol
9. Next
1. Cursor
2. Range Rings
3. EBL/VRM/PI
4. Own Symbol/HL/Vector
2. Brilliance Setting- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8.5.3 on page 3-100
1. RADAR Video - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8.5.4 on page 3-101
2. RADAR Trails
3. Target Symbol - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8.5.5 on page 3-102
4. Range Rings
5. EBL/VRM/PI
6. Character
7. Own Symbol/HL/Vector
8. Keyboard
3. User Setting
1. Load User Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.10.1 on page 3-118
2. Save User Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.10.2 on page 3-119
3. Delete User Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.10.3 on page 3-119
4. Option Key Setting
1. Option1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8.7 on page 3-103
2. Option2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8.7 on page 3-103
5. Buzzer Volume - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8.6 on page 3-102
1. Key ACK
2. OPE Miss
3. CPA/TCPA Alarm
4. New Target Alarm
5. Lost Alarm
6. Navigation Alarm
7. System Alarm
8. Inter Switch
6. Date/Time Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.7 on page 7-20
1. UTC/LMT
2. LMT Date
3. LMT Time
4. Time Zone
5. Display Style
6. Synchronize with GPS
7. Screen Capture Setting
1. Select Item
1. Graphic
2. RADAR Video
3. RADAR Trails
4. Map
2. Select Card Slot
3. File Erase
4. AUTO Capture Interval
5. AUTO File Erase
9. EBL/Cursor Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 4.1.3 on page 4-3
1. EBL1 Bearing Fix
2. EBL2 Bearing Fix
3. Cursor Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 4.1.3.3 on page 4-5
1. EBL/VRM Control Cursor
2. Cursor Length
4. Cursor Pattern
C
8. Plot Setting
6. AUTO Backup - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8.9 on page 3-110
9. Test Menu - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 8.3.1 on page 8-7
C 3
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > C.Menu Index > C.1 Main
C 4
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > C.Menu Index > C.2 PI
C.2 PI
All:All2
Individual:Sequential
Individual:Index Line 1
Individual:Index Line 2
Individual:Index Line 3
Individual:Index Line 4
Individual:Index Line 5
Individual:Index Line 6
Individual:Index Line 7
Individual:Index Line 8
Track:Group 1
Track:Group 2
Track:Group 3
Track:Group 4
Equiangular:Group 1
Equiangular:Group 2
Equiangular:Group 3
Equiangular:Group 4
4. Floating - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - page 4-11
5. Heading Link - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - page 4-11
6. Next
8. Press EBL Dial to Control PI#3
9. Press VRM Dial to Move End Point#ii
1. Range Scale Link - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -page 4-12
2. Reference Bearingi- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - page 4-12
All:True4
All:HL
Individual:True
Individual:HL
Individual:Index Line 1
Individual:Index Line 2
Individual:Index Line 3
Individual:Index Line 4
Individual:Index Line 5
Individual:Index Line 6
Individual:Index Line 7
Individual:Index Line 8
Track:True
Track:HL
Track:Index Line 1
Track:Index Line 2
Track:Index Line 3
Track:Index Line 4
Track:Index Line 5
Track:Index Line 6
Track:Index Line 7
Track:Index Line 8
3. Operation Area - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -page 4-13
4. Display for Individual Line - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -page 4-13
1. Index Line 1
2. Index Line 2
3. Index Line 3
4. Index Line 4
5. Index Line 5
6. Index Line 6
7. Index Line 7
8. Index Line 8
8. Press EBL Dial to Control PI#ii
9. Press VRM Dial to Move End Point#ii
C 6
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > C.Menu Index > C.3 TT
C.3 TT
1. Association Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.4 on page 5-38
1. Association
2. Proprity
3. Bearing
4. Range
5. Course
6. Speed
7. Applicable AIS Target
2. Target Track Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.6.2 on page 5-45
1. Target Track Function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.6.2.2 on page 5-45
2. Target Track Color - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.6.2.1 on page 5-45
1. All
2. Target Track No.1
3. Target Track No.2
4. Target Track No.3
5. Target Track No.4
6. Target Track No.5
7. Target Track No.6
8. Target Track No.7
9. Next
1. Target Track No.8
2. Target Track No.9
3. Target Track No.10
4. Other
3. Target Track Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.6.2.4 on page 5-47
1. All
2. Target Track No.1
3. Target Track No.2
4. Target Track No.3
5. Target Track No.4
6. Target Track No.5
7. Target Track No.6
8. Target Track No.7
9. Next
1. Target Track No.8
2. Target Track No.9
3. Target Track No.10
4. Other
4. Track Memory Interval - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.6.2.5 on page 5-48
5. Clear Track Color - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.6.2.6 on page 5-48
6. Clear Track Number
7. File Operations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.6.2.7 on page 5-49
1. Select Card Slot
2. Load Mode
3. Load - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -page 5-50
4. Save - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -page 5-51
5. Erase - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -page 5-52
6. Card T.TRK Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -page 5-53
3. Trial Maneuver - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.7 on page 5-54
1. Trial Function
2. Course(EBL)
3. Speed(VRM)
4. Vector Time
5. Time to Maneuver
6. Own Ship's Dynamic Trait
1. Reach
3. Turn Radius
4. Acceleration
5. Deceleration
4. Target Number Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.2.4 on page 5-19
9. TT Test Menu - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.2.7 on page 5-22
1. Test Video - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.2.7.1 on page 5-23
2. TT Simulator - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
C
section 5.2.7.2 on page 5-24
3. Status - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.2.7.3 on page 5-25
4. Gate Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.2.7.4 on page 5-26
C 7
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > C.Menu Index > C.4 AIS
C.4 AIS
C 8
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > C.Menu Index > C.5 AZ
C.5 AZ
C
C 9
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > C.Menu Index > C.6 Track
C.6 Track
C 10
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > C.Menu Index > C.7 Route
C.7 Route
C
C 11
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > C.Menu Index > C.8 U.Map
C.8 U.Map
C 12
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > C.Menu Index > C.8 U.Map
5. Green
6. Yellow
7. Pink
8. Red
3. Select Mark Size - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.6.2.3 on page 3-51
4. Comment Font Size - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.6.2.4 on page 3-52
6. Geodetic - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.6.6 on page 3-65
7. File Operations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.6.5 on page 3-61
1. Select Card Slot
2. Load Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.6.5.1 on page 3-61
3. Load - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.6.5.1 on page 3-61
4. Unload - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.6.5.2 on page 3-62
5. Save - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.6.5.3 on page 3-62
6. Erase - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.6.5.4 on page 3-63
7. Card Mark Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.6.5.5 on page 3-64
C
C 13
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > C.Menu Index > C.9 Serviceman Menu
C 14
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > C.Menu Index > C.9 Serviceman Menu
3. TTD(TT)
4. TLB(TT)
5. OSD
6. RSD
7. ALR
8. ACK
9. Next
1. TTM(AIS)
2. TLL(AIS)
3. TTD(AIS)
4. TLB(AIS)
5. Remote Maintenance
6. JRC-ARPA
7. NMEA0183 Output Format
8. NMEA0183 Talker
9. Next
1. NMEA0183 TX Interval
2. APB
3. BOD
4. GGA
5. GLL
6. RMC
7. RMB
8. VTG
9. Next
1. XTE
2. BWC
3. HDT
4. THS
7. Line Monitor
1. COMPASS
2. MAINTENANCE/LOG
3. NAV1
4. NAV2
5. ALARM
6. JARPA
7. AIS
8. BRIDGE NET
9. Next
1. ARPA
2. COM
3. TXRX/ISW
4. KEYBOARD1
5. KEYBOARD2
6. Alarm System - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.9 on page 7-22
1. Watch Alarm
1. Reset Interval - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.9.1 on page 7-22
2. Trackball Threshold - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.9.2 on page 7-22
2. Relay Output - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.9.3 on page 7-23
1. Relay Output Mode
2. TT CPA/TCPA
3. AIS CPA/TCPA
4. New Target
5. Lost
6. RADAR Alarm
3. ALR Output - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.9.4 on page 7-23
1. System Alarm
2. TT/AIS Alarm
4. Sound Output Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.9.6 on page 7-25
5. External ACK Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.9.5 on page 7-24
1. Critical Alarm
1. Audio
2Indication
3. Acknowledge State
2. Normal Alarm
1. Audio
2. Indication
C
3. Acknowledge State
7. Inter Switch
1. ISW Install
C 15
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > C.Menu Index > C.9 Serviceman Menu
2. Mask Setting
1. No.1 Connection/No.1 Master
2. No.2 Connection/No.2 Master
3. No.3 Connection/No.3 Master
4. No.4 Connection/No.4 Master
5. No.5 Connection/No.5 Master1
6. No.6 Connection/No.6 Masteri
7. No.7 Connection/No.7 Masteri
8. No.8 Connection/No.8 Masteri
3. S-ISW TXRX Power Supply
8. Language - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.6 on page 7-20
9. Next
1. Input BP Count - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.5.2 on page 7-19
2. TNI Blank - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.3 on page 7-17
1. TNI Blank - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.3.1 on page 7-17
2. Make Sector - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.3.2 on page 7-17
3. Device Installation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.1.6 on page 7-8
1. Gyro
2. Compass
3. GPS Compass
4. LOG
5. 2AXW
6. 2AXG
7. GPS
4. Network
1. Network Function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.10.1 on page 7-27
2. IP Address
3. Sensor Priority- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.10.2 on page 7-27
4. Synchronization - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.10.3 on page 7-28
5. LAN Port Setting
1. TX Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.11.1 on page 7-29
2. RX Port - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.11.2 on page 7-30
3. RX Sentence - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.11.3 on page 7-31
3. Maintenance Menu
1. Safety Switch - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.4.1 on page 7-39
2. Area Initial - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.4.2 on page 7-40
1. Partial Master Reset - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.4.2.1 on page 7-40
1. Serviceman Menu
2. Except Serviceman Menu
3. User Setting
4. TT Setting
5. AIS Setting
6. Day/Night
7. JRC Card Copy Record
2. All Master Reset - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.4.2.2 on page 7-40
3. Internal To Card2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.4.3.1 on page 7-41
4. Card2 To Internal - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.4.3.2 on page 7-41
5. TXRX Time - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.4.4 on page 7-42
1. Clear TX Time - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.4.4.1 on page 7-42
2. Clear Motor Time - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.4.4.2 on page 7-42
3. TXRX to Display Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.4.4.3 on page 7-43
4. Display Unit to TXRX - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.4.4.4 on page 7-43
6. String Data Update - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.4.5 on page 7-44
9. RADAR/TT Initial Setup
1. Signal Processing - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.3.1 on page 7-32
1. Echo Noise Level - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.3.1.1 on page 7-32
2. Setting Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.3.1.2 on page 7-33
2. TT- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.3.2 on page 7-33
1. Vector Constant - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.3.2.1 on page 7-33
2. Video TD Level - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.3.2.2 on page 7-34
3. Video High Level
4. Video Low Level
5. Gate Size
6. Limit Ring
3. MBS- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.3.3 on page 7-35
1. MBS Level- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.3.3.1 on page 7-35
2. MBS Area - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.3.3.2 on page 7-36
C 16
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > C.Menu Index > C.9 Serviceman Menu
C
C 17
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > C.Menu Index > C.9 Serviceman Menu
C 18
For further information,contact:
URL http://www.jrc.co.jp
Marine Service Department
Telephone : +81-3-3492-1305
Facsimile : +81-3-3779-1420
e-mail : [email protected]
AMSTERDAM Branch
Telephone : +31-20-658-0750
Facsimile : +31-20-658-0755
e-mail : [email protected]
SEATTLE Branch
Telephone : +1-206-654-5644
Facsimile : +1-206-654-7030
e-mail : [email protected]
CODE No.7ZPRD0685 01ETM ISO 9001, ISO 14001 Certified
SEP. 2011 Edition 6 JRC Printed in Japan